manualshive.com logo in svg

Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5500 Series, Service Manual, Page: 759 / 1331

Share
Download
Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5500 Series Service Manual Download Page 759

COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD

GAIN2-EG

2

Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(G):back

Detail

To display the Green gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
Scanner Unit (for back side).
Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller
PCB.

Use Case

- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure

Adj/Set/Operate Method

N/A (Display only)

Display/Adj/Set Range

0 to 65535

Appropriate Target Value

0 - 143

GAIN2-EB

2

Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(B):back

Detail

To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
Scanner Unit (for back side).
Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller
PCB.

Use Case

- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure

Adj/Set/Operate Method

N/A (Display only)

Display/Adj/Set Range

0 to 65535

Appropriate Target Value

0 - 143

OFST2-CL

2

Dspl Read Sensor offset value:clr, back

Detail

To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for back side) in color scanning
mode.

Use Case

When image failure occurs at back side scanning in color mode

Adj/Set/Operate Method

N/A (Display only)

Display/Adj/Set Range

0 to 116

■ DPOT

COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT

2TR-PPR

2

For R&D

Amount of Change per

Unit

1

2TR-BASE

2

For R&D

Amount of Change per

Unit

1

1TR-DC-Y

2

For R&D

Amount of Change per

Unit

1

1TR-DC-M

2

For R&D

Amount of Change per

Unit

1

1TR-DC-C

2

For R&D

Amount of Change per

Unit

1

1TR-DC-K

2

For R&D

Amount of Change per

Unit

1

8. Service Mode

745

Summary of Contents for imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5500 Series

Page 1: ...Revision 2 0 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5500 Series Service Manual ...

Page 2: ...g or short period Canon will issue a new edition of this manual The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law Trademarks The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies Copyright This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved Under the copyright laws this manual ma...

Page 3: ... door and closing the delivery unit door which results in supplying the machine with power 2 In the digital circuits 1 is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is High while 0 is used to indicate Low The voltage value however differs from circuit to circuit In addition the asterisk as in DRMD indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when 0 In practically all cases the internal me...

Page 4: ...es 11 Toner Container 11 Setup Guide 12 Introduction of Situation Mode 12 Limiting of Color Printing 13 Specifications 15 Product Specifications 15 Weight and Size 17 Productivity 17 Paper type 17 Parts Name 26 External View 26 Cross Section View 31 Control Panel 32 2 Technology 33 Basic Configuration 34 Functional Configuration 34 Original Exposure System 35 Overview 35 Magnification Ratio 43 Ori...

Page 5: ...fer Control 83 Secondary Transfer Control 88 Pre exposure Control 95 Image Stabilization Control 96 Toner Supply Control 102 Waste Toner Feed Control 113 Other Controls 115 Fixing System 118 Overview 118 Overview of Fixing Temperature Control 120 Standby temperature control 121 Print temperature control 122 Down sequence control 123 Fixing Film Edge Cooling Control 125 Film Unit Engagement Disenga...

Page 6: ...it 225 Removing the ADF Pickup Roller and the ADF Feed Roller 226 Installing the ADF Pickup Roller Unit 228 Removing the ADF 230 Installing the White Plate 231 Removing the ADF Scanner Unit 233 Cleaning the Paper Back Reading Glass 236 Removing the Rear Cover 237 Cleaning the Lead Roller 1 2 3 238 Removing the ADF Driver PCB 242 Removing the Reader Controller PCB 243 Cleaning the Reader Scanner Un...

Page 7: ...te Toner Container 317 Pulling out the Process Unit 317 Removing the Process Unit 320 Installing the Process Unit 321 Removing the Drum Unit 325 Installing the Drum Unit 326 Removing the Developing Unit 328 Installing a New Developing Unit 331 Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit 333 Removing the Secondary Transfer Roller Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit 337 Installing the Secondary Transfer...

Page 8: ...ing the Multi purpose Tray Feed Separation Roller 394 Removing the Pickup Delivery Separation Roller Cassette 1 2 397 Removing the Right Door 398 Removing the Cassette 1 2 Pickup Unit 401 Removing the Transparency Sensor Registration Sensor 403 5 Adjustment 406 Pickup Feed System 407 Image Position Adjustment 407 Geometric Characteristics Adjustment 410 Original Exposure System 415 Reader Assembly...

Page 9: ...sing Service Mode Method 5 468 Service Mode Relating to Debug Logs 468 Collecting the Log of Key Operations 471 Network Packet Capture 472 7 Error Jam Alarm 480 Overview 481 Location Code 481 Pickup Position Code 481 Pickup size 481 Points to Note When Clearing MN CON 483 Points to Note When Clearing HDD 483 Error Code 484 Error Code Details 484 Jam Code 629 Jam Type 629 Jam screen display specifi...

Page 10: ...PTION 1074 SORTER 1075 ADJUST 1075 FUNCTION 1086 OPTION 1091 BOARD 1096 OPTION 1096 9 Installation 1097 How to Check this Installation Procedure 1099 Symbols 1099 Points to Note at Installation 1100 Checking before Installation 1101 Checking Power Supply 1101 Checking the Installation Environment 1101 Checking the Installation Space 1101 Points to Note before Installation 1101 Combination Table of...

Page 11: ...heck Item When Turning OFF the Main Power 1146 Installation Outline Drawing 1146 Installation Procedure 1146 NFC Kit B1 Flat Control Panel 1151 Points to Note before Installation 1151 Checking the Contents 1151 Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power 1151 Installation Outline Drawing 1151 Installation procedure 1151 Setting after Installation 1159 Reader Heater Unit J1 1160 Checking the Content...

Page 12: ...re 1195 Serial Interface Kit K3 Copy Control Interface Kit A1 1201 Points to Note at Installation 1201 Checking the Contents 1201 Check Items When Turning OFF the Main Power 1202 Installation Outline Drawing 1202 Installation Procedure 1202 Document Scan Lock Kit B1 1206 Points to Note at Installation 1206 Checking the Contents 1206 Check Items When Turning OFF the Main Power 1206 Installation Out...

Page 13: ...PE 6 2 Option HDDs 1TB HDD Mirroring Kit 1252 Checking the Contents 1252 Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power 1252 Installation Procedure 1252 TYPE 7 2 Option HDDs 1TB Removable HDD Kit HDD Mirroring Kit 1259 Checking the Contents 1259 Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power 1259 Installation Procedure 1259 Voice Guidance Kit G1 1269 Points to Note at Installation 1269 Checking the Conten...

Page 14: ...Work Procedure 1300 Target PCBs of Automatic Update 1303 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored 1304 Contents xi ...

Page 15: ...er Safety 2 Handling of Laser System 2 Turn power switch ON 2 Power Supply 3 Toner Safety 3 Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery 3 Notes Before it Works Serving 4 Points to Note at Cleaning 4 Notes on Assembly Disassembly 4 ...

Page 16: ...t interlock switches be sure not to enter the laser beam into an eye during the work The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles EN60950 1 Diese Maschine ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet Innerhalb der Maschine wird jedoch ein Laserstrahl der Klasse 3B ausgestrahlt und es ist gefährlich wenn dieser Strahl in die Augen gerät Bei Servicearbeiten am oder in der Nähe ...

Page 17: ...d near the equipment and shall be easily accessible Toner Safety About Toner Toner is a nontoxic matter composed of plastic iron and a trace of pigments CAUTION Never throw toner in flames to avoid explosion Handling Adhered Toner Use dry tissue paper to wipe off toner adhered to skin or clothes and wash in water Never use warm water for cleaning up toner to prevent toner particles from being gela...

Page 18: ...onent of solvent is vaporized completely before assembling Notes on Assembly Disassembly Follow the items below to assemble disassemble the device 1 Disconnect the power plug to avoid any potential dangers during assembling disassembling works 2 If not specially instructed reverse the order of disassembly to reinstall 3 Ensure to use the right screw type length diameter etc at the right position w...

Page 19: ...Product Overview 1 Product Lineup 6 Features 11 Specifications 15 Parts Name 26 ...

Page 20: ...ical value indicates the print speed ppm print per minute C5560 C5550 C5540 C5535 Print speed BW Color 60 60 ppm 50 50 ppm 40 40 ppm 35 35 ppm Positioning High speed High image quality Middle Office machine Target machine imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255 C5250 C5240 C5235 series 1 Product Overview 6 ...

Page 21: ...nit F1 Paper Deck Heater Unit C1 3 2 cassette Pedestal AM1 4 High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit A1 Cassette Heater Unit 41 5 FL Cassette AZ1 6 FL Cassette BA1 Tab Paper Attachment F1 7 Inner 2 way Tray J1 8 Buffer Path Unit L1 9 Inner Finisher H1 Inner 2 3 Hole Puncher B1 Inner 2 4 Hole Puncher B1 1 Product Overview 7 ...

Page 22: ...r Supply Cable W1 Image Reading System Options 4 3 2 1 5 No Product name Condition 1 Copyboard Cover Type W Cannot be installed with the DADF Cannot be installed with Printer Cover J1 2 Printer Cover J1 Cannot be installed with the DADF Cannot be installed with Copyboard Cover Type W 3 Stamp Ink Cartridge C1 DADF is required 4 ADF Access Handle A1 5 Reader Heater Unit J1 1 Product Overview 8 ...

Page 23: ...Copy Card Reader Attachment B5 It is required when installing Copy Card Reader F1 7 Serial Interface Kit K3 Cannot be installed with Copy Card Reader F1 Cannot be installed with Copy Control Interface Kit A1 8 Copy Control Interface Kit A1 Cannot be installed with Copy Card Reader F1 Cannot be installed with Serial Interface Kit K3 9 2 5inch 250GB HDD N1 It is required when using the mirroring fun...

Page 24: ...Open I F board unit for GX500 Open I F board unit for P1 License Products At the time of installation obtain the license number according to the license certificate included Then enter the obtained license number from the Control Panel of the machine The applicable functions are enabled There is no physically required installation Product name Condition Remote Fax Kit A1 IP FAX Expansion Kit B1 PC...

Page 25: ...n of Large Waste Toner Container Support of staple free stapling Support of manual stapling Toner Container This equipment uses IAP Insulated Air Pressure toner bottles Characteristics Description Toner supply mouth Smaller diameter Toner soiling resistant soiling resistant Toner supply Air assist method Enables stable toner supply even through the small supply mouth Design without a cap member Im...

Page 26: ...ettings Sets the IP address subnet and gateway 6 DNS Proxy Settings DNS Proxy Settings 7 Selection Counry Retion FAX TYPE set tings Skipped depending on the country The countries that require selection are USA EUR and ASIA 8 FAX Settings Sipped if no G3 fax Configuration of a second line is outside the scope of the Setup Guide 9 Auto Adjust Gradation Executes auto gradation adjustment 10 Output Re...

Page 27: ...r Adjustment Major items of adjustment Sensor Check Operation Check of Electrical Components Parts Check Limiting of Color Printing Even if an error attributed to the Developing Unit or drum of any of the Y M C colors has occurred B W printing and copying remain possible without entering the limited printer function mode where the entire printing function stops 1 Product Overview 13 ...

Page 28: ...1 Product Overview 14 ...

Page 29: ...ection func tion Yes Leading edge image margin 4 0 mm 1 5 1 0 mm Left image margin 2 5 mm 1 5 mm 2 sided 2 5 mm 2 0 mm Warm up time 1 When the Main Power is turned ON Quick startup OFF 30 sec or less imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5535 32 sec or less Quick startup ON 10 sec or less Startup from sleep mode Sleep Mode Eco Exit OFF 10 sec or less Sleep Mode Eco Exit ON 15 sec or less First copy time imageRUNNE...

Page 30: ...gatanaga 3 Custom size Width 98 0 to 320 0 mm Length 98 4 to 1200 mm Free size Width 98 0 to 320 0 mm Length 139 7 to 457 2 mm Free size long original Width 98 0 to 320 0 mm Length 457 3 to 1200 mm Pickup capacity Cassette 550 sheets 80 g m2 640 sheets 64 g m2 Multi purpose Tray 106 sheets 80 g m2 120 sheets 64 g m2 Duplex method Through pass duplex Memory capacity Capacity of 2 GB for controller ...

Page 31: ...mm Width direction mm Custom paper size 1 1 98 4 to 139 6 98 to 297 Custom paper size 1 2 98 4 to 139 6 297 1 to 304 8 Custom paper size 1 3 98 4 to 139 6 304 9 to 320 Custom paper size 1 4 139 7 to 147 9 98 to 128 4 Custom paper size 1 5 148 to 181 9 98 to 128 4 Custom paper size 1 6 139 7 to 147 9 128 5 to 139 6 Custom paper size 1 7 148 to 181 9 128 5 to 139 6 Custom paper size 2 1 182 to 215 9...

Page 32: ...aper 1 64 to 75 Plain paper 2 76 to 90 Plain paper 3 91 to 105 Color paper 64 to 81 Heavy paper 1 106 to 128 Heavy paper 2 129 to 150 Heavy paper 3 151 to 163 Heavy paper 4 164 to 180 Heavy paper 5 181 to 220 Heavy paper 6 221 to 256 Letterhead 106 to 163 Paper size Pickup position Multi pur pose Tray Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck Unit F1 High Capaci ty Cassette Feeding Un...

Page 33: ...e C Custom paper size 1 5 Custom paper size 1 7 Custom paper size 2 5 Custom paper size D Custom paper size 2 1 Custom paper size 2 2 Custom paper size 2 6 Custom paper size 2 7 Custom paper size 2 8 Custom paper size 3 1 Custom paper size 3 2 Custom paper size 3 3 Custom paper size E Custom paper size 3 4 Custom paper size 4 1 Custom paper size 4 2 Custom paper size 4 3 Custom paper size 4 4 Cust...

Page 34: ...tom paper size 1 3 Custom paper size B Custom paper size 1 4 Custom paper size 1 5 Custom paper size 1 6 Custom paper size 1 7 Custom paper size 2 1 Custom paper size 2 2 Custom paper size 2 3 Custom paper size 2 4 Custom paper size 2 5 Custom paper size 2 6 Custom paper size 2 7 Custom paper size 2 8 Custom paper size 3 1 Custom paper size 3 2 Custom paper size 3 3 Custom paper size 3 4 Custom pa...

Page 35: ...s Yes Yes No No I LGL Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Free Yes No No No No No No Free Long length No No No No No No No Custom size A No No No No No No No Custom size B Yes No No No No No No Custom size C Yes Yes No No No No No Custom size D Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Custom size E Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Custom paper size A Custom paper size 1 1 Custom paper size 1 2 Custom paper size 1 3 Custom paper si...

Page 36: ... No No No No No STMTR Yes No No No No No No STMT Yes No No No No No No SRA3 Yes No No No No No No 12x18 Yes No No No No No No EXEC Yes No No No No No No OFFICIO Yes No No No No No No E OFFICIO Yes No No No No No No B OFFICIO Yes No No No No No No M OFFICIO Yes No No No No No No A OFFICIO Yes No No No No No No A LTR Yes No No No No No No A LTRR Yes No No No No No No GLTR R Yes No No No No No No GLT...

Page 37: ... pur pose Tray Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck Unit F1 High Capaci ty Cassette Feeding Unit A1 A3 Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No A4R Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No 11x17 Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No LTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No LTRR Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Custom size A No No No No No No No Custom size B Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Custom paper size A Custom pape...

Page 38: ...er weight g m2 Postcard Reply postcard 4 on 1 postcard 164 to 220 Paper size Pickup position Multi pur pose Tray Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck Unit F1 High Capaci ty Cassette Feeding Unit A1 Postcard Yes No No No No No No Reply Postcard Yes No No No No No No 4 on 1 Postcard Yes No No No No No No Pickup Specifications 10 11 Type paper weight g m2 Tab Paper 1 91 to 105 Tab p...

Page 39: ...aper size A Custom paper size 1 1 Custom paper size 1 2 Custom paper size 1 3 Custom paper size 1 4 Custom paper size 1 5 Custom paper size 1 6 Custom paper size 1 7 Custom paper size 2 1 Custom paper size 2 2 Custom paper size 2 3 Custom paper size 2 4 Custom paper size 2 5 Custom paper size 2 6 Custom paper size 2 7 Custom paper size 2 8 Custom paper size 3 1 Custom paper size 3 2 Custom paper s...

Page 40: ...2 Control Panel 11 Right Lower Door 3 ADF 12 Cassette Right Door 4 USB Port Right Front 13 Cassette 1 5 Right Upper Cover 14 Cassette 2 6 USB Port Right Rear 15 Waste Toner Cover 7 USB Connector 16 Toner Identification Mark 8 LAN Port 17 Main Power Supply Switch 9 Multi purpose Tray 1 Product Overview 26 ...

Page 41: ...er 19 Delivery Tray 22 Push out Stopper 20 Front Cover Rear side of the machine No Name No Name 1 Extension phone line terminal LINE 4 LINE 3 LINE 2 from above 3 Handset connection terminal Handset 2 Phone line terminal LINE 1 4 External phone terminal EXT 1 Product Overview 27 ...

Page 42: ... Inside of the host machine No Name No Name 1 Dustproof Glass Cleaning Tool 3 Waste Toner Container 2 Toner Container 1 Product Overview 28 ...

Page 43: ...t Delivery Extension Tray 4 Document Pickup Tray 10 Document Stopper 5 Document Pickup Extension Tray 11 Document Delivery Tray 6 Document Read Area 12 Unremoved Document Lamp Multi purpose Tray No Name No Name 1 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Side Guide Plate 3 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Sub Tray 2 Multi purpose Tray 1 Product Overview 29 ...

Page 44: ... Cassette Cassette 1 Cassette 2 No Name No Name 1 Trailing Edge Guide Plate 2 Side Guide Plate 1 Product Overview 30 ...

Page 45: ...Unit 3 Cassette 1 Pickup Unit 12 Developing Assembly Drum Unit 4 Cassette 2 Pickup Unit 13 Laser Scanner Unit 5 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Unit 14 Waste Toner Container 6 Registration Unit 15 Reader Unit 7 Fixing Assembly 16 ADF Unit 8 Duplex Delivery Unit 17 Reader Scanner Unit 9 Toner Bottle 18 ADF Scanner Unit 1 Product Overview 31 ...

Page 46: ...meric keys 10 Main Power indicator 3 Energy Saver key 11 Error indicator 4 Counter Device Information key 12 Processing Data indicator 5 Brightness Adjustment key 13 Reset key 6 Settings key 14 ID Log In Out key 7 Clear key 15 NFC If equipped with NFC Kit B1 8 Stop key 16 Touch panel display 1 Product Overview 32 ...

Page 47: ...chnology 2 Basic Configuration 34 Original Exposure System 35 Controller System 61 Laser Exposure System 67 Image Formation System 75 Fixing System 118 Pickup Feed System 129 External Auxiliary System 150 ...

Page 48: ... block fixing system block and pickup feed system block Cassette 2 Cassette 1 Pickup Laser Scanner Unit 1 Reader Controller Main Controller Option Board DC Controller Laser Scanner Unit 2 Transfer Fixing Delivery CCD HDD Exposure Lamp Duplexing Feed Document exposure system Controller system Fixing system Image formation system Laser exposure system Pickup feed system Flow of paper Flow of signal ...

Page 49: ...er Assembly Item Specification Function Remarks Photo conductor White high luminance LED light guide plate Scanning of original At copyboard reading Scanning by moving Scanner Unit When Using ADF Stream scanning of original with fixed Scanner Unit Reading resolution Black White 600 dpi x 600 dpi Color 600 dpi x 600 dpi Number of gradations 256 gradations Carriage position detec tion Scanner Unit H...

Page 50: ...n 42 g m2 width 257 mm B5 size or more and 1 sided single sheet delivery A B For originals exceeding 432 mm 1 sided single sheet feed 60 to 90 g m2 Original size A3 A4 A4R A5 A5R B4 B5 B5R B6R LDR LGL LTR LTRR STMT STMTR 8K 16K 16KR Feed direction 139 7 to 432 mm STMT to 17 inch 432 to 630 mm originals can also be read see the note Width direction 128 to 304 8 mm B6R to 12 inch B6 paper can only b...

Page 51: ...D 300 dpi BW 160 ipm CL 160 ipm Power Supply DC 24 V DC 12 V Supplied by the connected equipment 1 To use the Long Original mode select the following service mode LV 2 and set it to 1 default 0 COPIER OPTION USER MF LG ST Basic Configuration Reader Assembly Parts Configuration Backward Forward 1 2 3 4 6 9 8 7 5 10 11 Key No Name Code Function Specification 1 Scanner Unit Image reading analog image...

Page 52: ...ding Sensor to perform original exposure and reading Light emitted from the LED is reflected by the original and reaches the Reading Sensor through the Reflection Mirror and the Lens Unit LED light source Red R line CCD Lens mirror No 4 mirror No 2 mirror No 3 mirror No 1 mirror No 5 Lens Green G line Blue B line Black White B W line LED Lamp Unit The LED Lamp Unit emits light from the 2 LED Lamp ...

Page 53: ...ront shading Shading error E302 0001 Error in paper front white shading E302 0002 Error in paper front black shading ADF Function Configuration A list of functions is indicated below Power Supply Assembly Original Feed Assembly Original Pickup Assembly Original Pickup Tray Original Scanning Assembly Front Side Original Scanning Assembly Rear Side Original Path Original Delivery Tray ADF Driver PCB...

Page 54: ...A1 8 ADF Driver PCB UN_BO1 Drive Configuration List This equipment is a document feeder for stream reading only This equipment has 3 motors 1 clutch and 1 solenoid as drive load It also has 1 document reading unit Scanner Unit for the back side of originals The drive configuration of this equipment is indicated below M2 M1 CL1 M3 SL1 Code Name Role STM1 ADF Registration Motor Drive of Pickup Rolle...

Page 55: ... 1 3 4 7 2 6 5 8 9 15 14 13 12 11 10 Key No Name Key No Name 1 Pickup Roller 9 Lead Roller 1 2 Separation Roller 10 Platen Roller 1 3 Feed Roller 11 Platen Roller 2 4 Pullout Roller 12 Lead Roller 2 5 Pullout Roller 13 Lead Roller 2 6 Registration Roller 14 Delivery Roller 7 Registration Roller 15 Delivery Roller 8 Lead Roller 1 List of Sensors PS_A3 PS_A4 PS_A1 PS_A2 UN_BO6 PS_A7 PS_A6 PS_R2 PS_A...

Page 56: ...mediately after pickup Yes Yes PS_R2 Registration Sensor Registration arch formation timing Yes Yes PS_R3 Large Size Small Size Sensor Identifying large size small size originals ADF Driver PCB The connections of the ADF Driver PCB are indicated below J402 J401 J408 J407 J410 J404 IC J403 J409 ADF Driver PCB J No Connection destination ADF Driver PCB J No Connection destination Code Name Code Name...

Page 57: ...ht at particular points of the Reflection Sensor and Reading Sensor Furthermore two points are measured for each size to perform accurate detection even if the original is moved when the ADF is closed Horizontal scanning direction Reading Sensor AB configuration 12 point measurement inch configuration 6 point measurement Vertical scanning direction Reflection Photosensor AB configuration inch conf...

Page 58: ... the presence absence of dust on the Stream Reading Glass or the Guide Plate of the ADF on the Platen Roller in case of the reverse model or image correction is performed to prevent the dust to be printed on an image This control is performed only when the ADF is being used and has been closed Control timing At job completion At paper interval after each sheet is read At the start of a job only wh...

Page 59: ...arts C B A At paper interval The Scanner Unit does not move Reading is performed at the position determined by the control performed at job completion or at the start of a job and image correction is performed if dust is detected at that position Scanning Glass C B A 0 5 mm 0 5 mm Service mode COPIER OPTION IMG RDR DFDST L1 Adjustment of dust detection level at paper interval COPIER OPTION IMG RDR...

Page 60: ...ection data Digital image signal Reader Controller PCB Main Controller PCB Scanner Unit PCB Reader SRAM CPU ASIC Shading correction Color offset correction in sub scanning LED 4lines Analog image signal Analog image process gain correction offset correction A D conversion CCD AP PCB Scanner Unit PCB ADF EEP ROM Scanner unit drive control Scanner unit drive control Scanner Unit Drive The Reading Se...

Page 61: ...t intensity in the center of the LED and the surrounding area 5 LED deterioration To correct unevenness of the Reading Sensor output shading correction is performed In shading correction there is a type of shading correction that is executed per job Shading correction Shading correction is performed for each scanning of original With this operation light of LED Lamp is emitted to the Standard Whit...

Page 62: ...tween the various electrical components is indicated below ADF Driver PCB Scanner Unit Sensor Motor Fan Solenoid Reader Controller PCB Related Error Code Communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Scanner Unit E280 0001 Communication between the Reader Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit was not completed within the specified period of time E280 0002 Disconnection of FFC ...

Page 63: ...inting 1 sided original mix of different configurations 1 sided printing 1 sided original mix of different configurations 2 sided printing Long original 1 sided printing Simultaneous du plex reading Picks up originals reads their front side with the Scanner Unit at the Reader side and reads their back side with the Scanner Unit on the ADF side Then outputs them 2 sided original 1 sided printing 2 ...

Page 64: ... sheet pickup 2 1st sheet arch creation 1 Pullout Roller 3 1st sheet arch creation 1 Registration Roller 4 1st sheet scanning 6 2nd sheet scanning 5 1st sheet delivery 2nd sheet pickup and arch creation 1 Pullout Roller 2 Technology 50 ...

Page 65: ...Scanner Unit ADF Scanner Unit Reader Scanning position for the front side Scanning position for the rear side Service mode FEEDER ADJUST ADJMSCN1 Zoom fine adjustment when reading 2 sided originals horizontal scanning direction front side FEEDER ADJUST ADJMSCN2 Zoom fine adjustment when reading 2 sided originals horizontal scanning direction back side FEEDER ADJUST ADJSSCN1 Zoom fine adjustment wh...

Page 66: ...x of dif ferent con figurations Long original Feeding starts Feed LTR R LGL Sensor PS_A3 Yes Large Size Small Size Sensor PS_R3 Yes Width AB Inch Sensor PS_A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Original Width Volume UN_SNS1 Yes Yes Yes Yes During feed Feed Post separation Sensor PS_R1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6 Yes Yes Yes Yes Width Original Size Sensor UN_BO6 Yes NOTE Normal mix of same configuration mix o...

Page 67: ... the Width Direction The original size in the width direction is detected using the Original Width Volume UN_SNS1 and AB Inch Sensor PS_A4 in the Document Pickup Tray The analog resistance value of the Original Width Volume UN_SNS1 changes according to the Slide Guide The ADF Driver PCB receives this change in the resistance value as an original size signal UN_SNS1 and uses it as the size in the w...

Page 68: ...inal Sensor PS_N1 When an original is placed in the Document Pickup Tray the Detection Lever operates with the Lightproof Plate and the Lightproof Plate passes through the Photo Interrupter This makes the Original Sensor PS_N1 emit an original detection signal EMP_S If the Cover Open Closed Sensor PS_A5 detects that the Feeder Cover has been closed a Feeder Cover open close detection signal COVER_...

Page 69: ...ter completion of the pickup operation the Pickup Roller Unit is lifted up Errors in the pickup operation are detected by the Post separation Sensor PS_R1 If the original could not be detected at the specified timing it is notified as a jam ADF Driver PCB M1 CL1 PS_R1 SEPA_S SEPA_M_A B MV_CL Original Feed Control This equipment forms an arch in the Pullout Roller and Registration Roller locations ...

Page 70: ...tored in the ROM of the Reader Controller PCB which determines the occurrence of a jam by the presence of an original in the areas of corresponding sensors When a jam occurs the machine stores the information by the code This machine s jam code can be checked by printing out a jam error history report from service mode PS_A6 PS_A7 PS_R2 UN_BO8 UN_BO7 PS_R1 PS_A1 2 Technology 56 ...

Page 71: ...ultrasonic method to perform double feed detection Once it is judged that a double feed has occurred the machine stops operation due to a jam When a job is started the sensor level is checked without an original to calculate the threshold value for double feed detection During the job the Post separation Sensor PS_R1 detects and manages the leading edge trailing edge for each original sheet and de...

Page 72: ...al Original 2nd sheet Original 1st sheet Vibration large Vibration large Vibration small Double Feed Detection Jam Loca tion Jam code Types of jam Sensor name Sensor number 01 0020 Double feed jam during a job ADF Double Feed Sensor UN_BO7 UN_BO8 0021 Sensor communication error during a job 0060 Double feed jam during a job first sheet 0061 Sensor communication error during a job first sheet 0062 ...

Page 73: ...m which requires the machine moves to limited functions mode occurs If an error occurs for some reasons a jam message is displayed to make the user to perform jam removal After that an error is displayed and the device enters limited functions mode The machine recovers when the cause of the error is solved If this jam occurs refer to the error log and perform the remedy for the error code which ha...

Page 74: ...y used for the motor solenoid fan and the LED Lamp Unit The 5V power is mostly used for the sensors 3 3V power is generated via a converter on the ADF Driver PCB and supplied to the Original Width Volume 24V 24V 6V 4 5V 3 3V 24V 24V Reader controller PCB Solenoid Motor Fan 5V Sensor 24V DADF driver PCB Scanner Unit PCB LED lamp unit Original width volume 24V 5V Related Error Code Power supply 24V ...

Page 75: ...I F RTC RAM Temporarily storage of image data Capacity of 2 GB for controller control 1 GB for image pro cessing USB port USB2 0 Device I F USB3 0 Host I F Hard disk 2 5 inch SATA I F Standard 250 GB 250 GB usable area address book security information password certificate image data preferences Flash PCB Storage of system software 2 GB TPM PCB Generation and storage of the encryption key Only whe...

Page 76: ...Functions and specifications No Functions and specifications J1 TPM PCB J21 Copy Card Reader J3 USB I F device J1010 Open I F Board for external controller J5 USB I F host J1020 Riser PCB J7 LAN I F J1050 Counter PCB Relay PCB J9 J1100 Image Data Analyzer PCB J11 Flash PCB J2010 J2000 Hard disk J13 Voice Operation Voice Guidance J15 Controller Fan J2020 J2040 Hard disk for mirroring J18 J20 Serial...

Page 77: ...ll Night Power PCB Relay PCB Control Panel I F Control Panel I F No Functions and specifications No Functions and specifications J1 J17 Fax 1 Line J14 All night Power Supply Relay Board J2 DC Controller PCB J4021 Control Panel I F J4 J17 Fax 2 3 4 Line J4022 Control Panel I F J8 Main Controller PCB J4023 IC Card Reader upper USB lower J4031 Reader J9 Laser Driver J10 DC Controller PCB J4202 WiFi 2...

Page 78: ...e from the front side it starts the operation to recover from sleep mode early If a person approaches the machine from the side the sensor judges whether he she is just a passer to prevent recovery by mistake CAUTION Recovery time depends on the time for recovery from sleep mode of the host machine The Motion Sensor outputs the trigger for recovery from sleep mode Operation of the Motion Sensor is...

Page 79: ... Main Controller PCB detects turning OFF the Main Power Supply Switch and the shutdown sequence is started and executed automatically Note that the maximum shutdown time with this machine is 90 seconds If the maximum of 90 seconds has elapsed the power supply is turned OFF by the hard timer circuit on the Relay PCB NOTE If the power supply is stopped without shutting down the machine or if the pro...

Page 80: ...HDD is not formatted When an HDD for another machine is connected at installation of the Removable HDD Kit E614 0001 Flash PCB detection error Failed to recognize the Flash PCB When the Flash PCB is not formatted E614 0002 Error in file system on the Flash PCB The file system could not be initialized normally at startup E614 4001 Error in file system on the Flash PCB The OS boot file was not found...

Page 81: ...e 1 Laser Scanner Unit 1 M32 Image Skew Correction Motor M 2 Laser Scanner Unit 2 M33 Image Skew Correction Motor C 3 BD Sensor Y M M34 Image Skew Correction Motor Bk 4 BD Sensor C Bk UN12 Laser Driver PCB M 5 Imaging Lens UN13 Laser Driver PCB Y 6 Scanner Mirror UN14 Laser Driver PCB Bk M31 Image Skew Correction Motor Y UN15 Laser Driver PCB C Laser is applied to the image on the negatively charg...

Page 82: ...ser type Infrared laser invisible Laser output 15 mW Number of Laser Scanner Units 2 Number of laser beams 4 beams lines in each color Resolution 1200 dpi Motor type Brushless motor Motor revolutions imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5560 31181 1 rpm imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5550 C5540 26220 5 rpm imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5535 17126 0 rpm Number of Scanner Mirror facets 6 facets 40 mm dia List of Controls Laser ON OFF...

Page 83: ...er Driver PCB Laser beam Scanner Motor Video signal Laser control signal Mode Laser status Remarks Forced OFF mode OFF Clears the light intensity setting determined by the APC APC mode ON Adjusts laser light intensity Print mode On Off Emits the laser according to the video signal Standby mode OFF The machine is in standby mode Print instruction Image formation ready timing At 1st line APC At 2nd ...

Page 84: ...ach line VDO_Y VDO_M VDO_C VDO_Bk Y Laser Driver PCB M Laser Driver PCB C Laser Driver PCB Bk Laser Driver PCB Y Laser Laser Scanner Unit 1 Laser Scanner Unit 2 M Laser C Laser BD Sensor Y M BD Sensor C Bk BD_CBk BD_YM Bk Laser Main Controller Vertical Scanning Synchronization Control Purpose Aligns the write start position in the vertical scanning direction Execution timing At each print Control ...

Page 85: ...r Scanner Unit 2 㻯㻌Laser Control Signal LD PD 㻮㼗㻌Laser Control Signal Y㻌Laser M㻌Laser C㻌Laser Bk㻌Laser DC Controller UN1 Laser Driver PCB Y Laser Driver PCB C 㼅㻛㻹 Laser Control Signal 㻯㻛㻮㼗 Laser Control Signal Laser Scanner Motor Control Purpose Rotates the Scanner Mirror at a specific speed Execution timing At power on and at each print Control description Scanner Motor rotation speed is controll...

Page 86: ...r Scanner C Bk E100 0302 Correction in timing of laser exposure to the Polygon Mirror C Bk was not completed within the specified period of time E102 0101 An error in check sum of EEPROM on the Laser Scanner was detected Y M E102 0301 An error in check sum of EEPROM on the Laser Scanner was detected C Bk BD Correction Control Purpose Corrects the displacement of each color s laser write start posi...

Page 87: ... operate together The Laser Shutter closes and forcibly cuts off the optical path of the laser when the Front Cover and the Right Cover are opened simultaneously These operations are controlled by the DC Controller Color Laser Shutter Laser Shutter Motor M28 Laser Shutter Sensor PS29 Sensor Lever Color Shutter Cam Bk Shutter Cam Color Shutter Lever Bk Shutter Lever Drive Shaft Bk Laser Shutter DC ...

Page 88: ...B 2 The DC Controller reads this patch pattern with the patch sensor to detect the degree of color displacement in comparison with the reference value backed up in the DC Controller 3 Based on this detection result the laser exposure position skew amount of the Laser Scanner Unit is changed Imaging Lens Imaging Lens Imaging Lens Skew Correction Motor Arm Arm Arm Arm Cam Cam Cam Arm Cam Cam Photose...

Page 89: ...development ACR method ACR Auto Carrier Re fresh Toner Non magnetic negative toner Primary charging Charging method Roller charging Cleaning Urethane Sponge Roller Toner Container Replacement of Toner Container during continuous print Yes Transfer method Intermediate transfer ITB ITB Unit Material Acrylic coated polyether ether ketone resin Cleaning Cleaning Blade Corrects belt displacement Yes Op...

Page 90: ...oner Bottle 2 ITB Unit 3 ITB Cleaner Unit 4 Primary Transfer Roller 5 Secondary Transfer Inner Roller 6 Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 7 Patch Sensor Unit Registration Sensor Unit 8 Developing Unit 9 Drum Unit 10 Laser Scanner Unit 11 Waste Toner Container 2 Technology 76 ...

Page 91: ...vely charged by the Developing Cylinder is attached to the Photosensitive Drum Transfer block 4 Primary transfer Toner on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum is transferred to the ITB by applying positive charge from the back side of the ITB 5 Secondary transfer Toner on the ITB is transferred to the paper by applying positive potential to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 6 Separation With t...

Page 92: ...Level 2 COPIER Display DENS DEV DC M Level 2 COPIER Display DENS DEV DC C Level 2 COPIER Display DENS DEV DC K Adjustment of the each color fogging removal potential COPIER Adjust V CONT VBACK Y COPIER Adjust V CONT VBACK M COPIER Adjust V CONT VBACK C COPIER Adjust V CONT VBACK K Adjustment of the each color contrast potential COPIER Adjust V CONT VCONT Y COPIER Adjust V CONT VCONT M COPIER Adjus...

Page 93: ...color when the process speed is high Level 2 COPIER Adjust HV PRI DIS TGY Level 2 COPIER Adjust HV PRI DIS TGM Level 2 COPIER Adjust HV PRI DIS TGC Level 2 COPIER Adjust HV PRI DIS TGK Adjustment of the discharge current control target current for each color at low speed Adjust the offset of the discharge current control target current for each color when the process speed is low Level 2 COPIER Ad...

Page 94: ... If there is Drum Unit Memory judge whether the Drum Unit is new or old has been replaced or not Drum Unit Memory Information specific to the drum UN1 DC Controller PCB UN70㹼73 Drum Unit New Old Sensor Related Alarm Codes Drum Unit each color replacement completion alarm Drum Unit Y replacement completion alarm 43 0070 Drum Unit M replacement completion alarm 43 0071 Drum Unit C replacement comple...

Page 95: ...er LF M DRM LF COPIER Counter LF C DRM LF COPIER Counter LF K DRM LF Drum Heater Control A drum heater is provided on the bottom of the Photosensitive Drum in order to deliver charging and exposure that is stable against changes in the internal environment This heater is controlled to keep the internal temperature constant Basically when the Environment Switch is ON the heater is ON regardless of ...

Page 96: ...poor but developing performance is good In contrast in low humidity environments charge injection performance is good but developing performance is poor Developing performance and charge injection performance are affected by the voltage Vpp Specifically when Vpp decreases developing performance becomes worse and charge injection performance becomes better Related Service Mode Execution of the init...

Page 97: ...ame 1 Primary Transfer Roller 2 ITB 3 Photosensitive Drum Overview The following is an overview of the basic control in the primary transfer control Apply the primary transfer bias to the Primary Transfer Roller Transferability becomes unstable due to variations in resistance caused by wear of the Primary Transfer Roller environmental factors such as temperature and humidity and others In order to...

Page 98: ... the Environment Sensor During a job 4C Bk mode Each 200 sheets fed When the accumulated printing duty ratio reaches 3000 When ATR control is executed Refer to ATR Control on page 105 When the transparency black band sequence is executed Refer To Transparency Black Band Sequence on page 115 When the black band sequence is executed Refer to Black Band Sequence on page 115 When cleaning of the Secon...

Page 99: ...R 1TR TK43 Adjusts the primary transfer ATVC target current in the color Bk mode at medium speed Level 2 COPIER Adjust HV TR 1TR TGC Adjusts the primary transfer ATVC target current for C color at high speed Level 2 COPIER Adjust HV TR 1TR TGC2 Adjusts the primary transfer ATVC target current for C color at low speed Level 2 COPIER Adjust HV TR 1TR TGC3 Adjusts the primary transfer ATVC target cur...

Page 100: ...ry transfer bias DC which has been generated by the HVT2 UN17 is applied to the Primary Transfer Roller The bias values are corrected by using the measurement values of the Environment Sensor 1 UN22 UN17 Primary Transfer Bk Developing Charging High Voltage PCB UN1 DC Controller PCB Primary Transfer Roller Y Primary Transfer Roller M Primary Transfer Roller C Primary Transfer Roller Bk DC DC DC DC ...

Page 101: ...er Y M C 5 Primary Transfer Roller Bk M15 Primary Transfer Disengagement Motor PS22 Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 1 PS23 Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 2 Primary transfer disengagement initialization operation Operation overview The Primary Transfer Disengagement Cam is rotated to change the disengagement shift mode between Bk mode and the color mode After initialization the mode transiti...

Page 102: ...ted M15 CL mode All Primary Transfer Rollers are engaged Detected by the Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 2 PS23 At color printing when image formation is executed At adjustment operation M15 Full disengage ment mode All Primary Transfer Rollers are disengaged When the ITB Pressure Release Lever is op erated Related Service Mode Setting of the color mode in the single color Bk mode at 1 2 speed ...

Page 103: ...ironment the paper type and the printing color mode the secondary transfer voltage is determined by the secondary transfer ATVC control such that the optimal current value is obtained according to each of the conditions Furthermore since the optimal current differs depending on the process speed the secondary transfer voltage is determined such that the optimal transfer current is obtained dependi...

Page 104: ...1 single color Bk Heavy 1 Level 2 COPIER Adjust HV TR WK TGTH2 single color Bk Heavy 2 Secondary Transfer Bias Control In order to transfer the toner from the ITB onto paper the voltage calculated by the secondary transfer ATVC control is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller The secondary transfer bias DC which has been generated on the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN18 is applied...

Page 105: ...ering Roller tilt is reset 4 The ITB displacement is corrected and the center is maintained by repeating steps 1 to 3 M14 M14 1 2 4 3 2 3 4 1 5 PS24 PS24 UN60 No Name Role 1 Steering Roller and Drive Roller The ITB is driven The ITB displacement is corrected 2 Transfer Drive Plate Rear The Steering Roller is supported 3 Steering Arm Plate The Steering Roller is operated by engaging with the Steeri...

Page 106: ...r Container by the ITB Cleaning Screw M13 1 3 2 No Parts name Role 1 ITB Cleaning Screw Residual toner collected in the ITB Cleaner Unit is fed 2 ITB Cleaning Blade Residual toner on the ITB is collected 3 Waste Toner Ejection Mouth Ejection Mouth for toner collected on the ITB M13 ITB Motor The ITB Cleaning Screw is driven Related User Mode Adjustment Maintenance Maintenance Clean Inside Main Uni...

Page 107: ... is attached to the ITB and then collected by the ITB Cleaning Unit 1 2 3 4 5 N o Parts Name Roll 1 Secondary Transfer Roller As well as attracting toner on the ITB to the paper paper is fed 2 Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Paper is fed while the tension of the ITB is maintained 3 Drive Roller The ITB is driven The ITB displacement is corrected 4 ITB Cleaning Blade Residual toner on the ITB is co...

Page 108: ...hich has low elastic force the Static Eliminator removes positive potential at the back of the paper This reduces electrostatic absorption force of the paper so that paper can be easily separated 1 4 3 2 No Parts name 1 Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 2 Secondary Transfer Inner Roller 3 Separation Static Eliminator 4 Paper 2 Technology 94 ...

Page 109: ... Drum surface is removed 4 Cleaning Screw Residual toner that has been removed by the Cleaning Blade is fed 5 Cleaning Blade Residual toner on the Photosensitive Drum is removed Drum Cleaning Pre exposure Residual charge is removed from the Photosensitive Drum surface by emitting light from the Pre exposure LED Ghost images etc are reduced by removing residual charge because this reduces potential...

Page 110: ...orm patch pattern 1 on the ITB and read the patch pattern using the Registration Sensor Unit Rear Front Center UN47 48 49 1 UN47 UN49 UN48 No Name 1 Patch pattern UN47 Registration Sensor Front UN48 Registration Sensor Rear UN49 Registration Sensor Center Patch pattern Y M C Bk Patch for correction in horizontal scanning direction Y M C Bk Patch for correction in vertical scanning direction 2 Tech...

Page 111: ...whole circumference of the ITB is sampled by the Patch Sensor without forming patches The patch image that is read is compared with the sampling results of the ITB background to read the density Related Error Code Patch Sensor Error E029 1000 E029 1001 Registration Shutter Solenoid error E029 6001 Related Alarm Codes Patch Sensor error 10 0006 Patch Sensor error 1 10 0007 Patch Sensor error 2 10 0...

Page 112: ...X OF K D max real time multiple tone control ON OFF during warm up rotation COPIER Option IMG DEV AUTO DH Setting of the automatic adjustment execution interval during last rotation COPIER FNC SW INTROT 2 D max PASCAL Control ON OFF during auto gradation adjustment COPIER Option FNC SW DMX DISP Setting of Bk color density increase COPIER Option IMG MCON PSCL TBL Setting of the paper type to be use...

Page 113: ...color displacement correction Long pattern is used only for the following cases When executing Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch When executing the warm up rotation sequence Refer to Warm up Rotation Adjustment on page 116 Correction description Type of control Correction description Correction in horizontal scanning direction Write start...

Page 114: ...med as notified by the controller and that density is notified The differences between full and light are as follows Features of full real time multiple tone correction A 10 gradation patch is always formed The entire lookup table is overwritten Features of light real time multiple tone correction A patch with a smaller number of gradations is formed The formed gradations are rotated Part of the l...

Page 115: ...environment Yes Yes At recovery from sleep mode When 8 or more hours have elapsed Yes Yes When a job starts When an environmental change is detected Yes Yes During a job 4C mode When the number of sheets fed reaches 200 or the ac cumulated duty ratio reaches 3000 Yes Yes Yes At job com pletion 4C mode Each 60 sheets fed Yes Yes Yes Each 1000 sheets fed Yes Yes BK mode Each accumulated duty ratio o...

Page 116: ...he Toner Supply Screw is detected and the amount of toner supplied to the Developing Assembly is counted PS 60 61 62 63 Bottle Rotation Sensor The rotation of the Toner Bottle is detected PS 64 65 66 67 Bottle Position Sensor The behavior of the Toner Bottle Replacement Door Open Link is detected TS 1 2 3 4 Hopper Toner Level Sensor Toner full in the hopper is detected TS 5 6 7 8 ATR Sensor The ra...

Page 117: ...utter Bottle State Detection Purpose To detect the state of the Toner Container Detection timing At power on When the Toner Bottle Exchange Door is closed At recovery from sleep mode The Bottle New Old Sensor Y M C Bk UN66 UN67 UN68 UN69 detects the state of the bottle from the Toner Container memory 1 UN66 UN67 UN68 UN69 1 2 Technology 103 ...

Page 118: ...tainer with wrong item no is inserted Toner cartridge may be malfunctioning The Toner Cartridge which may be malfunctioning is inserted Related Alarm Codes Toner memory detection error each color 10 0091 Y 10 0092 M 10 0093 C 10 0094 Bk Related Service Mode Display of each color Toner Container ID COPIER Display MISC TNRB IDY COPIER Display MISC TNRB IDM COPIER Display MISC TNRB IDC COPIER Display...

Page 119: ...as an ideal ratio Adjustment timing conditions At job completion For each accumulated duty of 2100 or each 140 sheets fed During a job For each accumulated duty of 3000 or each 200 sheets fed Control description ATR control is performed using the following steps 1 Based on the toner supply count the supply amount is calculated 2 Based on detection data from the ATR Sensor TS5 6 7 8 the toner suppl...

Page 120: ... 0134 Developing Motor error E021 0100 E021 0200 E021 0300 E021 0400 Developing Screw rotation detection error E021 0120 E021 0220 E021 0320 E021 0420 Related Service Mode Entry of the ATR Sensor each color control voltage COPIER Adjust DENS CONT Y COPIER Adjust DENS CONT M COPIER Adjust DENS CONT C COPIER Adjust DENS CONT K Entry of the toner density target value for each color COPIER Adjust DENS...

Page 121: ... control each color patch target density Level 2 COPIER Display DENS D Y TRGT Level 2 COPIER Display DENS D M TRGT Level 2 COPIER Display DENS D C TRGT Level 2 COPIER Display DENS D K TRGT Display of patch image density history Level 2 COPIER Display DENS DS S Y H Level 2 COPIER Display DENS DS S M H Level 2 COPIER Display DENS DS S C H Level 2 COPIER Display DENS DS S K H Stirring of each color d...

Page 122: ...to ensure that the bottle rotation speed does not vary greatly as the amount of toner inside the bottle is being reduced the bottle rotation is controlled by using the Bottle Rotation Sensor Y M C K PS60 61 62 63 and the Bottle Position Sensor Y M C K PS64 65 66 67 Control description When toner is supplied the Toner Supply Level Sensor Y M C Bk PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 is started while it is turned ON Dri...

Page 123: ...ror E025 0100 Y E025 0200 M E025 0300 C E025 0400 Bk Hopper Motor error E025 0150 0151 E025 0250 0251 E025 0350 0351 E025 0450 0451 Each color Developing Assembly supply error E027 0100 Y E027 0200 M E027 0300 C E027 0400 Bk Related Service Mode Setting of the Toner Container used up mode COPIER Option CUSTOM USEUPTNR Each color toner supply counter COPIER Counter MISC T SPLY Y COPIER Counter MISC...

Page 124: ...ection timing can be changed in the following service modes setting of the Toner Container prior delivery alarm notification timing 0 40 The default value varies depending on the country COPIER OPTION FNC SW T DLV BK Bk COPIER OPTION FNC SW T DLV CL CL COPIER OPTION FNC SW T DLV2CL low capacity bottle CL 2 The detection timing can be changed in the following service modes setting of the threshold ...

Page 125: ...e 10 0100 0071 10 0100 0072 10 0100 0073 10 0100 0074 Toner Bottle ejection counter 10 0100 0081 10 0100 0082 10 0100 0083 10 0100 0084 Unidentified Toner Bottle 10 0100 0181 10 0100 0182 10 0100 0183 10 0100 0184 CAUTION Note that the toner replacement completion alarm is not generated under the following conditions The DC Controller PCB is replaced and then a new Toner Bottle is installed before...

Page 126: ...ounter are displayed on the counter check screen on the control panel Level2 COPIER Option USER TNRB SW Setting value 0 Hide 1 Display Toner Container counter 70 870s 2 Display Toner Container counter 70 870s and ejection counter 3 Display Toner Container counter 70 870s and 180s 2 Technology 112 ...

Page 127: ...ner Screw The waste toner inside the Waste Toner Container is made uniformly even M13 ITB Motor The ITB Cleaning Screw is driven M1 Drum Motor YMC To drive the Y M C Drum Unit Cleaning Screw M4 Drum Motor Bk To drive the Bk Drum Unit Cleaning Screw M26 Waste Toner Feed Motor To drive the Waste Toner Feed Screw M45 Recycle Toner Stirring Motor To make the waste toner inside the Waste Toner Containe...

Page 128: ... Waste toner is near full Replacement not yet needed Replace the waste toner container Host machine is stopped Detection timing When the output result of the Waste Toner Sen sor PCB UN75 changes When toner has supplied to the Developing Assembly a certain number of times after the prior delivery alarm Waste Toner Container preparation warning Converted number of prints approx 4700 sheets 2 Detecte...

Page 129: ...and Sequence In order to prevent flipping of the blade of the ITB Cleaning Blade a 10 mm toner band Bk is supplied to the blade in the vertical scanning direction to reduce the friction force in areas of sliding Control timing Perform by changing the frequency according to the ITB duration and moisture content environment data Control timing Details During a job Each 200 sheets Until reaching 50 0...

Page 130: ... 2 COPIER Option IMG DEV DELV THK Drum Fusion Band Sequence In order to prevent the toner etc from fusing onto the drum a toner band of 10 mm is formed on the ITB depending on the environment data temperature humidity and usage conditions Toner Band Control Sequence When Drum Stopped If a new ITB is stopped for a long period of time while it is in contact with the Photosensitive Drum it adversely ...

Page 131: ...n color printing is limited or there is no color toner the following Settings Registration menu cannot be executed Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Tone Settings Auto Correct Color Tone Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Correct ...

Page 132: ... speed 60 ppm in both B W and color is enabled by using new toner and highly heat conductive elastic film Specifications Item Function Method Fixing method On demand fixing Fixing speed 60 ppm machine 264 mm s Paper weight 52 to 105 g m2 222 mm s Paper weight 106 to 128 g m2 132 mm s Paper weight 129 to 300 g m2 coated paper 50 40 ppm machine 222 mm s Paper weight 52 to 128 g m2 132 mm s Paper wei...

Page 133: ... C 50 40 ppm machine 157 to 183 deg C 35 ppm machine 145 to 166 deg C Detection of temper ature By Main Thermistor and Sub Thermistor Protection function Main Thermistor Sub Thermistor When an error is detected power supply to the Fixing Heater is shut down Thermoswitch Rated operating temperature 250 7 deg C New part detection Yes Fixing Film Unit only Life detection None Parts Configuration 1 3 ...

Page 134: ...of the film non paper feed area Temperature Control Abnormal Temperature Rise Detection Edge Tem perature Detection Cooling Control Fixing Film Rear Edge This is engaged with the inside of the film non paper feed area Temperature Control Abnormal Temperature Rise Detection Edge Tem perature Detection Cooling Control TP1 Thermoswitch Heater non contact type AC power supply is shut down at detection...

Page 135: ...n order to reduce time to print the first sheet FPOT Startup conditions When pressing a numeric key on Control Panel When pressing a software key on Touch Panel When recovering from sleep mode to standby mode Control description Starts up the machine until it reaches the designated temperature and then controls the temperature Related Service Mode Set whether to execute flying start Service Mode L...

Page 136: ... according to the detected temperature of the Main Thermistor Fixing Heater Center and Fixing Film Center Paper interval temperature control The paper interval temperature is decreased to prevent temperature increase when the paper interval becomes wider than a normal condition 1 Paper Interval Temperature Target temperature during printing 4 to 18 deg C 1 At paper interval widening An interval be...

Page 137: ...nting of small size paper paper with the width direction length of A4R or less Startup conditions When the detected temperature of the Main Thermistor front rear edge of the Fixing Heater and Sub Thermistor front rear edge of the Fixing Film during printing is at or below the designated temperature Operation The paper interval is increased to lower the temperature and adjust it slightly below the ...

Page 138: ...aper 1 64 to 75 Recycled paper 2 76 to 90 Color paper 64 to 81 Pre punched paper 64 to 81 Washi JPN paper 93 Plain paper 3 91 to 105 Recycled paper 3 91 to 105 Bond paper 80 to 99 Tracing paper 64 to 81 Tab paper 1 91 to 105 Heavy paper 1 106 to 128 Tab paper 2 106 to 128 Heavy paper 2 129 to 150 Heavy paper 3 151 to 163 Label paper 118 to 180 Tab paper 3 129 to 150 Letterhead 106 to 163 11 to 2 H...

Page 139: ... when printing small size paper paper with the width direction length of A4R or less In the event that the film temperature exceeds the designated temperature Main Thermistor front rear edge of the Fixing Heater Sub Thermistor front rear edge of the Fixing Film when printing paper with the width direction length of A4R or larger to A3 or smaller temperature increase is controlled by ventilating an...

Page 140: ...ower At occurrence of a jam At occurrence of an error Related Error Code E009 Film Unit engagement disengagement error E009 0000 Engagement error E009 0001 Disengagement error E009 0002 Engagement error it is highly possible that grease is scattered on the surface of the cam Fixing Unit Detection At power on recovery from sleep mode closing of the cover the Thermistor connection signal is input to...

Page 141: ...lm Thermistor Rear detected a high temperature error Required 1 0007 The Fixing Thermistor detected a high temperature error by hardware detection Required 1 E002 Detection of abnormal low temperature during startup 0001 After the Fixing Heater was turned ON the Fixing Main Thermistor detected no temperature in crease Required 1 0002 Startup control was not completed although 60 sec had passed Req...

Page 142: ...ring print control Required 1 E004 Detection of error in the Fixing Heater drive circuit 0000 Open circuit of the Fixing Thermistor or connector disconnection was detected Not required 0001 Welding of the fixing relay on the AC Driver PCB was detected Not required E009 Detection of error in fixing engagement disengagement 0000 The Fixing Pressure Sensor did not detect ON status within 5 sec after ...

Page 143: ... the Multi purpose Tray pickup Automatic paper size recognition for Multi purpose Tray pickup The usability has been improved by automatic paper size recognition for Multi purpose Tray pickup Support for landscape envelopes Landscape envelopes can now be fed from the Cassette 1 and Multi purpose Tray Longer life of the Pickup Roller Feed Roller and Separation Roller Longer life of the Pickup Rolle...

Page 144: ... 0 to 457 2 mm Multi purpose Tray A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5 A5R 11 x 17 LGL LTR LTRR STMT STMTR SRA3 12 x 18 EXEC 8K 16K Postcard Envelope COM10 No 10 Monarch DL ISO C5 Kakugata 2 Nagagata 3 Yougatanaga 3 Custom size Width 98 0 to 320 0 mm Length 98 4 to 1200 mm Free size Width 98 0 to 320 0 mm Length 139 7 to 457 2 mm Free size long original Width 98 0 to 320 0 mm Length 457 3 to 1200 mm Paper weigh...

Page 145: ...elivery Roller 5 Cassette 2 Feed Roller 19 Fixing Outlet Roller 6 Cassette 2 Separation Roller 20 Vertical Path Roller 1 7 Cassette 1 Pullout Roller 21 First Delivery Roller 8 Cassette 2 Pullout Roller 22 Vertical Path Roller 2 9 MP Pickup Roller 23 Second Delivery Roller 10 Multi purpose Tray Feed Roller 24 Duplex Reverse Roller 11 MP Separation Roller 25 Third Delivery Roller 12 Multi purpose Tr...

Page 146: ...Sensor PS34 Fixing Inlet Sensor PS43 Third Delivery Sensor PS37 Inner Delivery Sensor PS55 Cassette 1 Pullout Sensor PS38 Duplex Paper Sensor PS56 Cassette 2 Pullout Sensor PS39 Reverse Sensor PS57 Pre Reverse Sensor PS40 Duplex Inlet Sensor PS72 Multi Purpose Tray Pullout Sensor PS41 First Delivery Sensor PS76 Between Cassette 1 2 Sensor 2 Technology 132 ...

Page 147: ...e Pickup Motor M42 Cassette 1 Pullout Motor M19 Registration Motor M43 Cassette 2 Pullout Motor M20 Duplex Feed Motor M44 Pre Registration Motor M21 Fixing Motor SL5 First Delivery Flapper Solenoid M23 First Second Delivery Motor SL6 Second Delivery Flapper Solenoid M24 Reverse Motor SL7 Third Delivery Flapper Solenoid M25 Third Delivery Motor 2 Technology 133 ...

Page 148: ... Paper Path Acceleration section First Delivery Second Delivery Reverse Mouth Third Delivery Cassette 2 Pickup Cassette 1 Pickup Multi purpose Tray Pickup Option Cassette Pickup 2 Technology 134 ...

Page 149: ...aration Roller PS53 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A 6 Cassette 2 Pickup Roller PS54 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor B 7 Cassette 2 Feed Roller PS55 Cassette 1 Pullout Sensor 8 Cassette 2 Separation Roller PS56 Cassette 2 Pullout Sensor M40 Cassette 1 2 Lifter Motor PS68 Cassette 1 Paper Surface Sensor M41 Cassette 1 2 Pickup Motor PS69 Cassette 2 Paper Surface Sensor M42 Cassette 1 Pullout Motor PS7...

Page 150: ...rm is issued due to error in pickup assembly However at first and second failure of paper surface detection Trailing Edge Guide Plate error is displayed on the Control Panel to prompt the user to open and then close the cassette If paper surface detection fails for 3 consecutive times no paper is displayed for the cassette and an alarm is issued While an alarm has occurred the corresponding casset...

Page 151: ...TMT R A5 R 12x18 12x18 No corresponding size 12x18 No corresponding size EXEC Depends on the setting 3 No corresponding size EXEC 16K 8K 8K No corresponding size No corresponding size 8K 16K Depends on the setting 3 No corresponding size EXEC 16K 16K R 16K R No corresponding size No corresponding size 16K R Envelope Blank unless Paper Settings is performed due to non standard size Custom size 1 Se...

Page 152: ...Cassette 2 is automatically detected by the Cassette 2 Size Switch A B after the position of the Guide Plate is adjusted The switch consists of 3 microswitches and length and width are detected in accordance with the combination of ON OFF The Cassette 2 Size Switch B detects width and the Cassette 2 Size Switch A detects length 2 Technology 138 ...

Page 153: ...witch is pressed no cassette is detected Cassette 1 Cassette 1 Size Switch SW6 Cassette 2 Cassette 2 Size Switch B SW9 Paper Level Presence Detection The level and presence of paper in the cassette are detected by four sensors Paper Level Sensor A Paper Level Sensor B Paper Sensor Paper Surface Sensor The paper level is displayed in four levels in the Control Panel Level display Level Paper Level ...

Page 154: ...r 10 to 0 ON OFF ON ON 0 OFF ON PS51 PS68 PS52 1 1 OFF ON OFF OFF ON PS49 ON ON ON ON PS49 ON PS49 OFF OFF ON ON PS49 No Name No Name 1 Paper PS49 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor PS51 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A PS52 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B PS68 Cassette 1 Paper Surface Sensor 2 Technology 140 ...

Page 155: ... A 3 Lifting Plate PS52 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B PS68 Cassette 1 Paper Surface Sensor Cassette 2 PS50 PS69 PS53 PS54 3 1 2 No Name No Name 1 Lifter Gear PS50 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor 2 Paper Detection Lever PS53 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A 3 Lifting Plate PS54 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor B PS69 Cassette 2 Paper Surface Sensor 2 Technology 141 ...

Page 156: ...ed Roller are driven by the Multi Purpose Pickup Motor M18 while the Multi purpose Tray Pullout Roller is driven by the counterclockwise rotation of the Cassette 1 Pullout Motor M42 Multi purpose Tray Pickup HP Sensor Error When an error in the Multi Purpose Pickup Motor M18 or the Multi Purpose Tray HP Sensor PS73 is detected no paper is displayed for the Multi purpose Tray pickup and an alarm is...

Page 157: ...corresponding size SRA3 No corresponding size No corresponding size No corresponding size 12x18 A3 No corresponding size No corresponding size A3 No corresponding size EXEC B5 No corresponding size EXEC 16K No corresponding size 8K B4 No corresponding size 11x17 No corresponding size 8K 16K B5 No corresponding size LTR EXEC No corresponding size 16K Postcard Blank unless Paper Settings is performe...

Page 158: ...d Delivery Outlet Free Size Control Free Size can be set for paper feed only in case of Multi purpose Tray pickup Control description 1 Measure the picked up paper 2 Control the printing according to the paper length CAUTION Do not set paper of different sizes Fixing Registration Assembly Parts Drive Configuration M19 M44 3 2 1 PS77 PS33 No Name No Name 1 Registration Roller M19 Registration Motor...

Page 159: ... of paper with the leading edge of image by accelerating and decelerating the feed speed Because paper is not stopped temporarily at the registration position paper interval between sheets can be shortened to improve productivity Stop Registration Control This control is executed to stop paper using the Registration Roller and resume feeding in accordance with the timing when the image reaches the...

Page 160: ...nd 2 are used to change the speed of the Fixing Motor depending on the status of the arch Fixing Inlet Sensor ON Fixing Motor Feeding speed UP Large loop detection Small loop detection Fixing Motor Feeding speed Doun PS34 Fixing Inlet Sensor PS35 Fixing Arch Sensor 1 PS36 Fixing Arch Sensor 2 PS34 ON PS36 ON PS35 ON 2 Technology 146 ...

Page 161: ...d 6 Third Delivery Roller SL6 Second Delivery Flapper Solenoid 7 Duplex Inlet Roller SL7 Third Delivery Flapper Solenoid 8 Duplex Feed Upper Roller 9 Duplex Feed Lower Roller Duplex Control Duplex Feed Control This machine reverses paper outside the machine using the Reverse Mouth After stopping at the reverse stop position the paper fed to the duplex path will be fed to the 2 sided pickup standby...

Page 162: ...celerates the feed speed The speed will subsequently return to the process speed to improve delivery alignment and to receive succeeding sheets Jam Detection Jam code list Jam code Sensor XX Name Code 01 Delay jam 02 Stationary jam 0A Power on jam XX01 Cassette 1 Pre Registration Sen sor PS55 Yes Yes Yes XX02 Cassette 2 Pre Registration Sen sor PS56 Yes Yes Yes XX03 Cassette 3 Pullout Sensor 2 3 P...

Page 163: ...etween Cassette 1 2 Sensor PS76 Yes Yes Yes 1 Including size mismatch large 2 When the 2 cassette Pedestal is installed 3 When the High Capacity Cassette Pedestal is installed 4 When the Side Paper Deck is installed Other Jams Jam code Jam type 0190 A delay jam because paper did not come in time for the image 0D91 Size mismatch small 0B00 Door open 2 Technology 149 ...

Page 164: ... Print Full Color Single Color Large Print Full Color Single Color Small 1 US 101 108 229 230 321 322 0 UL model Type 2 Total 2 Total Black 2 Copy Full Color Single Color Large Copy Full Color Single Color Small Print Full Color Single Color Large Print Full Color Single Color Small 1 US 102 109 229 230 321 322 0 General mod el Total 1 Total Black 1 Copy Print Full Color Large Copy Print Full Colo...

Page 165: ...er feed direction Small Small size paper when paper length is 364 mm or less in paper feed direction Total When a sheet of paper is delivered the counter is advanced by 1 2 Sided The counter is advanced by 1 for paper delivered in 2 sided mode Change the country code of CONFIG in the following service mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW CONFIG Three digit number in the counter column shows the setting value...

Page 166: ...0 FM7 FM9 FM5 FM8 FM6 Circuit code Name Role Error Alarm code FM1 Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1 Heat exhaust around the Fixing Assembly E805 0000 FM2 Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2 Heat exhaust around the Fixing Assembly E805 0001 FM3 Power Supply Cooling Fan To cool power supply E804 0000 FM4 Process Cartridge Fan Rear Heat exhaust around the Process Cartridge E807 0000 FM5 Fixing Cooling Fan Front Coolin...

Page 167: ...xing Exhaust Fan 2 FM2 Half speed Stopped Half speed Full speed Half speed Stopped Stopped Stopped Process Car tridge Front Fan FM10 Full speed Half speed Stopped 1 Stopped Stopped Stopped Process Car tridge Rear Fan FM4 Stopped Stopped Stopped Power Supply Cooling Fan FM3 Full speed Half speed Full speed Full speed Full speed Half speed Half speed Stopped Fixing Cooling Fan Front FM5 Full speed H...

Page 168: ...nsor UN50 2 The state of the fan full speed half speed stopped differs depending on the paper size Environment Heater Control Condition Reader Heater Drum Heater Cassette Heater Power OFF ON ON ON Set Low for power consumption during Sleep ON ON ON A state in which the Control Panel is OFF after press ing the Energy Saver key ON ON ON Standby External temperature is less than 22 deg C 1 OFF ON ON ...

Page 169: ...Controller PCB Reader Controlle PCB Option Cassette Pedestal Option Paper Deck Primary Transfer Bk Developing Charging High Voltage PCB Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB Interlock SW Finisher Laser DC Controller PCB Feed Drum Driver PCB Front Driver PCB Relay PCB Main SW AC Driver PCB Interlock SW Fuse Fixing Assembly Fixing Heater Environment Switch Cassette Heater Reader Heater Deck Heater Dru...

Page 170: ...ry Transfer Bk Developing Charging High Voltage PCB UN18 Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN22 Internal Temperature Sensor UN50 Environment Sensor UN76 Developing High Voltage PCB YMC UN77 Charging High Voltage PCB YMC 1 Main Controller PCB 2 Riser PCB 3 Control Panel CPU PCB 4 Control Panel KEY PCB 5 NFC PCB 6 Wireless LAN PCB 7 Device Port LED PCB Power saving Function Overview There are Stan...

Page 171: ...ode When a job is submitted during sleep Deep Sleep Sleep 1 mode the mode is shifted to this mode Sleep 1 when Compensate for Network Comm is enabled In this state the Control Panel is off but only all night power 5V is supplied to the printer scanner controller Select for responding to requests for exiting Sleep from external sources such as faxes or the network The mode is shifted to Sleep Stand...

Page 172: ...mance Status An application is communicating via network when a dedicated port has a TCP connection or within 15 seconds after reception of UDP Either of SNTP DHCP DHCP6 or eRDS communication is in progress A job is being executed in standby Print Copy Send Fax Report Forwarding Storage processing etc A FAX IFAX communication is in progress A phone communication is in progress During distribution ...

Page 173: ... even if quick startup is enabled Either of the following devices is connected The coin vendor is connected Network under Settings Registration Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPSec Settings Use IPSec is set to ON TCP IP Settings IPv6 Settings Use IPv6 is set to ON AppleTalk Settings Use AppleTalk is set to ON Right after the machine is shut down under the following conditions it starts up in ...

Page 174: ...fter changing a service mode setting value that require restart The machine is shut down from RUI When an error has occurred When a jam has occurred At limited functions mode When starting safe mode When the printer scanner enters limited function mode When a login application is switched by SMS A license has been registered At startup by pressing the Control Panel key startup in safe mode 2 Techn...

Page 175: ...Periodical Service 3 Consumable Parts List 162 Cleaning Check Adjustment Locations 169 Compatibility of Consumable Parts 171 ...

Page 176: ... N372 1 720 000 pages Re place ment DRBL 1 DV UNT C 9 Developing Unit Bk FM1 N373 1 720 000 pages Re place ment DRBL 1 DV UNT K 10 Primary Transfer Roller Y M C FC0 0257 3 720 000 pages Re place ment DRBL 1 TR ROLC 11 Primary Transfer Roller Bk FC0 0257 1 720 000 pages Re place ment DRBL 1 TR ROLK 12 Secondary Transfer Inner Roller FL0 4164 1 720 000 pages Re place ment DRBL 1 2TR INRL 13 Secondar...

Page 177: ...r FL0 2885 2 500 000 sheets Re place ment DRBL 1 C1 FD RL C2 FD RL 24 Cassette Separation Roller FL0 1674 2 500 000 sheets Re place ment DRBL 1 C1 SP RL C2 SP RL 25 MP Pickup Roller FL0 4002 1 500 000 sheets Re place ment DRBL 1 M PU RL 26 MP Feed Roller FL0 4002 1 500 000 sheets Re place ment DRBL 1 M FD RL 27 MP Separation Roll er FL0 1674 1 500 000 sheets Re place ment DRBL 1 M SP RL 48 Filter ...

Page 178: ...in this column are estimated replacement timing in A4 size The replacement timing is a reference value in the case of usage in general offices and the actual value differs depending on the customer environment operation conditions in the field etc 48 1 20 53 54 21 3 Periodical Service 164 ...

Page 179: ...r Service mode Remarks Intermediate item Sub item 1 Cassette Pickup Roller FL0 4002 2 500 000 sheets DRBL 2 C3 PU RL C4 PU RL Replaced based on the number of actual ly One for each Cas sette 3 4 2 Cassette Feed Roller FL0 2885 2 500 000 sheets DRBL 2 C3 FD RL C4 FD RL 3 Cassette Separation Roller FL0 1674 2 500 000 sheets DRBL 2 C3 SP RL C4 SP RL 3 Periodical Service 165 ...

Page 180: ...L0 2885 1 500 000 sheets DRBL 2 HCCFD RL 3 High Capacity Cassette Separation Roller FL0 1674 1 500 000 sheets DRBL 2 HCCSP RL 3 2 1 Paper Deck Unit F1 No Parts name Parts number Q ty Estimated life Parts counter Service mode Remarks Intermediate item Sub item 1 Deck Pickup Roller FL0 4500 1 1 000 000 sheets DRBL 2 PD PU RL Replaced based on the number of actual ly fed paper 2 Deck Feed Roller FC0 ...

Page 181: ...07 2 1 000 000 sheets DRBL 2 SDL STC Staple Finisher Y1 No Parts name Parts number Q ty Estimated life Parts counter Service mode Remarks Intermediate item Sub item 1 Stapler FM1 L281 1 500 000 times DRBL 2 FIN STPR 2 Staple free Staple Unit FM1 K422 1 30 000 times DRBL 2 FR STPL 3 Stacking Tray Torque Limiter FL3 9778 2 200 000 times DRBL 2 TRY TQLM 4 Paddle Unit FE3 6957 4 1 000 000 times DRBL 2...

Page 182: ...No Parts name Parts number Q ty Estimated life Parts counter Service mode Remarks Intermediate item Sub item 2 Staple free Staple Unit FM1 C429 1 30 000 times DRBL 2 FR STPL 3 Periodical Service 168 ...

Page 183: ...acement Cleaning se lint free paper moistened with alcohol for cleaning 17 Second Delivery Roller Cleaning se lint free paper moistened with alcohol for cleaning 18 Third Delivery Roller Cleaning se lint free paper moistened with alcohol for cleaning 19 Registration Roller Cleaning se lint free paper moistened with alcohol for cleaning 20 Pre registration Guide Unit Cleaning se lint free paper moi...

Page 184: ...gistration Patch Sensor Inspec tion Check at replacement of the drum If necessary wipe approx 3 times in one direction with a cotton swab moistened with wa ter If it is soiled or foreign matters are attached clean with alcohol and lint free paper 12 13 11 17 16 28 25 19 26 27 18 4 4 4 1 21 14 23 20 29 30 22 24 31 31 31 2 3 5 6 7 7 7 8 15 3 Periodical Service 170 ...

Page 185: ...rts name Parts number Remarks This machine Conventional model 1 ITB Primary Transfer Roller Y M C K FC0 0257 FC0 0257 2 ITB Cleaning Blade FM4 7246 FM4 7246 3 Externals Toner Filter FC6 9817 FC6 9817 4 Dustproof Glass Cleaning Pad FL2 9476 FL2 9476 5 Right Door Transfer Separation Guide Unit FM3 8893 FM3 8893 6 ADF Stamp FC7 5465 FC7 5465 3 Periodical Service 171 ...

Page 186: ...Disassembly Assembly 4 Preface 173 List of Parts 174 Original Exposure System 224 Main Controller System 252 Laser Control System 278 Image Formation System 283 Fixing System 360 Pickup Feed System 372 ...

Page 187: ...t the Photosensitive Drum in a protective bag even in a short period of time to prevent the adverse effect of light 3 Reassembling procedures are followed by the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise specified 4 Note the length diameters and locations of screws as you remove them When reassembling the printer be sure to use them in their original locations 5 Do not run the printer with any parts...

Page 188: ...Lower Cover 13 Cassette 2 4 Control panel conector Cover 14 Waste toner Cover 5 Control panel upper arm Cover 15 Left Handle Cover 6 Control panel Lower arm Cover 16 Left Duct Cover 7 Lower Cover small 17 Service Book Holder 8 Right Front Upper Cover Unit 18 Left Lower Cover 9 Front Upper Cover Unit 19 Left Upper Cover 10 Toner Replacement Cover 20 Rear Upper Left Cover 4 Disassembly Assembly 174 ...

Page 189: ...3 Inner Delivery Cover left rear 11 Toner Bottel Right Inner Cover 4 Delivery Frame 12 ITB Cover 5 Bias PCB Cover 13 Process Unit Front Cover 6 Inner Delivery Cover rear 14 Toner Bottle Exchange Door Bk 7 Inner Delivery Cover right rear 15 Toner Bottle Exchange Door Y M C 8 Inner Delivery sensor Cover 16 Lock Pin Cover 4 Disassembly Assembly 175 ...

Page 190: ... purpose Tray Pickup Sub Tray 5 Right Rear Cover 1 16 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Side Guide Plate 6 Environment Heater Switch Cover 17 Right Front Cover Upper 7 Right Handle Cover Rear 18 Main Power Supply Switch Cover 8 Right Lower Sub Cover 2 19 Right Door Unit 9 Right Rear Cover 2 20 Third Delivery Frame Cover 10 Right Cover Lower 21 Third Delivery Outlet Cover 11 Right Lower Door 22 Wire Cover ...

Page 191: ...t Retaining Cover 2 Reader Front Cover Small 7 Reader Hinge Lower Cover Left Reader Hinge Lower Cover Right 3 Reader Left Cover 8 Reader PCB Cover 4 Reader Left Retaining Cover 9 Reader Rear Cover 5 Reader Glass Support Cover 10 Reader Right Cover 4 Disassembly Assembly 177 ...

Page 192: ... 1 ADF Front Cover 6 Document supply tray extension 2 ADF Left Cover 7 Document output tray extension 3 ADF Upper Cover 8 Hinge Cover 4 Slide Guide 9 ADF Rear Cover 5 Document supply tray 10 Document output tray 4 Disassembly Assembly 178 ...

Page 193: ...ence UN43 Developing Sub Bias PCB Y UN44 Developing Sub Bias PCB M UN45 Developing Sub Bias PCB C UN46 Developing Sub Bias PCB Bk UN56 Drum Unit Memory Y UN57 Drum Unit Memory M UN58 Drum Unit Memory C UN59 Drum Unit Memory Bk TS5 ATR Sensor Y TS6 ATR Sensor M TS7 ATR Sensor C TS8 ATR Sensor Bk 4 Disassembly Assembly 179 ...

Page 194: ...UN24 Y Pre Exposure Led PCB Rear UN25 M Pre Exposure Led PCB Front UN26 M Pre Exposure Led PCB Rear UN27 C Pre Exposure Led PCB Front UN28 C Pre Exposure Led PCB Rear UN29 Bk Pre Exposure Led PCB Front UN30 Bk Pre Exposure Led PCB Rear UN70 Drum Unit New Old Sensor Y UN71 Drum Unit New Old Sensor M UN72 Drum Unit New Old Sensor C UN73 Drum Unit New Old Sensor Bk 4 Disassembly Assembly 180 ...

Page 195: ...3 Bottle Rotation Sensor Bk PS64 Bottle Position Sensor Y PS65 Bottle Position Sensor M PS66 Bottle Position Sensor C PS67 Bottle Position Sensor Bk TS1 Hopper Toner Level Sensor Y TS2 Hopper Toner Level Sensor M TS3 Hopper Toner Level Sensor C TS4 Hopper Toner Level Sensor Bk UN39 Toner Sensor Relay PCB Y UN40 Toner Sensor Relay PCB M UN41 Toner Sensor Relay PCB C UN42 Toner Sensor Relay PCB Bk U...

Page 196: ...farence M1 Drum Motor YMC M4 Drum Motor Bk M5 Developing Motor Y M6 Developing Motor M M7 Developing Motor C M8 Developing Motor Bk CL2 Toner Supply Clutch Y CL3 Toner Supply Clutch M CL4 Toner Supply Clutch C CL5 Toner Supply Clutch Bk 4 Disassembly Assembly 182 ...

Page 197: ...3 ITB Motor M14 ITB Displacement Control Motor M15 Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor PS22 Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 1 PS23 Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 2 PS24 ITB Steering Sensor UN60 ITB Displacement Sensor PCB 4 Disassembly Assembly 183 ...

Page 198: ...er Motor YM M30 Laser Scanner Motor CK M31 Image Skew Correction Motor Y M32 Image Skew Correction Motor M M33 Image Skew Correction Motor C M34 Image Skew Correction Motor Bk UN12 Laser Driver PCB M UN13 Laser Driver PCB Y UN14 Laser Driver PCB Bk UN15 Laser Driver PCB C 4 Disassembly Assembly 184 ...

Page 199: ...ce M45 Recycle Toner Stirring Motor UN75 Waste Toner Sensor PCB SW10 Waste Toner Container Detection Switch SW11 Bottle Cover Open Close Switch Y SW12 Bottle Cover Open Close Switch M SW13 Bottle Cover Open Close Switch C SW14 Bottle Cover Open Close Switch Bk 4 Disassembly Assembly 185 ...

Page 200: ...40 Cassette 1 2 Lifter Motor PS51 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A PS52 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B PS53 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A PS54 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor B SW6 Cassette 1 Size Switch SW8 Cassette 2 Size Switch A SW9 Cassette 2 Size Switch B 4 Disassembly Assembly 186 ...

Page 201: ...50 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor PS55 Cassette 1 Pre Registration Sensor PS56 Cassette 2 Pre Registration Sensor PS68 Cassette 1 Paper Surface Sensor PS69 Cassette 2 Paper Surface Sensor PS74 Cassette 1 Pickup Nip Sensor PS75 Cassette 2 Pickup Nip Sensor PS76 Between Cassette 1 2 Sensor 4 Disassembly Assembly 187 ...

Page 202: ...PS77 No Name Reference SL1 Registration Shutter Solenoid UN47 Registration Patch Sensor Front UN48 Registration Patch Sensor Rear UN49 Registration Patch Sensor Middle PS33 Registration Sensor PS77 Transparency Sensor 4 Disassembly Assembly 188 ...

Page 203: ...S35 PS36 PS38 PS19 UN61 No Name Refarence UN61 Right Door Relay PCB PS19 Right Lower Door Sensor PS34 Fixing Inlet Sensor PS35 Fixing Arch Sensor 1 PS36 Fixing Arch Sensor 2 PS38 Duplex Paper Sensor 4 Disassembly Assembly 189 ...

Page 204: ...pose Tray Paper Sensor PS70 Multi Purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 1 PS71 Multi Purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 2 PS72 Multi Purpose Tray Pullout Sensor PS73 Multi Purpose Tray HP Sensor PS78 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller HP Sensor UN52 Multi Purpose Tray Width Sensing PCB 4 Disassembly Assembly 190 ...

Page 205: ...S32 Shutter Position Sensor PS37 Inner Delivery Sensor UN78 Fixing Relay PCB UN79 Fixing Memory PCB H1 Fixing Heater TH1 Main Thermistor Fixing Heater Center Fixing Film Center Fixing Heater Front Edge Fixing Heater Rear Edge TH2 Sub Thermistor Fixing Film Front Edge Fixing Film Rear Edge TP1 Thermoswitch 4 Disassembly Assembly 191 ...

Page 206: ...rce Motor M25 Third Delivery Motor SL5 First Delivery Flapper Solenoid SL6 Second Delivery Flapper Solenoid SL7 Third Delivery Flapper Solenoid PS39 Reverse Sensor PS40 Duplex Inlet Sensor PS42 Second Delivery Sensor PS43 Third Delivery Sensor PS45 Second Delivery Tray Full Sensor PS57 Pre Reverse Sensor 4 Disassembly Assembly 192 ...

Page 207: ...M M11 Bottle Motor C M12 Bottle Motor Bk M18 Multi Purpose Pickup Motor M19 Registration Motor M20 Duplex Feed Motor M21 Fixing Motor M27 Fixing Shutter Motor M28 Laser Shutter Motor M41 Cassette 1 2 Pickup Motor M42 Cassette 1 Pullout Motor M43 Cassette 2 Pullout Motor M44 Pre Registration Motor 4 Disassembly Assembly 193 ...

Page 208: ...n 1 FM2 Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2 FM3 Power Supply Cooling Fan FM4 Process Cartridge Fan Rear FM5 Fixing Cooling Fan Front FM6 Fixing Cooling Fan Rear FM7 Delivery Fan 1 FM8 Secondary Transfer Exhaust Fan FM9 Delivery Fan 2 FM10 Process Cartridge Fan Front FM11 Controller Fan 4 Disassembly Assembly 194 ...

Page 209: ...t Door Sensor PS20 Right Door Sensor PS21 Second Third Delivery Door Sensor PS29 Laser Shutter Sensor PS41 First Delivery Sensor PS44 First Delivery Tray Full Sensor SW1 Main Power Supply Switch SW2 Environment Switch SW3 DC Interlock Switch SW5 AC Interlock Switch H2 Drum Heater H4 Cassette Heater 1 Speaker 2 Motion Sensor 4 Disassembly Assembly 195 ...

Page 210: ...24V Power Supply PCB UN11 12V Power Supply PCB UN17 Primary Transfer Bk Developing Charging High Voltage PCB UN18 Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN22 Internal Temperature Sensor UN50 Environment Sensor UN76 Developing High Voltage PCB YMC UN77 Charging High Voltage PCB YMC 1 Main Controller PCB 2 Riser PCB 3 Control Panel CPU PCB 4 Control Panel KEY PCB 5 NFC PCB 6 Wireless LAN PCB 7 Device P...

Page 211: ...sor PS_N1 Copyboard Cover Open Closed Sensor Front PS_N2 Copyboard Cover Open Closed Sensor Rear PS_R1 Original Size Sensor AB PS_R2 Original Size Sensor Inch HTR1 Reader Heater 1 100V HTR3 Reader Heater 2 200V HTR2 Reader Heater 1 100V HTR4 Reader Heater 2 200V UN_BO1 Reader Controlle PCB UN_BO2 CMOS PCB UN_BO3 LED PCB 4 Disassembly Assembly 197 ...

Page 212: ... ADF FAN_A1 STM3 STM2 STM1 CL1 SL1 No Name Refarence CL1 Separation Clutch SL1 Stamp Solenoid STM1 Registration Motor STM2 Pickup Motor STM3 Read Motor FAN_A1 Cooling Fan 4 Disassembly Assembly 198 ...

Page 213: ...4 AB Inch Sensor PS_A5 Cover Open Closed Sensor PS_A6 Lead Sensor 1 PS_A7 Lead Sensor 2 PS_A9 Glass Movement HP Sensor PS_N1 Original Sensor PS_R1 Post separation Sensor PS_R2 Registration Sensor PS_R3 Large Small Sensor UN_BO6 Paper Width Sensor UN_BO7 Double Feed Detection PCB Transmission UN_BO8 Double Feed Detection PCB Reception UN_SNS1 Original Width Volume 4 Disassembly Assembly 199 ...

Page 214: ...UN_BO3 UN_BO2 UN_BO1 UN_BO4 UN_BO5 No Name Refarence UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB UN_BO2 CMOS PCB UN_BO3 LED PCB UN_BO4 Original Display LED UN_BO5 Delivery Display LED 4 Disassembly Assembly 200 ...

Page 215: ...ors Main Unit J306 UN46 UN45 UN44 UN43 J6150 J6115 J6801 J6117 J6119 J6804 J6803 J6802 J6121 J600 J607 J601 J603 J602 J609 J608 J6111 J6149 J6148 J6147 J605 J604 J606 J6118 J6120 J6116 J6114 4 Disassembly Assembly 201 ...

Page 216: ...y PCB J6802 UN71 Drum Unit New Old Sensor M J608 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB J6803 UN72 Drum Unit New Old Sensor C J608 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB J6804 UN73 Drum Unit New Old Sensor Bk J609 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB J509 3 UN43 Developing Sub Bias PCB Y J609 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB J509 4 UN44 Developing Sub Bias PCB M J609 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB J509 5 UN45 Developing Sub Bias PCB C ...

Page 217: ... J501 6 J6452 UN66 Bottle New Old Sensor Y J173 UN1 DC Controller PCB J351 J501 9 J6452 UN67 Bottle New Old Sensor M J173 UN1 DC Controller PCB J352 J502 2 J6452 UN68 Bottle New Old Sensor C J173 UN1 DC Controller PCB J353 J502 5 J6452 UN69 Bottle New Old Sensor Bk J212 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J501 5 J501 6 J1400 UN39 Toner Sensor Relay PCB Y J212 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J501 8 J501 9 J1410 UN40...

Page 218: ...nsor Y J1411 UN40 Toner Sensor Relay PCB M J6037 PS2 Toner Supply Sensor M J1411 UN40 Toner Sensor Relay PCB M J6038 PS61 Bottle Rotation Sensor M J1411 UN40 Toner Sensor Relay PCB M J6151 PS65 Bottle Position Sensor M J1411 UN40 Toner Sensor Relay PCB M J6036 TS2 Hopper Toner Level Sensor M J1421 UN41 Toner Sensor Relay PCB C J6040 PS3 Toner Supply Sensor C J1421 UN41 Toner Sensor Relay PCB C J60...

Page 219: ...river PCB J2111 M9 Bottle Motor Y J211 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J2112 M10 Bottle Motor M J211 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J2113 M11 Bottle Motor C J211 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J2114 M12 Bottle Motor Bk J213 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J6059 M27 Fixing Shutter Motor J215 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J6084 M21 Fixing Motor J217 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J2171 M18 Multi Purpose Pickup Motor J217 UN2 Feed Drum ...

Page 220: ...28 Laser Shutter Motor J225 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J6015 M5 Developing Motor Y J225 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J6013 M6 Developing Motor M J225 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J6012 M7 Developing Motor C J225 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J6011 M8 Developing Motor Bk J225 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J6005 CL2 Toner Supply Clutch Y J225 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J6006 CL3 Toner Supply Clutch M J225 UN2 Feed Drum D...

Page 221: ... J No Sym bol Name Re marks J9 Riser PCB J802 UN13 Laser Driver PCB Y J9 Riser PCB J822 UN12 Laser Driver PCB M J9 Riser PCB J802 UN15 Laser Driver PCB C J9 Riser PCB J822 UN14 Laser Driver PCB Bk J171 UN1 DC Controller PCB J171 1 J851 UN13 Laser Driver PCB Y J171 UN1 DC Controller PCB J171 1 J862 UN15 Laser Driver PCB C J224 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J620 4 J6244 M45 Recycle Toner Stirring Motor 4...

Page 222: ...r Driver PCB Bk J701 UN60 ITB Displacement Sensor PCB J7010 PS22 Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 1 J701 UN60 ITB Displacement Sensor PCB J7011 PS23 Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 2 J701 UN60 ITB Displacement Sensor PCB J701 2 J7013 PS24 ITB Steering Sensor J821 UN12 Laser Driver PCB M J801 UN13 Laser Driver PCB Y J821 UN14 Laser Driver PCB Bk J801 UN15 Laser Driver PCB C J823 UN12 Laser Dri...

Page 223: ...6202 J6237 J6132 J6201 J6129 J6200 J1254 J1253 J1252 J6094 J6095 J6064 J No Sym bol Name Relay connector J No Sym bol Name Re marks J125 UN1 DC Controller PCB J125 1 J1252 UN47 Registration Sensor Front J125 UN1 DC Controller PCB J125 1 J1254 UN48 Registration Sensor Rear 4 Disassembly Assembly 209 ...

Page 224: ...m Driver PCB J621 1 J6137 PS56 Cassette 1 Pickup Nip Sensor J220 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J621 1 J6203 PS75 Cassette 2 Pickup Nip Sensor J220 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J631 8 J6237 PS76 Between Cassette 1 2 Sensor J221 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J646 1 J6214 M40 Cassette 1 2 Lifter Motor J221 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J646 1 J6130 PS51 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A J221 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J646...

Page 225: ...ed Drum Driver PCB J621 3 J5100 PS19 Right Lower Door Sensor J1101 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB J623 2 J6222 PS47 Multi Purpose Tray Paper Sen sor J1101 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB J624 0 J6226 PS70 Multi Purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 1 J1101 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB J624 0 J6227 PS71 Multi Purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 2 J1101 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB J610 2 J6224 PS72 Multi Purpose Tray Pullo...

Page 226: ...up Roll er HP Sensor J1101 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB J624 0 J751 UN52 Multi Purpose Tray Width Sensing PCB J1102 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB J506 8 J6087 PS34 Fixing Inlet Sensor J1102 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB J506 8 J6085 PS35 Fixing Arch Sensor 1 J1102 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB J506 8 J6086 PS36 Fixing Arch Sensor 2 J1102 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB J505 4 J6077 PS38 Duplex Paper Sensor 4 Disassemb...

Page 227: ...76 J6142 J6141 J6140 J6074 J6073 J6065 J6104 J6103 J6102 J48 J5007 J6491 J6492 TP1 J6101 J720 J722 J721 J No Sym bol Name Relay connector J No Sym bol Name Re marks J122 UN1 DC Controller PCB J122 1 J501 2 J720 UN78 Fixing Relay PCB 4 Disassembly Assembly 213 ...

Page 228: ...tor J216 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J503 2 J510 6 J508 3 J6065 SL5 First Delivery Flapper Solenoid J216 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J503 2 J509 7 J6073 SL6 Second Delivery Flapper Sole noid J216 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J503 2 J509 7 J6074 SL7 Third Delivery Flapper Solenoid J216 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J503 2 J510 6 J6090 PS39 Reverse Sensor J216 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J503 2 J6076 PS40 Duplex Inle...

Page 229: ...r PCB J6061 FM7 Delivery Fan 1 J213 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J6071 FM8 Secondary Transfer Exhaust Fan J217 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J6066 FM1 Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1 J217 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J6067 FM2 Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2 J224 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J6124 FM4 Process Cartridge Fan Rear J224 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J6123 FM10 Process Cartridge Fan Front J301 UN3 Front Driver PCB J301...

Page 230: ...um Driver PCB J6091 PS44 First Delivery Tray Full Sensor J217 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J5004 PS20 Right Door Sensor J224 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J6097 PS29 Laser Shutter Sensor J300 UN3 Front Driver PCB SW3 DC Interlock Switch 1 J301 UN3 Front Driver PCB J301 0 J3011 PS21 Second Third Delivery Door Sensor J302 UN3 Front Driver PCB J6046 PS17 Toner Container Outer Cover Sensor J305 UN3 Front Drive...

Page 231: ... Controller PCB J172 UN1 DC Controller PCB J203 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J170 UN1 DC Controller PCB J202 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J406 UN5 Relay PCB J201 UN2 Feed Drum Driver PCB J111 UN1 DC Controller PCB J301 UN3 Front Driver PCB J402 UN5 Relay PCB J304 UN3 Front Driver PCB J130 UN1 DC Controller PCB J410 UN5 Relay PCB J173 UN1 DC Controller PCB J505 UN6 AC Driver PCB J411 UN5 Relay PCB J504 UN6...

Page 232: ... PCB J2 Riser PCB J101 UN1 DC Controller PCB J10 Riser PCB J6 Riser PCB J1020 Control Panel CPU PCB J3 Riser PCB J1021 Control Panel CPU PCB J1001 Control Panel CPU PCB J1 Control Panel KEY PCB J1002 Control Panel CPU PCB J2 Control Panel KEY PCB J1022 Control Panel CPU PCB Speaker J1005 Control Panel CPU PCB J1 NFC PCB J1006 Control Panel CPU PCB J12 J14 J1 Motion Sensor J1006 Control Panel CPU P...

Page 233: ...ion Cassette J130 UN1 DC Controller PCB J110 UN1 DC Controller PCB J1103 Finisher J170 UN1 DC Controller PCB J357 J2091 Paper Deck Unit J160 UN1 DC Controller PCB J6406 J160 UN1 DC Controller PCB J6407 J645 UN77 Charging High Voltage PCB YMC J645 UN77 Charging High Voltage PCB YMC J645 UN77 Charging High Voltage PCB YMC J615 UN76 Charging High Voltage PCB YMC J615 UN76 Charging High Voltage PCB YM...

Page 234: ...r Controlle PCB J5002 PS_A1 Scanner Unit HP Sensor J102 UN_BO1 Reader Controlle PCB J5001 PS_N1 Copyboard Cover Open Closed Sensor Front J102 UN_BO1 Reader Controlle PCB J5003 PS_N2 Copyboard Cover Open Closed Sensor Rear J107 UN_BO1 Reader Controlle PCB J5004 PS_R1 Original Size Sensor AB J107 UN_BO1 Reader Controlle PCB J5005 PS_R2 Original Size Sensor Inch J108 UN_BO1 Reader Controlle PCB J5015...

Page 235: ...J No Symbol Name Relay connector J No Symbol Name Remarks J509 UN6 AC Driver PCB J510 2 J800 8 J8014 HTR2 Reader Heater 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 221 ...

Page 236: ... J635 J634 J451 J459 J460 J701 J1 J2 J464 J465 J402 J409 J405 J404 J401 J408 J407 J410 J473 J401 J101 J471 J No Symbol Name Relay connector J No Symbol Name Remarks J1 UN_BO3 LED PCB ADF J401 UN_BO2 CMOS PCB ADF J2 UN_BO3 LED PCB ADF J401 UN_BO2 CMOS PCB ADF 4 Disassembly Assembly 222 ...

Page 237: ...river PCB J467 CL1 Separation Clutch J407 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB J475 J478 J466 SL1 Stamp Solenoid J408 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB J459 PS_A5 Cover Open Closed Sensor J408 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB J453 J478 PS_A6 Lead Sensor 1 J408 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB J454 PS_A7 Lead Sensor 2 J408 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB J462 PS_A9 Glass Movement HP Sensor J408 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB J476 J452 PS_R2 Registration Sensor J408...

Page 238: ...nit ADF Separation Roller Procedure 1 Open the Feeder Cover 1 2 Remove the Pre separation Unit 2 2 Claws 3 1 3 2x 2 3 Remove the ADF Separation Roller Shaft 1 1 4 Remove the ADF Separation Roller 1 from the shaft 2 1 Claw 3 2 3 1x 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 224 ...

Page 239: ... touch the ADF Pickup Roller and the ADF Feed Roller 1 Remove the Feeder Inner Cover Front 1 and the Feeder Inner Cover Rear 2 2 Claws 3 4 Hooks 4 2x 3 4 4 1 2 2 Remove the Resin Ring 1 1 3 Pull out the shaft while shifting the 2 bushings 1 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 225 ...

Page 240: ... Pickup Roller Unit Removing the ADF Pickup Roller Unit on page 225 Procedure CAUTION Be sure not to touch the ADF Pickup Roller and the ADF Feed Roller 1 Remove the bushing 1 and the 2 Resin Rings 2 from the ADF Pickup Roller Unit 1 2 2 Remove the Roller Holder Front 1 and the Parallel Pin 2 2 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 226 ...

Page 241: ...d the ADF Feed Roller 2 1 Claw 3 1x 3 2 1 CAUTION Be sure to install the ADF Pickup Roller 1 with the protrusion 2 on the front side and install the ADF Feed Roller 3 with the bearing 4 on the rear side 3 1 4 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 227 ...

Page 242: ...he gear 3 in the direction shown in the figure below so that the hole for the Parallel Pin is oriented horizontally and install the Parallel Pin 3 2 1 3 Install the Roller Holder Front 1 by aligning its grove 2 with the Parallel Pin 2 1 Installing the ADF Pickup Roller Unit Procedure 1 Hold the ADF Pickup Roller Unit while lifting the 2 flags 1 with your fingers 2 Install the bushing 2 1 2 4 Disas...

Page 243: ...e bushing 3 while compressing the spring and insert the shaft 2 into the Shaft Support 4 of the feeder It is advisable to insert it from the rear side 4 2 1 3 5 Put the shaft 1 of the ADF Pickup Roller Unit into the Shaft Support front side 2 of the feeder and secure it with the bushing 3 2 1 3 6 Secure the Resin Ring on the front side 7 Install the Feeder Inner Cover Front and the Feeder Inner Co...

Page 244: ...Close Guide Plates 2 4 Screws 3 3 3 2 2 1 4x 2 Open the ADF 3 Remove the Reader Cable Cover 1 2 Rubber Caps 2 2 Screws 3 1 2 2 3 3 2x 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and the 2 Flat Cables 2 from the Reader Controller PCB 2 Connectors with a hook 3 3x 3 3 1 2 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 230 ...

Page 245: ...to damage the white sheet 1 of the ADF Be careful not to damage the Reader Communication Cable Guide 2 when placing the ADF 1 2 4x 2 1 2 2 Installing the White Plate Preparation 1 Remove the White Plate Procedure 1 Open the ADF 4 Disassembly Assembly 231 ...

Page 246: ...r on the plate on the rear side and Front on the front side Be sure to align the Index Sheet with the left side of the White Plate 3 Close the ADF 1 Then open it again 1 4 Press the White Plate 1 from the bottom left shown in the figure 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 232 ...

Page 247: ...re below and secure the White Plate and the cover of the ADF document reading area in place 1 2 CAUTION Check that the White Plate 1 is not placed on the Index Sheet 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 Removing the ADF Scanner Unit Preparation 1 Removing the ADF Pre separation Unit Removing the ADF Pre separation Unit ADF Separation Roller on page 224 4 Disassembly Assembly 233 ...

Page 248: ... Remove the Upper Inner Cover 1 1 Screw 2 1 2 1x 2 Remove the connector 1 and the round shape terminal 2 1 Screw 3 1 Harness Guide 4 1 2 3 1x 1x 4 3 Free the spring 1 from the hook 2 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 234 ...

Page 249: ...t Be sure to hold the handle 1 and the plate 2 Do not touch the PCB 3 and the mirror 4 2 1 3 4 5 Disconnect the Flat Cable 2 from the ADF Scanner Unit 1 1 Connector with a hook 3 6 Hold the handle 4 and the plate 5 and remove the ADF Scanner Unit 2 Screws W Sems 6 1 Screw with a spring 7 1 6 7 1x 3x 2 3 4 5 4 Disassembly Assembly 235 ...

Page 250: ...3 3 2x 3 Open the ADF 1 and remove the 2 screws 3 of the Front Cover 2 1 2 3 3 2x 4 Open the cover 1 of the ADF document reading area 5 Open the Rear Guide 2 and remove the Paper Back Reading Glass 3 CAUTION Be sure to open the Rear Guide otherwise the roller comes in contact with the glass 1 2 3 4 Disassembly Assembly 236 ...

Page 251: ...s with wet and tightly wrung lint free paper 3 3 2 1 Removing the Rear Cover Procedure 1 Open the Feeder Cover 1 2 Remove the 3 screws 3 of the Rear Cover 2 2 3 1 3 3x NOTE The figure below shows the 3 claws 1 and the 2 protrusions 2 of the Rear Cover 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 237 ...

Page 252: ...1 3x 4 Remove the parts on the rear side of the ADF as needed Cleaning the Lead Roller 1 2 3 Procedure CAUTION To clean the Lead Roller 2 and 3 perform the procedure from step 9 1 Open the ADF Upper Cover 1 2 Remove the 2 screws 3 of the ADF Front Cover 2 2 1 3 3 2x 4 Disassembly Assembly 238 ...

Page 253: ... Open the ADF 1 and remove the 2 screws 3 of the ADF Front Cover 2 1 2 3 3 2x 4 Remove the ADF Rear Cover Procedure on page 237 5 Remove the ADF Left Cover 1 2 Screws 2 2x 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 239 ...

Page 254: ...ightening 1x 1x 2 4 2 3 1 7 Release the 2 hooks 2 on the front and rear of the Pressure Plate 1 and gently remove the Pressure Plate 1 CAUTION Be careful not to drop the 6 Compression Springs used inside NOTE Opening the ADF Upper Cover releases the pressure and makes it easier to perform the work 1x 1x 1 2 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 240 ...

Page 255: ...re correctly set in the holder on the Lead Roller side NOTE Opening the ADF Upper Cover releases the pressure and makes it easier to perform the work 9 When cleaning the Lead Roller 2 1 open the Rear Guide 3 and cover 2 of the ADF document reading area and clean the Lead Roller 2 with lint free paper moistened with alcohol 2 3 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 241 ...

Page 256: ...3 from the original delivery outlet side with lint free paper moistened with alcohol 1 Removing the ADF Driver PCB Preparation 1 Removing the Rear Cover Removing the Rear Cover on page 237 Procedure 1 Remove the ADF Driver PCB 1 8 Connectors 2 2 Screws 3 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 2x 8x 4 Disassembly Assembly 242 ...

Page 257: ...er Controller PCB Procedure 1 Lift up the hinge part 1 of the ADF to set it to the book original mode 1 2 Open the ADF 3 Remove the Reader Cable Cover 1 2 Rubber Caps 2 2 Screws 3 1 2 2 3 3 2x 4 Disassembly Assembly 243 ...

Page 258: ... with a hook 3 3x 3 3 1 2 2 5 Remove the Reader Rear Cover 1 4 Screws 2 3 Rubber Caps 3 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 4x 6 Remove the Reader Controller PCB Cover Plate 1 4 Screws 2 2 Hooks 3 2 1 3 2 4x 7 Remove the Flat Cable 2 from the Reader Controller PCB 1 1 Connector with a hook 4 Disassembly Assembly 244 ...

Page 259: ...ideo Cable 6 1 2 3 3 4 4 4x 2x 5x 6 1 5 5 9 Remove the Reader Controller PCB 1 1 Screw 2 4 Screws 3 1 3 2 3 3 5x NOTE When installing the Reader Controller PCB 1 tighten the screw 2 first Cleaning the Reader Scanner Unit Scanner Mirror Procedure 1 Open the ADF 4 Disassembly Assembly 245 ...

Page 260: ...pplied on the 2 Rail Shafts 1 of the Reader Scanner Unit If you have touched the grease be careful not to put it to other parts 1 3 Move the belt 1 and move the Reader Scanner Unit 2 to the cut off 3 of the Reader Unit 2 3 2 1 4 Loosen the screw 1 to release the tension applied on the belt 4 Disassembly Assembly 246 ...

Page 261: ...it in the direction of the arrow while paying attention not to make it contact with the frame of the Reader and place it as shown in the figure below 1 1 7 Remove the LED Unit 1 2 Connectors 2 3 Hooks 1 2 2x 8 Return the Scanner Unit to its original position 4 Disassembly Assembly 247 ...

Page 262: ... The following 4 mirrors can be cleaned 1 1 2 NOTE The rearmost mirror 2 cannot be cleaned However it is a dustproof mirror so there is no need to clean it Removing the Reader Scanner Unit Procedure 1 Open the ADF 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 248 ...

Page 263: ...3 2 1 3 3 2x CAUTION Grease is applied on the 2 Rail Shafts 1 of the Reader Scanner Unit If you have touched the grease be careful not to put it to other parts 1 3 Move the belt 1 and move the Reader Scanner Unit 2 to the cut off 3 of the Reader Unit 2 3 2 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 249 ...

Page 264: ...from the Reader Scanner Unit 2 2 1 3 1x CAUTION Holding the Reader Scanner Unit Be sure to hold both edges 1 Do not touch the PCB 2 and the mirror 3 2 3 1 1 5 Place paper 1 on the Stream Reading Glass and place the Reader Scanner Unit on it with its upside 2 down 2 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 250 ...

Page 265: ...x CAUTION When installing the Reader Scanner Unit be sure to insert the 4 protrusions 2 of the Flat Cable Protection Sheet 1 into the guide A A 1 2 2 NOTE Installation Procedure When installing the belt to the Reader Scanner Unit it can be installed easily by removing the belt 2 from the pulley 1 2 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 251 ...

Page 266: ...ystem Removing the HDD Procedure CAUTION Actions before Replacement Before Replacing on page 430 1 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 2 Open the HDD Cap 2 1 Screw 3 1x 2 3 1 3 Remove the HDD Unit 1 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 252 ...

Page 267: ...3 4x 3 1 2 CAUTION Actions after Replacement Aftter Replacement on page 432 Removing the Main Controller PCB Preparation 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover 2 Removing the Right Rear Cover 3 Screws Binding 2 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 253 ...

Page 268: ...ller PCB 2 1 Screw 3 1 Board to Board Connector 4 1 2 3 4 1x 1x 2 Remove the 2 connectors 1 Wire Saddle 2 and Harness Guide 3 from the PCB 2x 2x 1 1 3 2 3 Turn over the Main Controller PCB and remove the HDD Unit 1 4 Screws 2 4x 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 254 ...

Page 269: ...Memory PCB 3 Bypass PCB 4 1 3 4 2 After replacement of the Main Controller PCB there is no need to set register the data again CAUTION When installing hold the handle 1 insert the Main Controller PCB 2 check the connection of the Board to Board Connector 3 and secure it with the screw 4 1 Screw 1 2 4 3 1x 1x Removing the Riser PCB Preparation 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover ...

Page 270: ...er 1 Rubber Cap 4 Screws 1 Claw 2 4 3 1 5 Removing the Main Controller PCB Removing the Main Controller PCB on page 253 Procedure 1 Remove the Shield Plate 1 1 Screw 2 4 Screws 3 to loosen 1x 4x 2 3 1 3 3 4 Disassembly Assembly 256 ...

Page 271: ...ctors 1 from the Fax Unit CAUTION When there are 2 to 4 additional Fax lines remove them beforehand 3x 1 1 3 Remove the Connector Cover 1 avoiding the harness 2 Screws 2 2x 1 2 4 Remove the 6 cables 1 and the screw 2 6x 1x 2 1 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 257 ...

Page 272: ...s installed connect the connectors Opening the Controller Box Preparation 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover 2 Removing the Right Rear Cover 3 Removing the Left Rear Cover 4 Removing the Rear Upper Cover 1 Rubber Cap 4 Screws Binding 1 Claw 2 4 3 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 258 ...

Page 273: ...ng the DC Controller PCB Preparation CAUTION Actions before Replacement Processing before replacing the parts on page 428 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover 2 Removing the Right Rear Cover 3 Removing the Left Rear Cover 4 Disassembly Assembly 259 ...

Page 274: ...58 Procedure 1 Remove the DC Controller PCB 1 18 Connectors 2 5 Screws 3 5x 18x 2 2 3 3 1 2 3 CAUTION When replacing the DC Controller PCB be sure to use a new one Do not use the DC Controller PCB which was used with another machine CAUTION Actions after Replacement Adjustment when Replacing the Parts on page 429 4 Disassembly Assembly 260 ...

Page 275: ...Right Upper Cover 2 Removing the Right Rear Cover 3 Removing the Left Rear Cover 4 Removing the Rear Upper Cover 1 Rubber Cap 4 Screws Binding 1 Claw 2 4 3 1 5 Open the Controller Box Opening the Controller Box on page 258 Procedure 1 Remove the harness 3 Connectors 1 6 Wire Saddles 2 3x 6x 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 261 ...

Page 276: ...Voltage Unit 2 3 Screws 3 3 Hooks 4 3x 1 2 3 3 4 4 4 Removing the Rear Lower Cover Procedure 1 Remove the Connector Cover 1 1 Screw 2 1x 1 2 2 If the Cassette Pedestal is installed disconnect the connectors 5 Connectors 1 4 Harness Guides 2 4x 5x 1 2 2 2 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 262 ...

Page 277: ... 1x Removing the Power Supply Unit 12 V 24 V Preparation 1 Removing the Rear Lower Cover Removing the Rear Lower Cover on page 262 Procedure 1 Pull the Power Supply Unit 1 out a little 2 Connectors 2 1 Wire Saddle 3 3 Screws 4 3x 1 4 2 1x 2x 3 4 4 Disassembly Assembly 263 ...

Page 278: ...ctor 1 is connected 1 1 2 Remove the Fan Duct 1 2 Screws 2 2 1 2x 3 Remove the Power Supply Unit 1 2 Connectors 2 1 Edge Saddle 3 2 2x 3 1 1x Removing the Feed Drum Driver PCB Preparation 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover 2 Removing the Right Rear Cover 4 Disassembly Assembly 264 ...

Page 279: ...cedure 1 Remove the connector on the PCB and then remove the Feed Drum Driver PCB 1 20 Connectors 2 7 Screws 3 7x 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 20x 1 Removing the Relay PCB Preparation 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover 2 Removing the Right Rear Cover 3 Removing the Left Rear Cover 4 Disassembly Assembly 265 ...

Page 280: ...connector on the PCB and then remove the Relay PCB 1 14 Connectors 2 4 Screws 3 4x 14x 3 3 2 1 Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage Unit Preparation 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover 2 Removing the Right Rear Cover 3 Removing the Left Rear Cover 4 Disassembly Assembly 266 ...

Page 281: ... Claw 2 4 3 1 5 Open the Controller Box Opening the Controller Box on page 258 6 Removing the Rear Lower Cover Removing the Rear Lower Cover on page 262 Procedure CAUTION Hook up the harness 1 freed in step 1 to the 2 hooks 2 2x 2 2 1 1 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 267 ...

Page 282: ...x 3 3 1 11x 1x 11x 2 2 2 4 2 2 2 Remove the Secondary Transfer High Voltage Unit 1 2 Connectors 2 1 Fasten Terminal 3 4 Screws 4 2 3 4 1 4x 2x Removing the AC Driver PCB Preparation 1 Removing the Rear Lower Cover Removing the Rear Lower Cover on page 262 4 Disassembly Assembly 268 ...

Page 283: ...AC Driver PCB 1 6 Wire Saddles 2 10 Connectors 3 9 for outside Japan 10x 6x 2 2 2 3 3 1 2 Remove the AC Driver PCB 1 4 Screws 2 4x 1 2 2 Removing the Control Panel Procedure 1 Open the ADF 1 and raise the Control Panel 2 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 269 ...

Page 284: ...2 Screws 3 RS Tightening M3 2 Hooks 4 1 Boss 5 2x 2 3 1 4 2 3 5 3 Remove the Control Panel Arm Cover 1 2 Rubber Caps 2 2 Screws 3 RS Tightening M3 2x 2 2 3 3 1 4 Remove the 3 screws 2 securing the Control Panel Hinge 1 3x 2 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 270 ...

Page 285: ...nt damage on the Control Panel 1 6 Free the Control Panel Cable 1 from the 4 Cable Guides 2 4x 1 2 7 Pull out the Control Panel 1 8 Remove the Control Panel Connector Cover 2 5 Claws 3 9 Remove the Cable Guide 4 1x 1 2 3 3 4 5x 4 Disassembly Assembly 271 ...

Page 286: ...rd Glass CAUTION Be careful not to drop the Control Panel when turning it over 1 11 Remove the Cable Holder 1 1 Connector 2 3 Hooks 3 1 Boss 4 1x 1 3 2 4 3 12 Disconnect the USB Cable 1 and the Control Panel Cable 2 2x 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 272 ...

Page 287: ...unding Wire 6x 1 2 2 2 3 2 3 14 Remove the Control Panel Right Hinge 1 1 Screw 2 1 Boss 3 1x 1 2 3 15 Turn over the Control Panel Rear Cover 1 remove the screw 2 to disconnect the Grounding Wire 3 and remove the Control Panel 4 1x 4 2 3 1 CAUTION Actions after Replacement Actions at Parts Replacement on page 429 4 Disassembly Assembly 273 ...

Page 288: ...ving the AC Driver Unit 1 Disconnect all the connectors from the PCB and remove the AC Driver Unit 1 6 Wire Saddles 2 10 Connectors 3 9 for outside Japan 3 Screws 4 2 Hooks 5 10x 6x 3x 2 2 2 3 3 5 5 4 1 1 Procedure 1 Move the Connector Support Plate 1 so that it does not disturb the work 2 Screws 2 2x 2 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 274 ...

Page 289: ... 2 2x Removing the Developing High Voltage PCB YMC Charging High Voltage PCB YMC Preparation 1 Pull out the Cassette 2 2 Open the Waste Toner Container Cover 3 Pull out the Front Cover 4 Remove the Left Upper Cover 5 Remove the Left Lower Cover 3 2 1 4 5 4 Disassembly Assembly 275 ...

Page 290: ...rk 4 Connectors 2 4 Claws 3 3 3 2 2 1 4x 4x NOTE To remove the Developing High Voltage PCB YMC perform step 2 To remove the Charging High Voltage PCB YMC perform step 3 2 Remove the Developing High Voltage PCB YMC 1 1 Connector 2 2 Screws 3 2 Hooks 4 1 4 3 2 2x 1x 4 Disassembly Assembly 276 ...

Page 291: ...3 Remove the Charging High Voltage PCB YMC 1 1 Connector 2 2 Screws 3 3 Hooks 4 2x 1x 1 3 2 4 4 Disassembly Assembly 277 ...

Page 292: ...s Preparation 1 Open the Front Cover 1 1 Procedure 1 Remove the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Tool 1 1 2 Clean the Dustproof Glass from the 4 holes A on the Process Unit Front Cover using the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Tool 1 1 A 4 Disassembly Assembly 278 ...

Page 293: ...move the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Tool 1 1 2 Remove the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Pad 1 1 Claw 2 1x 2 1 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit Preparation 1 Removing the ITB Unit Removing the ITB Unit on page 283 2 Removing the Process Unit Removing the Process Unit on page 320 4 Disassembly Assembly 279 ...

Page 294: ...ation locations of the units are switched by mistake image displacements may occur NOTE This procedure shows removal of the Laser Scanner Unit for C Bk The same procedure applies to the Laser Scanner Unit for Y M except for some additional works described later 1 Lift and hook the Drum Heater 1 2 Screws 2 1 Hook 3 1 2 3 2x 2 Remove the Image Formation Suction Duct 1 1 Screw 2 1 Claw 3 2 1x 1x 1 3 ...

Page 295: ...pper Cover 1 toward the front 5 Screws 2 4 Hooks 3 5x 1 2 3 4 Remove the Left Duct Unit 1 1 Connector 2 1 Edge Saddle 3 2 Screws 4 2x 1x 1x 1 4 3 2 5 Remove the Scanner Fixation Spring 1 1 Screw 2 1x 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 281 ...

Page 296: ...Laser Scanner Unit 1 be sure to insert its protrusion 2 into the hole 2 of the Rear Plate and fit the boss on the front side with the hole on the plate 1 3 4 2 2 CAUTION During the installation be sure to pass the 2 harnesses 2 through the Sheet Guide 1 1 1x 1x 1 2 2 CAUTION Actions after Replacement Actions after Parts Replacement on page 432 4 Disassembly Assembly 282 ...

Page 297: ... Procedure 1 Remove the Toner Filter Cover 1 1 Claw 2 1 2 1x 2 Remove the Fan Protection Plate 1 and Toner Filter 2 1 2 Removing the ITB Unit Preparation 1 Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 1 2 3 4 Disassembly Assembly 283 ...

Page 298: ...f the pushing is insufficient the plate is not inserted to the slit of the ITB Cover which may cause the damage of the sensor Procedure 1 Be sure to check that the arrow on the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever 1 is aligned with the triangle mark 2 on the plate If not align the arrow on the lever with the triangle mark on the plate 1 1 2 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 284 ...

Page 299: ...on 3 Disconnect the connector 1 1x 1 CAUTION When pulling out the ITB Unit 1 be sure not to lower the ITB Pressure Release Lever 2 below the position 3 where it clicks If the ITB Unit is pulled out while the lever is lowered the ITB is scraped by the plate and this may cause scratches on the ITB surface Also be sure that the Process Unit is not pulled out If it is pulled out the clearance with the...

Page 300: ... Unit 1 to the stop label position 2 2 Screws 3 2x 1 2 3 3 CAUTION When pulling out the ITB Unit be sure not to lift it up as this may cause the unit not to click at the stop position and fall 4 Disassembly Assembly 286 ...

Page 301: ...NCTION MISC P ITB INIT Be careful not to make mistakes when installing the ITB Unit since there is no compatibility with the existing products iR ADV C52XX iR ADV C50XX When installing the ITB Unit 1 be sure to align it with the 2 ends of the rails 2 1 2 CAUTION Actions after Replacement Adjustment Procedure on page 433 Cleaning the Registration Patch Sensor Preparation 1 Removing the ITB Unit Rem...

Page 302: ...ting and clouding of the sensor window Do not dry wipe the sensor window because it is charged to attract toner 1 2 CAUTION Actions after Replacement Adjustment Procedure on page 433 Removing the Registration Patch Sensor Front Middle Rear Preparation 1 Removing the ITB Unit Removing the ITB Unit on page 283 2 Removing the Process Unit Removing the Process Unit on page 320 Procedure 1 Remove the 2...

Page 303: ...ve the Pre secondary Transfer Guide 1 Take care to not apply too much force to the Pre secondary Transfer Guide 2 Screws 2 1 Grounding Wire 3 2x 1 2 2 3 4 Remove the Registration Patch Sensor Unit 1 4 Screws 2 4 Bosses 3 4x 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 Disassembly Assembly 289 ...

Page 304: ...onnect the connector and remove the sensor you want to replace Example of the Registration Patch Sensor Rear 2 Screws 2 1 Connector 3 1 2 3 2x 1x CAUTION Actions after Replacement Actions after Parts Replacement on page 436 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit Preparation 1 Removing the ITB Unit Removing the ITB Unit on page 283 4 Disassembly Assembly 290 ...

Page 305: ...n contact with the ITB 2 1 2 NOTE Moving the ITB 1 away from the ITB Cleaning Unit 2 will generate a clearance making the work easier 1 2 1 Hold the handles 1 on the right and left side and remove the ITB Cleaning Unit 2 in the direction of the arrow 2 Screws 3 1 1 2 2x 3 4 Disassembly Assembly 291 ...

Page 306: ...nt Procedure on page 433 Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit Preparation 1 Removing the ITB Unit Removing the ITB Unit on page 283 2 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit on page 290 Procedure CAUTION Be sure not to touch the ITB Cleaning Blade 1 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 292 ...

Page 307: ... screws 1 of the unit 1 1 1 2 3 4 1x CAUTION Actions after Replacement Adjustment Procedure on page 433 Installing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit Preparation 1 Removing the ITB Unit Removing the ITB Unit on page 283 2 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit on page 290 3 Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit on page 292 4 Disassembly Assembly ...

Page 308: ...allation position of the ITB Cleaning Unit and the sheet 1 2 1 2 Install the Blade Alignment Plate and then install the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit 1 At this time be sure to move the paper 2 inserted in step 1 toward the direction shown in the figure to prevent the sheet 3 from flipping in advance 1 2 3 4 1x 4 Disassembly Assembly 294 ...

Page 309: ... ITB or on the Drive Roller or Secondary Transfer Inner Roller If it scatters inside the ITB or on the Drive Roller or Secondary Transfer Inner Roller wipe it off using lint free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating the motor by hand Be sure to rotate the motor counterclockwise only and be careful not to turn it clockwise CAUTION Actions after Replacement Adjustment Procedure on page 433 Re...

Page 310: ... the ITB When you touch the ITB touch the areas within 10mm from each edge of the belt Procedure 1 Turn over the ITB Unit 2 Remove the Bush Slider 1 1 E ring 2 1 2 3 Pull the ITB Pressure Release Lever 1 toward the front 4 Free the harness 2 3 Wire Saddles 3 1 Edge Saddle 4 1 3 4x 2 4 4 Disassembly Assembly 296 ...

Page 311: ...stand it on the ITB Cover 2 CAUTION Be sure to check that it has been freed from the hooks 3 on the front and rear side Be sure to align the claws 4 of the ITB Cover with the cut in the Protection Sheet In order to prevent the ITB from being damaged be sure to place a sheet of paper 5 between the ITB Unit and the ITB Cover as needed 2 Claws 1 2 3 4 4 5 5 2x 4 Disassembly Assembly 297 ...

Page 312: ... to lock the pressure 1 Screw 2 1x 1 2 8 Bend the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit 1 at 90 degrees and secure it with the pin 2 removed in step 7 1 2 9 When removing the ITB 1 insert paper 2 as shown in the figure to prevent it from being damaged by the plate 1 2 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 298 ...

Page 313: ...sfer Roller 3 otherwise it can cause an image failure 1 2 3 CAUTION Actions after Replacement Actions after Parts Replacement on page 433 Removing the Primary Transfer Roller Bk Preparation 1 Removing the ITB Unit Removing the ITB Unit on page 283 2 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit on page 290 3 Removing the ITB Removing the ITB on page 295 4 Disassembly Assembly 299 ...

Page 314: ...ndary Transfer Inner Roller 2 and Primary Transfer Roller 3 otherwise it can cause an image failure 1 2 3 1 Pull out the pin 1 and straighten the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit 2 2 Install the pin 1 removed in step 1 back into place 1 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 300 ...

Page 315: ...ace it on the paper 3 with the roller side facing up 2 Claws 4 4 2x 1 1 2 2 3 CAUTION Be sure to check that the shaft 1 is attached to the Fixation Member 2 1 2 4 While holding the Bushing 1 on the front side remove the Stopper 2 by pinching it with fingers 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 301 ...

Page 316: ... touch the surface of the Primary Transfer Roller 1 Grease is applied on the shaft A of the Primary Transfer Roller If you have touched the grease be careful not to put it to other parts 1 2 A CAUTION If the springs for the Primary Transfer Rollers of different colors Bk C M Y are mixed refer to the table shown below Name Configuration Characteristics Quanti ty Spring For Bk Shorter than other spr...

Page 317: ... 283 2 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit on page 290 3 Removing the ITB Removing the ITB on page 295 Procedure NOTE In this procedure the procedure for the Primary Transfer Roller C is described Perform the same procedure for M Y CAUTION Do not touch the surface of the Drive Roller 1 Secondary Transfer Inner Roller 2 and Primary Transfer Roller 3 otherwise it can cause ...

Page 318: ...e the ITB Unit 1 from the ITB Cover 2 install it to the plate outer frame and place it on the paper 3 with the roller side facing up 2 Claws 4 4 2x 1 1 2 2 3 CAUTION Be sure to check that the shaft 1 is attached to the Fixation Member 2 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 304 ...

Page 319: ...Disengagement Arms for the Primary Transfer Rollers of different colors Y and C M are mixed refer to the table shown below Name Characteristics Remarks Engagement Disengagement Arm For Y Black color for both the front and rear sides For this machine only Engagement Disengagement Arm For C M White color for both the front and rear sides 6 While holding the Shaft Support Front 1 remove the stopper 3...

Page 320: ...o touch the surface of the Primary Transfer Roller Grease is applied on the shaft A of the Primary Transfer Roller If you have touched the grease be careful not to put it to other parts 1 2 A CAUTION If the springs for the Primary Transfer Rollers of different colors Bk C M Y are mixed refer to the table shown below Name Configuration Characteristics Quanti ty Spring For Bk Shorter than other spri...

Page 321: ...ving the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Preparation 1 Removing the ITB Unit Removing the ITB Unit on page 283 2 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit on page 290 3 Removing the ITB Removing the ITB on page 295 Procedure CAUTION Do not touch the surface of the Drive Roller 1 Secondary Transfer Inner Roller 2 and Primary Transfer Roller 3 otherwise it can cause an image fail...

Page 322: ... 2 3 Remove the ITB Unit 1 from the ITB Cover 2 and place it on the paper 3 with the roller side facing up 2 Claws 4 4 2x 1 1 2 3 4 Remove the Grounding Plate 1 and the Secondary Transfer Shaft Support Holder 2 1 Screw 3 1x 1 2 3 4 Disassembly Assembly 308 ...

Page 323: ...rential direction of the shaft 1 CAUTION Be sure to install the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller 1 in the correct direction 1 CAUTION Actions after Replacement Actions after Parts Replacement on page 433 Installing the ITB Preparation 1 Removing the ITB Unit Removing the ITB Unit on page 283 2 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit on page 290 4 Disassembly Assembly 309 ...

Page 324: ...he figure below 1 2 Stand the ITB Unit 2 straight up on the ITB Cover 1 2 Claws 3 3 2x 1 2 3 NOTE If the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet included in the package is available cover the ITB Unit with it as shown in the figure below Place the slant area 1 to the ITB Motor side The framed area 2 is the area where the ITB is easily damaged so be sure that the area is covered with the ITB Installation ...

Page 325: ... within 10mm from the edges of the ITB and temporarily place the ITB using the marking line 2 as a guide CAUTION Be careful not to bend the ITB when bringing it down fully 1 2 10mm 10mm 5 Pull out the pin 1 and straighten the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit 2 for approx 70 To stretch the ITB for approx 90 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 311 ...

Page 326: ... center of the figure and then align the marking line 4 on the right side of the figure with the position of the ITB 2 3 4 4 1 CAUTION When installing the ITB be sure that the sheet 1 on the ITB Unit is inside of the ITB 2 1 2 7 Straighten the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit 1 and install the removed pin 2 1 Screw 3 1 2 1x 3 4 Disassembly Assembly 312 ...

Page 327: ... Unit 1 from the ITB Cover 2 and align it with the 2 hooks 3 of the ITB Unit to install it to the plate outer frame 2 Claws 4 1 3 4 2x 2 9 Install the pin 1 on the rear side 1 Screw 2 1 2 1x 4 Disassembly Assembly 313 ...

Page 328: ...e Bush Slider 2 to the boss 3 1 E ring 4 1 2 3 4 CAUTION Be sure that there is no gap between the ITB Pressure Release Lever 1 and the plate 2 1 3 2 CAUTION Be sure to check that the shaft 1 is attached to the Fixation Member 2 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 314 ...

Page 329: ...CAUTION Be sure to check that the hooks 1 are hooked to the plates 2 1 1 2 2 11 Install the harness 1 3 Wire Saddles 2 1 Edge Saddle 3 4x 2 1 3 12 Turn over the ITB Unit 4 Disassembly Assembly 315 ...

Page 330: ...Roller wipe it off using lint free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating the motor by hand Be sure to rotate the motor counterclockwise only and be careful not to turn it clockwise CAUTION When replacing the ITB with a new one after installing the ITB unit be sure to affix the label included in the package to the position of the label near the Collection Toner Ejection Mouth of the ITB Clean...

Page 331: ...1 1 2 Remove the Waste Toner Container 1 1 CAUTION Do not tilt the Waste Toner Container To prevent false recognition of the Waste Toner Sensor Pulling out the Process Unit Preparation 1 Open the Front Cover 1 Right Lower Cover 2 and Right Upper Cover 3 1 2 3 4 Disassembly Assembly 317 ...

Page 332: ...en installing the ITB Cover be sure to push it to the left If the pushing is insufficient the plate is not inserted to the slit of the ITB Cover which may cause the damage of the sensor Procedure 1 Be sure to check that the arrow on the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever 1 is aligned with the triangle mark 2 on the plate If not align the arrow on the lever with the triangle mark on the plate 1 1 2 2 4...

Page 333: ... Pressure Release Lever be sure to check that the Right Lower Cover is opened before the operation 1 2 2 3 Turn the Process Unit Shutter Lever 1 and remove the cover 2 1 Screw 3 to loosen 1x 1 3 2 CAUTION Do not push down the pin 1 with your finger and turn the lever 2 as doing so will open the shutter and cause toner to leak 4 Pull out the Process Unit 1 until it stops 2 Screws 2 4 Disassembly As...

Page 334: ...f paper 1 on the Process Unit to block the light to the Drum Unit 1 Removing the Process Unit Preparation 1 Pull out the Process Unit Pulling out the Process Unit on page 317 Procedure 1 Remove the 4 Stepped Screws 4 from the right and left rails 4x 1 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 320 ...

Page 335: ...it if the Laser Dustproof Shutter is opened and blocks to install the unit turn ON and then OFF the power Be sure to check that the Dustproof Shutter is closed before installation Installing the Process Unit Preparation 1 Pulling out the Process Unit Pulling out the Process Unit on page 317 2 Removing the Process Unit Removing the Process Unit on page 320 4 Disassembly Assembly 321 ...

Page 336: ...2 2 2 Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever 1 in the direction of the arrow until the protrusion 2 on the handle is aligned with the triangle mark on the plate to release the pressure CAUTION When operating the ITB Pressure Release Lever be sure to check that the Right Lower Cover is opened before the operation 1 2 2 3 Slide the 2 rails 1 of the Process Unit out of the host machine 1 4 Disassembly A...

Page 337: ...it 1 1 2 1 2 2 5 Secure the rails on the right and left side and the Process Unit with the 4 Stepped Screws 1 6 Remove the paper 2 from the Process Unit 1 1 4x 2 CAUTION When securing with the screws be sure to check that there is no gap A between the host machine and the Process Unit A 4 Disassembly Assembly 323 ...

Page 338: ...AUTION After closing the Process Unit press the 8 grips 1 of Drum Units from the top as shown in the figure below If the Drum Unit 2 is not installed properly it may cause color displacement 1 2 8 Install the cover and close the Process Unit Shutter Lever 1 1 Screw to tighten 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 324 ...

Page 339: ...er side of the plate 1 2 3 10 Install the ITB Cover 1 and tighten the 2 loosened screws 2 CAUTION When installing the ITB Cover be sure to push it to the left If the pushing is insufficient the plate is not inserted to the slit of the ITB Cover which may cause the damage of the sensor 2x 1 2 11 Close the Front Cover 12 Close the Right Upper Cover 13 Close the Right Lower Cover Removing the Drum Un...

Page 340: ...pull only one of the grips 1 2 1 CAUTION Be sure to cover the removed Drum Unit 1 with 5 or more sheets of paper 2 to block light 1 2 Installing the Drum Unit Preparation 1 Pulling out the Process Unit Pulling out the Process Unit on page 317 2 Removing the Drum Unit Removing the Drum Unit on page 325 4 Disassembly Assembly 326 ...

Page 341: ...r to the following NOTE when installing the Drum at the Bk position CAUTION Be sure to install it straight from above Installing it from an oblique direction may cause damage to the shutter 1 Hold the grips 1 and install it straight from above 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 327 ...

Page 342: ...below to prevent the rail 1 from being damaged 1 1 2 2 3 Hold down each of the 8 grips 1 lightly with a finger to check that the Drum Units 2 are installed properly 1 2 CAUTION Actions after Replacement Actions after Parts Replacement on page 436 Removing the Developing Unit Preparation 1 Pulling out the Process Unit Pulling out the Process Unit on page 317 2 Removing the Drum Unit Removing the Dr...

Page 343: ...e same procedure to remove the Developing Units for Y M and C CAUTION Be sure not to touch the Developing Cylinder during installation removal 1 Free the harness 2 from the 2 Harness Guides 1 and disconnect the connector 3 2x 1x 2 3 1 2 Remove the Stepped Screw 1 1x 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 329 ...

Page 344: ...Developing Unit into the holes 2 of the Process Unit and insert the 2 pins 3 of the stopper in the holes 4 of the Developing Unit when assembling 3 4 2 1 CAUTION Be careful not to damage the contact point of the drum on the host machine side when installing the Developing Unit 4 Disassembly Assembly 330 ...

Page 345: ...t the Process Unit Pulling out the Process Unit on page 317 2 Removing the Drum Unit Removing the Drum Unit on page 325 Procedure 1 Install the Developing Unit to the Process Unit in the reverse order of Removing the Developing Unit 4 Disassembly Assembly 331 ...

Page 346: ... hold down the top of each Developing Unit If the Developing Unit is held down insufficiently the cover may get loose when pulling out the seal CAUTION When removing the Developing Unit Seal slowly lift it up in the vertical direction Lifting the Developing Unit Seal in an oblique direction applies stress on the seal which can cause the seal to tear 4 Disassembly Assembly 332 ...

Page 347: ...ng Unit is properly installed Be sure not to touch the Developing Cylinder during the work CAUTION Be careful not to damage the contact point of the drum on the host machine side when installing the Developing Unit 3 Follow Installing the Drum Unit to install the Drum Unit of each color CAUTION Actions after Replacement Actions after Parts Replacement on page 436 Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit...

Page 348: ...ocess Unit Shutter Lever 1 1 E ring 2 1 Parallel Pin 3 1 2 3 2 Remove the Process Unit Front Cover 1 3 Screws 2 2 Claws 3 2x 3 1 2 3x 3 Remove the Waste Toner Feed Unit Upper Cover 1 4 Screws 2 4x 2 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 334 ...

Page 349: ...nectors from the PCB 6 Connectors 1 2 Wire Saddles 2 1 Harness Guide 3 3x 6x 1 3 1 2 5 Remove the Frame Front Holder 1 5 Screws 2 5x 1 2 2 6 Remove the Waste Toner Feed Motor 1 2 Screws 2 2 2 2x 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 335 ...

Page 350: ...3 1 Hook 4 4 Bosses 5 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 5 5 4 2x CAUTION When installing the Shutter Cover check that the hook 1 on the back side is hooked to the plate 2 and that the Shutter Cam Link 3 is joined to the Shutter Cam 4 3 4 1 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 336 ...

Page 351: ...er Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit Preparation 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover 1 2 1 2 Procedure CAUTION Do not touch the surface of the Secondary Transfer Roller 1 1 1 Place paper where the Secondary Transfer Roller Unit is to be placed 4 Disassembly Assembly 337 ...

Page 352: ...2 1 2 1x 3 Hold the claws 1 of the Shaft Support Holder on both sides and remove the Secondary Transfer Roller Unit 2 4 Claws 1 4x 1 2 4 Remove the Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit 1 1 Bushing 2 2 Springs 3 1 3 3 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 338 ...

Page 353: ...ansfer Roller Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit on page 337 Procedure CAUTION Do not touch the surface of the Secondary Transfer Roller 1 Install the Secondary Transfer Roller with its longer shaft 1 on the hole side 2 of the Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit 1 2 CAUTION After installing the Secondary Transfer Roller be sure to check that the Shaft Support Holders rotate 2 Fit the pr...

Page 354: ... not installed askew 1 1 4 Align the protrusions 1 on the Shaft Support Holders of the Secondary Transfer Roller Unit with the springs 2 on the side of the Duplex Unit and install them alternately one side at a time 1 2 5 Install the stopper CAUTION Actions after Replacement Actions after Parts Replacement on page 435 4 Disassembly Assembly 340 ...

Page 355: ...Unit for about 5cm in advance will make installation of the Main Drive Unit easier 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover 2 Remove the Right Rear Cover 3 Remove the Left Rear Cover 4 Remove the Connector Cover 1 Screw 1 2 7 4 6 3 4 Disassembly Assembly 341 ...

Page 356: ...nectors 1 4 Harness Guides 2 4x 5x 1 2 2 2 1 6 Remove the Rear Lower Cover 2 Screws RS Tightening M4 1 Claw 1 Hook 7 Remove the Rear Upper Cover 1 Rubber Cap 4 Screws Binding M3 1 Claw Procedure 1 Open the Controller Box 1 2 Screws 2 2x 2 2 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 342 ...

Page 357: ...sure to hook up the harness 1 freed in step 2 to the 2 hooks 2 2x 2 2 1 1 1 2 Open the Feed Drum Driver PCB 1 11 Wire Saddles 2 11 Connectors 3 2 Screws 4 2x 3 3 1 11x 1x 11x 2 2 2 4 2 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 343 ...

Page 358: ...lay PCB 1 1 Fan Relay Connector 2 1 Edge Saddle 3 2 Wire Saddles 4 3 Connectors 5 1 Screw 6 Binding M4 1x 3 4 4 5 5 5 6 1 3x 3x 2 4 Remove the Fan Duct 1 2 Screws 2 1 Claw 3 2x 3 1 2 2 1x 4 Disassembly Assembly 344 ...

Page 359: ...of the host machine and fit the 4 couplings 3 into the holes 4 of the host machine when installing At this time pulling out the Process Unit for about 5cm will make installation easier 1 1 2 2 3 4 CAUTION When replacing the Drum Motor M1 1 M4 2 replace it with the Process Unit installed to prevent phase shift 2 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 345 ...

Page 360: ...ving the Process Unit Removing the Process Unit on page 320 Procedure 1 Pull up the Control Panel 1 and remove the Right Front Cover 2 1 Screw 3 to remove 1 Screw 4 to loosen 1 Claw 5 1x 1x 1 2 3 4 5 2 Open the Toner Replacement Cover 1 and remove the Small Plate 2 1 Screw 3 P Tightening 1x 1 2 3 4 Disassembly Assembly 346 ...

Page 361: ...e the Right Upper Cover 1 1 Screw 2 P Tightening 1 Screw 3 RS Tightening 2x 1 2 3 4 Remove the Front Upper Right Cover 1 1 5 Remove the Inner Delivery Cover Left Rear 1 1 Boss 2 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 347 ...

Page 362: ...6 Remove the Delivery Tray 1 4 Hooks 2 2 Protrusions 3 1 2 3 7 Remove the Inner Delivery Cover Left 1 4 Hooks 2 2 1 8 Remove the Inner Delivery Middle Cover 1 2 Bosses 2 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 348 ...

Page 363: ... Screws 3 4x 2x 1 3 3 2 Removing the Hopper Unit M Preparation 1 Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 2 Removing the Toner Container Front Inner Cover Removing the Toner Container Front Inner Cover on page 346 Procedure 1 Remove the Toner Tray 1 1 Screw 2 Binding M4 5 Hooks 3 1x 1 2 3 4 Disassembly Assembly 349 ...

Page 364: ... scattering of toner inside the hopper 1 2 CAUTION When installing the Toner Tray be sure to align the Rod Lever 1 with the Toner Cover Open Close Rod Lever 2 1 2 CAUTION When installing the removed Toner Container do not shake it CAUTION When removing the Main Drive Unit simultaneously install the Main Drive Unit and Hopper Unit in that order Toner supply failure may occur 4 Disassembly Assembly ...

Page 365: ... Cover 2 Removing the Toner Container Front Inner Cover Removing the Toner Container Front Inner Cover on page 346 3 Remove the Left Cover Procedure 1 Remove the Hopper Stay 1 1 Screw 2 1 2 1x CAUTION When removing the Hopper Upper Stay be sure not to bend the A part A 4 Disassembly Assembly 351 ...

Page 366: ...2 Remove the Rail Retainer Plate 1 3 Screws 2 2 2 3x 1 3 Remove the Left Middle Stay 1 4 Screws 2 2 4x 1 2 4 Remove the Toner Tray 1 1 Screw 2 5 Hooks 3 1 2 1x 3 3 4 Disassembly Assembly 352 ...

Page 367: ...t scattering of toner inside the hopper 1 2 CAUTION When installing the Toner Tray be sure to align the Rod Lever 1 with the Toner Cover Open Close Rod Lever 2 1 2 CAUTION When installing the removed Toner Container do not shake it CAUTION When removing the Main Drive Unit simultaneously install the Main Drive Unit and Hopper Unit in that order Toner supply failure may occur 4 Disassembly Assembly...

Page 368: ...g the Toner Container Front Inner Cover Removing the Toner Container Front Inner Cover on page 346 Procedure 1 While opening the guide remove the Hopper Upper Stay 1 1 Screw 2 RS Tightening 2 Hooks 3 1 3 1x 2 CAUTION When removing the Hopper Upper Stay be sure not to bend the A part A 4 Disassembly Assembly 354 ...

Page 369: ...2 Remove the Rail Retainer Plate 1 3 Screws 2 Binding M4 1 3x 2 3 Remove the Toner Tray 1 1 Screw 2 Binding M4 5 Hooks 3 1 2 3 1x 3 4 Disassembly Assembly 355 ...

Page 370: ...t scattering of toner inside the hopper 1 2 CAUTION When installing the Toner Tray be sure to align the Rod Lever 1 with the Toner Cover Open Close Rod Lever 2 1 2 CAUTION When installing the removed Toner Container do not shake it CAUTION When removing the Main Drive Unit simultaneously install the Main Drive Unit and Hopper Unit in that order Toner supply failure may occur 4 Disassembly Assembly...

Page 371: ...over 2 Removing the Toner Container Front Inner Cover Removing the Toner Container Front Inner Cover on page 346 3 Removing the Hopper Unit C Removing the Hopper Unit C on page 354 Procedure 1 Remove the Toner Tray 1 for Bk only 1 Screw 2 Binding M4 5 Claws 3 1x 1 2 3 3 3 4 Disassembly Assembly 357 ...

Page 372: ...he Hopper Unit 1 on its side on paper 2 as shown in the figure below to prevent scattering of toner inside the hopper 1 2 CAUTION When installing the Toner Tray be sure to align the Rod Lever 1 with the Toner Cover Open Close Rod Lever 2 1 2 CAUTION When installing the removed Toner Container do not shake it 4 Disassembly Assembly 358 ...

Page 373: ...CAUTION When removing the Main Drive Unit simultaneously install the Main Drive Unit and Hopper Unit in that order Toner supply failure may occur 4 Disassembly Assembly 359 ...

Page 374: ...nit Preparation 1 Open the Right Lower Cover 1 and the Right Upper Cover 2 1 2 1 2 Procedure 1 Open the Fixing Rail 1 and loosen the 5 screws 2 5x 1 1 2 2 2 2 Hold the tabs 2 and pull out the Fixing Unit 1 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 360 ...

Page 375: ...oise from the Fixing Gear or E009 may occur In such case remove and then install the Fixing Unit again Removing the Film Unit Preparation 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover 2 Removing the Fixing Unit Removing the Fixing Unit on page 360 Procedure CAUTION Be sure not to touch the Film Unit or the Pressure Roller during installation removal 1 Change the direction of the Fixing Un...

Page 376: ...1 Screw 3 1 2 3 1x 3 Free the harness 4 Connectors 1 Harness Guide A 4 Wire Saddles 2 4x 5x 1 1 2 B 2 1 A 4 Turn over the Shutter Unit 1 so that it does not disturb the work 4 Screws 2 4x 1 2 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 362 ...

Page 377: ...you leave the Fixing Unit for a long time rotate the Pressure Gear 1 by hand and make the Pressure Roller disengaged Do not leave the Fixing Unit with the Pressure Roller engaged for a long time ຍᅽࣟ ࣛ ែ 1 6 Open the left and right Pressure Levers 1 2 Screws 2 2x 1 1 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 363 ...

Page 378: ...late 1 on the front side 1 Screw 2 1x 1 2 8 Free the harness from the Harness Guide A and remove the Film Unit 1 1 A 2x 9 Remove the Separation Guide 2 from the Film Unit 1 2 Leaf Springs 3 1 2 3 3 4 Disassembly Assembly 364 ...

Page 379: ... The Fixing Separation Guide is installed in opposite direction Checking method After installing the Fixing Separation Guide swing the guide with your finger If it is installed properly it is stable If not it becomes wobbly When installing the Leaf Spring while the guide is not installed properly the spring will be expanded awkwardly Cleaning the Fixing Shutter Cover Preparation 1 Open the Right L...

Page 380: ...r Cover and the Right Upper Cover 2 Removing the Fixing Unit Removing the Fixing Unit on page 360 Procedure CAUTION Be sure not to touch the Film Unit or the Pressure Roller during installation removal 1 Change the direction of the Fixing Unit Place it so that the Drawer Connector 1 is on the top side 2 Remove the PCB 2 1 Screw 3 1 2 3 1x 4 Disassembly Assembly 366 ...

Page 381: ...r Unit 1 4 Screws 2 4x 1 2 2 5 Clean the Fixing Separation Guide 2 with lint free paper 1 moistened with alcohol 1 2 Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide Preparation 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover 2 Removing the Fixing Unit Removing the Fixing Unit on page 360 4 Disassembly Assembly 367 ...

Page 382: ...Preparation 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover 2 Removing the Fixing Unit Removing the Fixing Unit on page 360 3 Removing the Film Unit Removing the Film Unit on page 361 Procedure CAUTION Be sure not to touch the Pressure Roller during installation removal 1 Remove the Fixing Inlet Guide 1 1 Screw 2 3 Hooks 3 1x 1 3 3 2 CAUTION At the time of installation be sure to fit the 3 ...

Page 383: ...hickness between the roller and the Fixing Delivery Lower Guide to create clearance between the Inner Delivery Guide 3 and the Pressure Roller 1 5mmཌ 1 2 3 1 2 A 3 3 Remove the E ring 1 and then remove the 27T Gear 2 1 2 4 Lift up the right side of the Pressure Roller Unit 1 and remove it 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 369 ...

Page 384: ... Pressure Roller Unit Just apply a thin layer in the circumferential direction Grease that can be used CK 8102 HP300 QY 0035 HP300 and FY9 6036 SE1107 Grease 20 mg within 5 0 mm Grease 20 mg Never apply grease to the surface of the Fixing Pressure Roller Do not use grease other than those above This unit is dedicated to iR ADV C5500 series This cannot be used for iR ADV C5200 C5000 series Removing...

Page 385: ... Procedure 1 Remove the E ring 1 and then remove the 27T Gear 2 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 371 ...

Page 386: ...e Secondary Transfer Guide Preparation 1 Open the Right Lower Cover 1 and the Right Upper Cover 2 1 2 1 2 Procedure 1 Clean the Secondary Transfer Guide 2 with lint free paper 1 moistened with alcohol 2 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 372 ...

Page 387: ...er 1 and the Right Upper Cover 2 1 2 1 2 Procedure 1 Clean the Feed Contact Guide 2 with lint free paper 1 moistened with alcohol 1 2 Cleaning the Registration Roller Preparation 1 Open the Right Lower Cover 1 and the Right Upper Cover 2 1 2 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 373 ...

Page 388: ...h alcohol 2 1 2 Clean the Registration Roller 2 on the outer side with lint free paper 1 moistened with alcohol 2 1 Cleaning the Pre registration Guide Unit Preparation 1 Open the Right Lower Cover 1 and the Right Upper Cover 2 1 2 1 2 Procedure CAUTION Do not soil the ITB 4 Disassembly Assembly 374 ...

Page 389: ...th lint free paper 1 moistened with alcohol 2 1 3 2 Clean the outside of the Pre registration Guide 2 area covered by black sheet with lint free paper 1 moistened with alcohol 2 1 Cleaning the Registration Sensor Preparation 1 Open the Right Lower Cover 1 and the Right Upper Cover 2 1 2 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 375 ...

Page 390: ...t free paper 2 moistened with water 2 1 2 Clean the prism 1 in a single direction with lint free paper 2 moistened with water 2 1 Cleaning the Between Cassette 1 2 Sensor Preparation 1 Open the Right Lower Cover 1 and the Right Upper Cover 2 1 2 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 376 ...

Page 391: ...e front side and rear side and disengage the Arm 2 1 2 1 2 2 Remove the wire 1 from the machine and further open the Right Lower Cover 2 1 2 3 Clean the Between Cassette 1 2 Sensor 1 with dry lint free paper 2 2 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 377 ...

Page 392: ...er Cover 2 1 2 1 2 Procedure 1 Open the Fixing Delivery Guide 2 Clean the Fixing Delivery Guide 2 on the inner side with lint free paper 1 moistened with alcohol 2 1 3 Clean the Fixing Delivery Guide 2 on the outer side with lint free paper 1 moistened with alcohol 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 378 ...

Page 393: ...pper Cover 2 1 2 1 2 Procedure 1 Open the Fixing Delivery Guide 2 Clean the Fixing Rear Roller 2 on the inner side with lint free paper 1 moistened with alcohol 1 2 3 Clean the Fixing Rear Roller 2 on the outer side with lint free paper 1 moistened with alcohol 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 379 ...

Page 394: ...er Cover 2 1 2 1 2 Procedure 1 Open the Fixing Delivery Guide 2 Clean the Fixing Delivery Roller 2 on the inner side with lint free paper 1 moistened with alcohol 1 2 3 Clean the Fixing Delivery Roller 2 on the outer side with lint free paper 1 moistened with alcohol 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 380 ...

Page 395: ...r Rollers Preparation 1 Open the Right Lower Cover 1 and the Right Upper Cover 2 1 2 1 2 Procedure 1 Clean the Duplex Feed Upper Roller 2 and Roller 3 with lint free paper 1 moistened with alcohol 1 2 1 3 4 Disassembly Assembly 381 ...

Page 396: ...r Roller Preparation 1 Open the Right Lower Cover 1 and the Right Upper Cover 2 1 2 1 2 Procedure 1 Clean the Duplex Feed Lower Roller 2 and Roller 3 with lint free paper 1 moistened with alcohol 1 2 1 3 4 Disassembly Assembly 382 ...

Page 397: ...Cleaning the Second Third Delivery Roller Roller and First Second and Third Delivery Rollers Preparation 1 Open the Right Lower Cover 1 and the Right Upper Cover 2 1 2 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 383 ...

Page 398: ...Procedure 1 Clean the Second Third Delivery Roller 2 Roller 3 First Delivery Roller 4 and Second Delivery Roller 5 with lint free paper 1 moistened with alcohol 2 1 3 1 1 4 1 5 4 Disassembly Assembly 384 ...

Page 399: ...e Third Delivery Roller 2 with lint free paper 1 moistened with alcohol 1 2 Removing the Right Rear Cover 1 Procedure 1 Open the Right Lower Cover 1 and the Right Upper Cover 2 1 2 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 385 ...

Page 400: ...2 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 1 Screw RS Tightening M4 2 Screws TP M3 1 Claw 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 386 ...

Page 401: ...Removing the Front Right Cover Procedure 1 Remove the Front Right Cover 1 1 Rubber Cap 1 Screw to remove 1 Screw to loosen 1 Claw 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 387 ...

Page 402: ...over 1 Removing the Right Rear Cover 1 on page 385 2 Removing the Front Right Cover Removing the Front Right Cover on page 387 3 Removing the Reverse Backend Guide and Inner Output Cover Removing the Reverse Backend Guide and Inner Output Cover on page 388 Procedure 1 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and remove the 4 Wire Saddles 2 4x 2x 1 2 2 2 Open the Toner Replacement Cover 1 1 and the Front Cove...

Page 403: ... 4 2 5 3 2x 4 Remove the Second Third Delivery Unit 1 4 Screws 2 4x 2 2 1 CAUTION After installing the Second Third Delivery Unit 1 be sure to check that the Sensor Flag 2 works Second Delivery Sensor 3 Refer to I O DC CON P023 9 1 2 3 4 Disassembly Assembly 389 ...

Page 404: ...ving the Front Right Cover Procedure on page 387 4 Removing the Reverse Backend Guide and Inner Output Cover Procedure on page 388 5 Removing the Second Third Delivery Unit Removing the Second Third Delivery Unit on page 388 Procedure 1 Remove the Right Upper Cover Latch 1 2 Screws 2 2 Remove the Right Lower Cover Latch 3 2 Screws 4 1 2 2 3 4 4 4x 4 Disassembly Assembly 390 ...

Page 405: ...3 Open the Fixing Unit 1 and remove the Fixing Gear Cover 2 1 Screw 3 1x 1 2 3 4 Disassembly Assembly 391 ...

Page 406: ... First Delivery Sensor 1 and First Delivery Tray Full Sensor 2 with the Sensor Flags 3 1 2 3 3 CAUTION After installing the First Delivery Unit check that the 2 Sensor Flags 1 work First Delivery Sensor 2 Refer to I O DC CON P026 12 First Delivery Tray Full Sensor 3 Refer to I O DC CON P032 0 1 1 1 2 3 4 Disassembly Assembly 392 ...

Page 407: ...er Cover 1 and the Right Upper Cover 2 1 2 1 2 Procedure 1 Remove the Front Cover 1 of the Right Unit 1 Screw 2 1 Claw 3 2 3 1x 1x 1 2 Free the harness 1 1 Screw 2 1 Grounding Wire 3 1 Wire Saddle 4 2 Connectors 5 2x 1x 1x 2 4 5 3 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 393 ...

Page 408: ... Unit as the Right Door Rotation Hinge 1 and spring 2 easily become disassembled 1 2 Removing the Multi purpose Tray Feed Separation Roller Procedure 1 Open the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Tray 2 Let the shutter 2 escape upwards by pushing down the MP Pickup Roller 1 2 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 394 ...

Page 409: ...the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller Cover 1 1 Hook 2 3 Claws 3 3x 2 3 1 3 4 Remove the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller 1 and the Feed Roller 2 1 2 5 Remove the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller Guide 1 1 Hook 2 1 2 4 Disassembly Assembly 395 ...

Page 410: ...rom the shaft with the shaft as the center 1 NOTE If you have accidentally removed the shaft together with the roller install it from the front side NOTE Parts counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 M PU RL M SP RL M FD RL 4 Disassembly Assembly 396 ...

Page 411: ... Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller Cover be sure to align 2 with the 3 bosses and 1 claw after aligning 1 with the boss 3 In order to prevent jams check that the Shutter Link Lever 1 is under the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller 2 1 2 Removing the Pickup Delivery Separation Roller Cassette 1 2 Preparation 1 Open the Cassette Right Upper Cover 2 Remove the cassette each paper source 4 Disassembly As...

Page 412: ...ter Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Service Mode COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 C1 FD RL Service Mode COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 C2 FD RL Separation Roller parts counter Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Service Mode COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 C1 SP RL Service Mode COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 C2 SP RL Removing the Right Door Preparation 1 Pull out the Cassette 1 and Cassette 2 2 Open the Right Front Cover 3 Open the Right Lower Cover 4 Open th...

Page 413: ... 2 3 4 5 1 Procedure 1 Free the harness 1 1 Connector 2 2 Reuse Bands 3 1 Wire Saddle 4 3x 1x 1 2 3 4 4 Disassembly Assembly 399 ...

Page 414: ... 2 Fixation Members 1 toward the front 2 Screws 2 2 Protrusions 3 2x 1 2 2 3 3 1 3 Remove the 2 E rings 1 on the front side and rear side 1 1 4 Remove the wire 1 from the host machine 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 400 ...

Page 415: ...Right Door 1 1 CAUTION The Right Door 1 is heavy so be careful not to drop it when removing it 1 Removing the Cassette 1 2 Pickup Unit Preparation 1 Pull out the Cassettes 1 and 2 2 Removing the Right Lower Cover Removing the Right Door on page 398 4 Disassembly Assembly 401 ...

Page 416: ... Procedure 1 Remove the Connector Cover 1 2 Screws 2 1 2 2 2x 4 Disassembly Assembly 402 ...

Page 417: ... RS Tightening M4 4x 1 2x 2 3 3 CAUTION When installing the Pickup Unit provided as a service part if it has the Fixation Member 1 attached as shown in the figure below remove it before work In case the Pickup Unit provided as a service part is not used keep the unit with the Fixation Member 1 installed to the original position 1 Removing the Transparency Sensor Registration Sensor Preparation 1 P...

Page 418: ... front side and rear side and disengage the Arm 2 1 2 1 2 2 Remove the wire 1 from the machine and further open the Right Lower Cover 2 1 2 3 Remove the Pre registration Guide 1 4 Screws 2 2 Protrusions 3 4x 3 2 2 1 4 Disassembly Assembly 404 ...

Page 419: ...ws 1 Connector Transparency Sensor 2 5 Claws 1 Connector 1 2 4 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 of the sensor 5 Turn over the holder 2 1 Screw 3 1 Boss 4 2 Hooks 5 6 Release the claws 6 of each sensor and remove the Transparency Sensor and Registration Sensor 1x 2 1 1 3 4 9x 5 2x 6 4 Disassembly Assembly 405 ...

Page 420: ...Adjustment 5 Pickup Feed System 407 Original Exposure System 415 Actions at Parts Replacement 428 ...

Page 421: ...PIER TEST PG TYPE 5 COLOR K 1 COLOR Y 0 COLOR M 0 COLOR C 0 2 SIDE 1 PG PICK each paper source CAUTION At 2 sided printing paper is output with the 1st side facing up and 2nd side facing down When checking the leading edge margin on the 1st side check the up side of paper and check the margin on the rear side with respect to the feed direction CAUTION When it is out of the specified range perform ...

Page 422: ...Loosen the Fixation Screw 1x 4 Move the Adjustment Plate left or right according to the scale 1 value checked in step 2 As the Adjustment Plate is moved toward the left of the machine by 1 tooth 2 the left edge margin is increased by 0 5 mm 1 2 5 Adjustment 408 ...

Page 423: ... the cassettes adjust it by loosening the 2 screws on the side 1x 1x 6 Pull out the next upper cassette and check that the Adjustment Plate is correctly pushed against the frame CAUTION If the Adjustment Plate is not correctly pushed against the frame image cannot be correctly adjusted When checking Cassette 3 the Between cassette Cover needs to be removed 5 Adjustment 409 ...

Page 424: ...e ADJ C4RE Cassette 4 back side ADJ MF Multi purpose Tray front side ADJ MFRE Multi purpose Tray back side As the input value is changed by 1 the margin on the left edge of paper is changed by 0 1 mm 3 If the service mode setting value has been changed write down the new adjustment value on the service label Reference Standard value Leading edge 4 0 1 5 1 0 mm front side back side Left edge 2 5 1 ...

Page 425: ...ecause the amount of change differs depending on the paper types being used and individual variability Pre secondary transfer guide adjustment Adjustment is possible by loosening the screws as shown in the figure below and moving the Pre secondary Transfer Guide toward the inside of the machine The range which can be adjusted by this adjustment is maximum of approx 0 7 mm Differs according to the ...

Page 426: ...ment The range which can be adjusted by this adjustment is maximum of approx 0 3 mm Differs according to the paper type Symptom Operation Points to check The left side of the trailing edge of image is distorted Turn the screw counterclockwise The Adjustment Plate moves to the right The right side of the trailing edge of image is distorted Turn the screw clockwise The Adjustment Plate moves to the ...

Page 427: ... the screw located as shown in the figure below and moving the Adjustment Plate up and down Check the position of the Adjustment Plate before adjustment The range which can be adjusted by this adjustment is maximum of approx 0 3 mm Differs according to the paper type Symptom Operation The right side of the trailing edge of image is distorted Move the Adjustment Plate up The left side of the traili...

Page 428: ...nstalled Be sure to remove the Fixing Unit before making adjustments When the right side of the trailing edge of image is distorted Move the Adjustment Plate up Feed direction Loosen When the left side of the trailing edge of image is distorted Move the Adjustment Plate down Feed direction Loosen 5 Adjustment 414 ...

Page 429: ...ON SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration Service mode Lv 2 COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES NOTE When changing the service mode setting values it is recommended to back them up in the above service mode Performing backup makes the work easier when replacing the Reader Controller PCB etc Actions after Clearing the RAM of the Reader Controller PCB 1 Using SST download the latest system software R CON 2 Execute...

Page 430: ...FST P Y OFST P M OFST P C OFST P K FEEDER ADJUST LA SPEED LA SPD2 DOCST DOCST2 5 In the following service mode calculate the MTF filter coefficient Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC 6 In the following service mode calculate for matching paper front and back linearity Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF LNR 7 In the following service mode execute either AB or Inch configuration tray width ad...

Page 431: ...king the DADF opening angle wider 1 Turn over the cover and remove the Angle Guide Plate 4 Screws x4 Hinge Open Close Guide Plate Hinge Covers Hinge Open Close Guide Plate CAUTION After adjustment be sure to install the Angle Guide Plate Adjustment of the Tray Width Execute either AB configuration adjustment or Inch configuration adjustment for this adjustment AB Configuration Adjustment 1 Highlig...

Page 432: ...ide Guide with STMT LTRR LGL 6 Press the OK key and register the width of LTRR Height Adjustment Checking the Height 1 Close the ADF 2 Check that the 2 Height Adjustment Bosses 1 at the left front and rear side are in contact with the Stream Reading Glass 2 NOTE Checking becomes easier by lighting the LED using the following service mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC R SCANLAMP 2 1 3 If they are not in con...

Page 433: ...aper 2 on the place where the protrusions touch the Stream Reading Glass 1 and check whether there is any resistance of the paper when closing the ADF 1 2 2 If there is no resistance perform the height adjustment Adjustment procedure 1 Make adjustment by turning the Fixation Screw on the upper side of the Left Hinge If the front side is not installed properly Turn the screw clockwise black arrow I...

Page 434: ...ge Feed direction 3 Remove the ADF White Plate 1 4 Loosen the 4 Knurled Screws 1 at the front part of the Right and Left Hinge Unit 5 Rotate the screw 2 of the right hinge to move the Fixation Member A Less than 90 degrees Turn the screw counterclockwise A 90 degrees or more Turn the screw clockwise 1 2 1 6 After adjustment tighten the 4 Knurled Screws 7 Print the test chart again and check that t...

Page 435: ... white arrow 2 1 6 Tighten the screws after adjustment 7 Print the test chart again and check that it is at a right angle Adjustment of the Stream Reading 1 Execute the following service mode item COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL STRD POS Side registration adjustment NOTE There are two adjustment methods One for reading the front side Scanner Unit on the Reader side and another for reading the back side Sc...

Page 436: ...mage is displaced toward the front side Decrease the value by moving the image toward the rear side Amount of change per increment 0 1 mm Adjustment range 2 to 202 Default 102 5 Print the test chart again and check that the image is within the ranges of the standard Adjustment of the Paper Back Reading 1 Place a test chart facing down on the Document Pickup Tray and perform 2 sided print 2 Overlay...

Page 437: ...nto the test chart 3 Check that the leading edge of the printed image is within the standard range Standard range A 1 mm Feed direction Feed direction A A Leading edge of printed image Image leading edge of test chart Image leading edge of test chart Leading edge of printed image If the image is displaced toward trailing edge If the image is displaced toward leading edge 4 If it is not within the ...

Page 438: ...he leading edge Decrease the value by moving the image toward the trailing edge Amount of change per increment 0 1 mm Adjustment range 50 to 50 5 Print the test chart again and check that the image is within the ranges of the standard Magnification ratio adjustment NOTE There are two adjustment methods One for reading the front side Scanner Unit on the Reader side and another for reading the back ...

Page 439: ... making the stream reading of the original slower Amount of change per increment 0 1 Adjustment range 30 to 30 6 Print the test chart again and check that the image is within the ranges of the standard Adjustment of the Paper Back Reading 1 Place a test chart on the Copyboard Glass of the connected equipment and print This is called Print 1 2 Place a test chart facing down on the Document Pickup T...

Page 440: ...he white level adjustment using paper with smaller width adjustment may not be executed properly 2 Execute the service mode item COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL1 3 Remove the blank paper from the Copyboard Glass and place it on the Document Pickup Tray of ADF 4 Execute the service mode item COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL2 5 Place the blank paper on the Copyboard Glass again and close the ADF 6 Execute th...

Page 441: ...he following adjustments If the height is 19 cm or less Turn the hexagon wrench counterclockwise NOTE Service Tool Hexagon wrench 2 5 mm 1 4 Check that the height adjustment boss does not contact with the Stream Reading Glass after adjustment 5 Adjustment 427 ...

Page 442: ... ADJ MF A5R Service mode COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ MF A4R Service mode COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ MF MAX Service mode COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ MF MIN 3 Install the Wire Cover removed in step 1 4 Write down the service mode values entered in step 2 on the service label DC Controller PCB How to Replace the Parts Removing the DC Controller PCB on page 259 Processing before replacing the parts CAUTION When replac...

Page 443: ...ading of backup data fails before replacement due to the damage to the DC Controller PCB enter the values of service mode items recorded on the service label or P PRINT Control Panel CPU PCB When replacing the Control Panel KEY PCB Control Panel CPU PCB perform the following work Actions at Parts Replacement Sensitivity Calibration Perform the operation when replacing the Control Panel KEY PCB or ...

Page 444: ...arts Removing the HDD on page 252 Before Replacing 1 Back up the necessary data based on the table shown below 2 Printing the set registered data COPIER FUNCTION MISC P USER PRT COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT In case the backup fails print it out or export it to a USB Backup List Backup target data Backup Method User Service DCM Power OFF excluding DCM Address List Yes 1 Yes 9 Forwarding Settings ...

Page 445: ...mory RX Inbox Yes 4 Network Place Settings Yes 9 Yes 10 Web browser settings Web Access setting information Yes 8 Yes 9 MEAP settings MEAP application Yes 8 License files for MEAP applications Yes 5 Data saved using MEAP applications Yes 5 Yes 8 Yes 9 SMS Service Management Service password Yes 8 Universal data settings Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode Job l...

Page 446: ... Management Settings Data Management Import Export 3 Service mode top screen BACKUP 4 Web Service 10 The setting value that was set when the main power was turned OFF the last time is automatically backed up to the Flash PCB When a HDD is replaced with a new one the setting value is automatically inherited from the Flash PCB at the time of HDD formatting 11 iWEMC DAM plug in Aftter Replacement 1 H...

Page 447: ...the ITB Unit put the machine into a standby state 2 When the machine is in a standby state execute auto gradation adjustment Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation 3 After executing auto gradation adjustment see the alarm log to check that 10 0006 10 0007 10 0022 has not occurred When an alarm occurs perform a remedy according to the instruction of ...

Page 448: ...2 Remove the ITB Motor 1 4 Screws 3 1 Connector 2 4x 1x 3 Use the scale 0 5 mm at the location shown in the figure below as the reference when correcting the position 5 Adjustment 434 ...

Page 449: ...g it by 1 scale mark 0 5 mm changes the values of ITB POS and ITB POS2 by approx 250 After adjustment check that the values of the following service modes are both within a range of 350 to 350 Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY MISC ITB POS Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY MISC ITB POS2 3x Secondary Transfer Roller How to Replace the Parts Removing the Secondary Transfer Roller Secondary Transfer Separation G...

Page 450: ...ISET C Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET K 2 Execute auto gradation adjustment Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Patch Sensor How to Replace the Parts Removing the Registration Patch Sensor Front Middle Rear on page 288 Actions after Parts Replacement 1 Execute the following service mode to adjust the target value of S wave light inte...

Page 451: ...CH K10 DFCH2K10 MTF M1 MTF S1 MTF2 M1 MTF2 S1 MTF M2 MTF S2 MTF2 M2 MTF2 S2 MTF M3 MTF S3 MTF2 M3 MTF2 S3 MTF M4 MTF S4 MTF2 M4 MTF2 S4 MTF M5 MTF S5 MTF2 M5 MTF2 S5 MTF M6 MTF S6 MTF2 M6 MTF2 S6 MTF M7 MTF S7 MTF2 M7 MTF2 S7 MTF M8 MTF S8 MTF2 M8 MTF2 S8 MTF M9 MTF S9 MTF2 M9 MTF2 S9 MTF M10 MTF S10 MTF2 M10 MTF2 S10 MTF M11 MTF S11 MTF2 M11 MTF2 S11 MTF M12 MTF S12 MTF2 M12 MTF2 S12 COPIER ADJUS...

Page 452: ...WLVL4 5 Execute the following service mode to calculate the MTF filter coefficient Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC 6 Write down the following service mode values in the service label on the back of the Reader Front Cover Service Mode COPIER ADJUST CCD List of Service Mode Items to Write Down the Values on Service Labels Path for Service Modes Service Mode Items to Write Down the Values on...

Page 453: ...COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT Y Service Mode COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT Z W PLT X W PLT Y W PLT Z 2 Adjust the shading position Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL RDSHDPOS 3 Set the target value of B W shading Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD BW TGT 4 Adjust the white level Prepare a sheet of A3 or 11x17 size paper 1 Place the paper on the Copyboard Glass Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL1 2 Place...

Page 454: ...Troubleshooting 6 Initial Check 441 Test Print 442 Troubleshooting Items 447 Controller Self Diagnosis 452 Debug Log 459 ...

Page 455: ...ins connected to the power outlet Checking the Paper 7 The paper is of a recommended type 8 The paper is not moist Try paper fresh out of package Checking the Place ment of Paper 9 Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the paper is not in excess of a specifi c level 10 If a transparency is used check to make sure that it is placed in the correct orientation in the manual feed tray ...

Page 456: ...y at the Front Rea Right Angle Straight Lines Color dis place ment 0 Normal copy print 1 to 3 For R D 4 16 gra dations Yes Yes Yes Yes Main control ler PCB 5 Full half tone Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Main control ler PCB 6 Grid Yes Yes Yes Main control ler PCB 7 to 9 For R D 10 MCYBk horizon tal stripes sub scanning direc tion Yes Yes Yes Main control ler PCB 11 For R D 12 64 gra dation Yes Yes Yes Main ...

Page 457: ... density gradation is properly reproduced Failure of Drum Unit end of life Failure of Laser Scanner Unit Fogging Check that fogging occurs on white image area only Failure of Drum Unit end of life Failure of Laser Scanner Unit White line Check that white line does not appear on entire image Failure of Developing Assembly Uneven density at front rear Check that uneven density does not appear at fro...

Page 458: ...pitch Check that uneven pitch does not appear on entire image Failure of Photosensitive Drum approx 94mm Failure of Developing Cylinder approx 94mm Uneven density Check that uneven density does not appear on entire image Dirt on Dustproof Glass Deterioration of ITB Grid TYPE 6 This test print is for mainly checking the color displacement right angle accuracy and straight line accuracy Check items ...

Page 459: ... appear on solid area of each color Scratch on Photosensitive Drum Dirt on Primary Charging Roller White line Check that white line does not appear on solid area of each color Failure of ITB Unit Failure of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Dirt on Laser Light Path 64 gradations TYPE 12 This test print is for mainly checking the gradations of YMCBk single color at one time Check item Check method As...

Page 460: ...MCBk singe color and fogging Check item Check method Assumed cause Gradation Check that 64 gradations density is properly reproduced in each color Failure of Drum Unit end of life Failure of Laser Scanner Unit Fogging Check that fogging appears on white image area only Failure of Drum Unit end of life Failure of Laser Scanner Unit Gray balance Check that density is even in each color on gray scale...

Page 461: ...s deteriorated and resin part may be scraped This causes the paper leading edge to be caught by the scraped rib when it enters the Fixing Inlet Guide generating a slack in the paper and causing wrinkles in the paper and jams Condition When making 2 sided copies of solid image continuously in high temperature amp high humidity environment Field Remedy 1 Clean the Fixing Inlet Guide and the Shutter ...

Page 462: ... product message is displayed even though Canon made toner drums and Fixing Units are used Remedy Perform a remedy according to the instruction of the alarm 1 Toner Bottle Alarm code At the same time 10 0091 0094 occurs 2 Drum Unit Alarm code At the same time 09 0010 0013 occurs 6 Troubleshooting 448 ...

Page 463: ...ibly stop the paper at a specified position Next time a job occurs the paper is forcibly stopped at the stop position leading edge shown in the figure 42 30 31 99 32 33 71 70 40 1 20 21 Use case When bent paper skew wrinkles occur When jam occurs frequently When checking an image on the ITB 6 Troubleshooting 449 ...

Page 464: ...ER TEST PG 2 SIDE COPIER TEST PG COLOR Y COPIER TEST PG COLOR M COPIER TEST PG COLOR C COPIER TEST PG COLOR K COPIER TEST PG DENS Y COPIER TEST PG DENS M COPIER TEST PG DENS C COPIER TEST PG DENS K COPIER TEST PG F M SW Stop positions and check items Items that can be checked differ depending on the position where paper stops Check for fold skew crease operation check jam checking of image on ITB ...

Page 465: ...livery 1 Yes Yes 70 Reverse Mouth 2 Yes Yes Yes 71 Duplex standby position 2 Yes Yes Yes 99 Inlet of the Fixing Assembly 1st side for checking image Yes 1 Paper may not be stopped depending on the delivery destination setting 2 Paper is stopped after being reversed for a 2 sided job 6 Troubleshooting 451 ...

Page 466: ...B PCBs and units diagnosed by the tool are as follow Main Controller PCB HDD TPM PCB Riser PCB Flash PCB Counter Memory PCB Open I F PCB Option Overview This machine has an error diagnosis tool that is stored in the location shown below Reader HDD DC Controler PCB Option Option All night Non allnight Power Supply Operation panel Flash PCB Controller system failure diagnosis tool Main Controller PC...

Page 467: ...DD Option Counter Memory PCB Open I F PCB option Main Controller PCB J1 TPM J11 FLASH J6000 J21 CC VI J20 CARD J18 J5 USB H USB D LAN J3 J7 J13 Voice OP J15 FAN J6001 Image Analysis PCB J2040 J2010 HDD J2020 HDD J2000 J1020 Riser J1050 J1010 Terminal Board Counter Internal I F External I F 6 Troubleshooting 453 ...

Page 468: ...or Diagnosis Tool Take an action appropriate for the error No Yes No Yes Basic Check Items 1 Check if the Power Supply Plug is disconnected 2 Check if the Connection Cable between the Riser PCB and Control Panel is disconnected 3 Check if the Main Controller PCB is correctly connected to the Riser PCB 4 Check the all night power supply connection Replace the non all night power supply if it cannot...

Page 469: ...y the regular Startup screen is displayed In this case perform the following remedy Turn OFF the Main Power Switch again and execute steps 1 and 2 shown above If this tool still does not boot it means that BCT Box Checker Test is deleted so install BCT If BCT is not installed correctly is displayed in Service Mode BCT in the host machine COPIER DISPLAY VERSION BCT Diagnosis Result Diagnosis Time D...

Page 470: ...ard Controller System Error Diagnosis Table The error locations are identified according to the following table Test name Detailed test name Presumed failure loca tion Remedy Relevant Er ror Code SN 1 MN DDR3 SDRAM Check the SDRAM of the Main Controller PCB Main Controller PCB Replacement of the Main Controller PCB SN 2 SM BUS MN DDR3 On Board Check the circuit in the Main Controller PCB Main Cont...

Page 471: ...ace the Open I F PCB 3 Replace the Main Controller PCB Remarks NO is displayed when the Open I F PCB is not installed SN 19 GU BUS Check the connection between the Main Con troller PCB and Open I F PCB Main Controller PCB Open I F PCB 1 Check the connection of the Open I F PCB 2 Replace the Open I F PCB 3 Replace the Main Controller PCB Remarks NO is displayed when the Open I F PCB is not installe...

Page 472: ...osing customer data c6 Uncorrectable Sector Count 0000000000000 Number of defective sectors uncorrect able sectors which do not allow alter native processing If a numeric value apart from 0000000000000 is displayed backup is recommended to avoid losing customer data Replace the HDD Alarm 31 0008 may have occurred in the Host Machine NOTE Response when the HDD mirroring kit is installed in the Host...

Page 473: ... to a USB Device with Counter Key Numeric Key Ask the user to make a note of the date and time when the problem occurred and the procedure If the user notifies the log has been saved collect the log The DEBUG PCB ASS Y Board may need to be installed to obtain the log depending on the problem refer to Flow of Determining the Procedure for Obtaining Logs on page 460 NOTE The DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS Y Boa...

Page 474: ...Obtaining Logs Case Details of Problem DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS Y Board Procedure for Obtaining Logs Case A Problem that repeats re start Necessary 1 Install the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS Y Board 2 Save the log in the HDD immediately after restart 3 Collect the log from the HDD with SST etc Case B Problem causing the Con trol Panel to be locked Necessary 1 Install the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS Y Board 2 Turn OFF and ...

Page 475: ...MB Therefore it is recommended that you use a USB device with 1 GB or more space The USB device must be formatted with the FAT file system Exporting to a PC PC with SST installed Network connection cable When exporting debug logs to a PC a PC with SST installed and a network connection cable are required Common DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS Y Board Only when determined to be required by the above Flow of Det...

Page 476: ...ocedure refer to Saving to a PC using SST Method 3 Start the machine in download mode and transfer the debug logs to a computer connected to the network using SST For details on the procedure refer to Saving to a USB device using service mode Method 5 Execute the following service mode to save the debug logs to a USB flash drive recognized by the machine Level2 COPIER Function DBG LOG LOG2USB For ...

Page 477: ...ave area but cannot obtain the latest log archive To obtain the latest logs it is recommended that you refer to Flow of Determining the Procedure for Obtaining Logs to save collect logs to a USB flash drive Operation Storage destination Collected logs Manual logs Automatic logs Continuous logs Operation in download mode USB flash drive 1 Operation Procedure 1 Start the machine in download mode Exe...

Page 478: ...to the auto save area If a USB flash drive has been connected to the machine in advance the log archives saved in the auto save area are saved to the USB flash drive Since this operation can obtain the log archives current as of the operation logs useful for analysis can be obtained by performing this operation while reproducing the problem Log Log Log Log Log 㻹㼛㼐㼡㼘㼑 㻹㼛㼐㼡㼘㼑 㻹㼛㼐㼡㼘㼑 㼀㼔㼕㼟㻌㼙㼍㼏㼔㼕㼚㼑 㼀㼔㼕...

Page 479: ...ine Status Display on the Control Panel During a log collection processing Storing system information is displayed on the status line The message disappears once the log collection processing is complete When the log has been collected with a USB memory device connected a message a memory media is connected is displayed When holding down the counter 1 2 3 while an error code is shown the message S...

Page 480: ...sults in blank option items for data to upload When the file name is longer than the frame it displays that it is a log in the comment column just below It is displayed as log in the figure below NOTE The log is not stored when You cancel it before pushing the Start button It is deleted from this device 6 Troubleshooting 466 ...

Page 481: ...ile and LogList file The list of logs stored in the log file of the machine description of LogList files is displayed 5 Click the Save button 6 Check that Saving data complete is displayed and click OK 6 Troubleshooting 467 ...

Page 482: ...ce mode USB flash drive 1 Operation Procedure 1 Connect USB flash drive to the device 2 Execute the following service mode Level2 COPIER Function DBG LOG LOG2USB CAUTION Do no perform the following operations during the processing Turning OFF and then ON the power of the machine Disconnecting a USB memory device Any operation on the touch panel of the machine OK is displayed when the processing is...

Page 483: ...ic Saving of Logs This machine saves debug logs generated by each module to the auto save area every time an event occurs The event conditions for saving debug logs to the auto save area and their settings are indicated below List of conditions for automatic saving of logs and setting values Setting value Event Condition for Saving Debug Logs 101 default set tings When an unexpected error occurs a...

Page 484: ...iptions of Logs to be Collected from Device Debug log information serial number and status information sent by the firmware of the device are collected while image data user settings such as Address Book etc are not collected Depending on the log user information print file name a part of image data etc can be included indirectly Select necessary settings 1 Mode 1 2 Mode 2 Collection of only logs ...

Page 485: ... transmission to see whether the error is caused by a failure in the machine or a wrong operation of the user The key operation log is not recorded with the status at the time of shipment A setting is ready in Setting Registration menu to enable the saving function of key operation log Only when the above setting is enabled the machine determines that the user permission has been obtained and star...

Page 486: ...unction enables the network packet data sent and received by the device to be collected captured to the hard disk without using a special device It enables network related trouble to be efficiently resolved Use SST or a USB device to collect the network packets saved to the hard disk CAUTION The network packet capture function may fail to collect a part of packet in a high loaded network environme...

Page 487: ...ences Network Store Network Packet Log 3 Set 1 in the following service mode Level2 COPIER Test NET CAP CAPOFFON Set 1 in the following service mode Initial Settings Overview When the network capture function has been enabled started specify the initial settings before performing network capture Procedure for Setting the Overwrite Function 1 Set 1 in the following service mode to enable this funct...

Page 488: ...g applies only when using USB memory device for data extraction NOTE When collecting data using SST the above service mode setting is not reflected and both files in encrypted format and clear text format are always collected Procedure for Setting the Payload Drop Function 1 Set 1 in the following service mode to enable this setting Level2 COPIER Test NET CAP PAYLOAD 0 Payload is not discarded fac...

Page 489: ...cket capture data stored on the hard disk Start Stop the Network Packet Capture Function Operation To start or stop capturing network packets set 0 or 1 in the following service mode Level2 COPIER Test NET CAP STT STP 0 The capture function is not available factory setting value 1 The capture function is available CAUTION Be sure to stop the network packet capture function after collecting network...

Page 490: ...o disable and transfer the license however the further step LMS license transfer is not required Network Packet Capture Data Collection by SST Overview Collect the network packet capture data that has been stored in the machine using SST When using SST for collecting data the setting of encryption function is disabled and files in clear text format encrypted format can be always collected Level2 C...

Page 491: ...xxx can and a list of collected network packet capture files ufset txt 2 Use free software to analyze the collected network packet capture data in clear text format xxx cap if it can be analyzed NOTE When the analysis work fails send the file in encrypted format xxx can to sales company s Support Dept USB Network Packet File Collection Overview Collect the network packet capture data that has been...

Page 492: ...ORDG LOH 5HVHW 6WDUW VKXWGRZQ VHTXHQFH 4 Select 5 Netcap Download and select 0 OK RZQORDG LOH 0HQX 86 68 2 RZQORDG 6HUYLFH3ULQW RZQORDG 1HWFDS RZQORDG 5HWXUQ WR 0DLQ 0HQX 5HVHW 6WDUW VKXWGRZQ VHTXHQFH KDV EHHQ VHOHFWHG HFXWH 2 1 Q RWKHU NH V Store all the network packet capture data stored in the machine on the USB flash drive 5 When Please hit any key appears press any key 6 Press the Reset key t...

Page 493: ...e in clear text format xxx cap and a file in encrypted format xxx can 2 Use free software to analyze the collected network packet capture data in clear text format xxx cap NOTE When the analysis work fails send the file in encrypted format xxx can to the Support Dept of your sales company Captured data collected as plain text is discarded 6 Troubleshooting 479 ...

Page 494: ...Error Jam Alarm 7 Overview 481 Error Code 484 Jam Code 629 Alarm Code 642 ...

Page 495: ...eader ADF 01 04 02 50 2 cassette Pedestal AM1 00 05 04 High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit A1 00 05 04 Paper Deck Unit F1 00 05 04 Buffer Path Unit L1 02 02 Booklet Finisher External Finisher Y1 02 02 61 Inner Finisher H1 02 02 61 Pickup Position Code When jam occurs pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code In the jam display screen the P row corresponds to the pickup p...

Page 496: ...LGL Government LEGAL I C5 ISOC5 GLTR Government LETTER I C6 ISOC6 IND LGL India LEGAL I C7 ISOC7 COM10 COM10 I SRA3 SRA3 DL DL J B0 JISB0 E_C2 Nagagata 2 J B1 JISB1 E_C3 Nagagata 3 J B2 JISB2 E_C4 Nagagata 4 J B3 JISB3 E_C5 Nagagata 5 J B4 JISB4 E K2 Kakugata 2 J B5 JISB5 E_K3 Kakugata 3 J B6 JISB6 E_K4 Kakugata 4 J B7 JISB7 E_K5 Kakugata 5 K16 K16 E_K6 Kakugata 6 K8 K8 E_K7 Kakugata 7 ND PCD Newd...

Page 497: ... CON while any login application other than User Authentication is error such as not displayed login screen occurred In this case access SMS once and switch login application to User Authentication to recover to the normal status Points to Note When Clearing HDD As a remedy for error codes E602 XXXX E611 0000 HDD partition is selected and the target partition may be cleared When clearing partition...

Page 498: ...tected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 001 0002 05 Fixing Thermistor high temperature detection error Detection Description The Fixing Thermistor Front detected a high temperature error Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness connecting from the Feed Drum Driver PCB UN2 J213 to the Fixing Cooling Fan Front and Rear FM5 J6068 and FM6 J6069...

Page 499: ...IER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 001 0004 05 Fixing Thermistor high temperature detection error Detection Description The Fixing Film Thermistor Middle detected a high temperature error Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness connecting from the Feed Drum Driver PCB UN2 J213 to the Fixing Cooling Fan Front and Rear FM5 J6068 and FM6 J6069 Harnesses ...

Page 500: ... COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 001 0006 05 Fixing Thermistor high temperature detection error Detection Description The Fixing Film Thermistor Rear detected a high temperature error Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness connecting from the Feed Drum Driver PCB UN2 J213 to the Fixing Cooling Fan Front and Rear FM5 J6068 and FM6 J6069 Harnesse...

Page 501: ...ervice mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 002 0001 05 Fixing Thermistor temperature increase detection error Detection Description After the Fixing Heater was turned ON the Fixing Main Thermistor detected no temperature incre...

Page 502: ...g whether the error is cleared 1 Go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Then turn OFF and then ON the main power 2 Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts After performing the remedy work go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min...

Page 503: ...the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Then turn OFF and then ON the main power 2 Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts After performing the remedy work go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service...

Page 504: ...king whether the error is cleared 1 Go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Then turn OFF and then ON the main power 2 Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts After performing the remedy work go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 ...

Page 505: ...ing whether the error is cleared 1 Go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Then turn OFF and then ON the main power 2 Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts After performing the remedy work go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 m...

Page 506: ... while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Then turn OFF and then ON the main power 2 Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts After performing the remedy work go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode dat...

Page 507: ...2 Film Assembly Fan Shutter DC Controller PCB UN1 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Then turn OFF and then ON the main power 2 Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts After performing the remedy work go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCT...

Page 508: ...cement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 009 0001 05 Fixing disengagement timeout error Detection Description The Fixing Pressure Sensor did not detect OFF status within 5 sec after the start of fixing disengagement operation Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Feed Drum Driver PCB UN2...

Page 509: ...rder while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check that the ITB is not displaced 2 Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 012 1001 05 ITB Motor error Detection Description Lock signal error of the ITB was detected consecutively when starting the drive of the ITB Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Front Driver PCB UN3 J303 and the ITB Motor M13 J3030 ITB Motor...

Page 510: ...Y detected that the output value SigD was below the lower limit at initialization of the Developing Assembly Remedy Related parts R1 00 Drum Unit Developing Assembly Y Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check that the Developing Assembly and the Drum Unit are properly installed 2 Remove soiling on the exposure window and the Drum Unit 3 Replace ...

Page 511: ... output error Detection Description The ATR Patch M detected that the output value SigD was below the lower limit at initialization of the Developing Assembly Remedy Related parts R1 00 Drum Unit Developing Assembly M Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check that the Developing Assembly and the Drum Unit are properly installed 2 Remove soiling o...

Page 512: ... output error Detection Description The ATR Patch C detected that the output value SigD was below the lower limit at initialization of the Developing Assembly Remedy Related parts R1 00 Drum Unit Developing Assembly C Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check that the Developing Assembly and the Drum Unit are properly installed 2 Remove soiling o...

Page 513: ...put error Detection Description The ATR Patch Bk detected that the output value SigD was below the lower limit at initialization of the Developing Assembly Remedy Related parts R1 00 Drum Unit Developing Assembly Bk Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check that the Developing Assembly and the Drum Unit are properly installed 2 Remove soiling on ...

Page 514: ... connector and parts 021 0100 05 Developing Motor error Detection Description Lock signal error of the Developing Motor Y was detected consecutively Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Feed Drum Driver PCB UN2 J225 and the Developing Motor Y M5 J6015 Developing Motor Y M5 Developing Assembly Y Feed Drum Driver PCB UN2 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the ...

Page 515: ...ed Drum Driver PCB UN2 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 021 0300 05 Developing Motor error Detection Description Lock signal error of the Developing Motor C was detected consecutively Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Feed Drum Driver PCB UN2 J225 and the Developing Motor C M7 J6012 Developing Motor C M7 Developing Assembly C Feed Drum Driver PCB UN2 ...

Page 516: ...Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 025 0100 05 Toner Bottle Motor error Detection Description Rotation error of the Toner Bottle Motor Y was detected Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Feed Drum Driver PCB UN2 J211 and the Bottle Motor Y M9 J2111 Harness between the Feed Drum Driver PCB UN2 J212 and the Toner Sensor Relay PCB Y UN39 J1400 Harness between...

Page 517: ...onnector and parts After performing the remedy work go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR 025 0200 05 Toner Bottle Motor error Detection Description Rotation error of the Toner Bottle Motor M was detected Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Feed Drum Driver PCB UN2 J211 and the Bottle Motor M M10 J2112 Harness between the Feed Drum Driver PCB UN2 J212 and...

Page 518: ...onnector and parts After performing the remedy work go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR 025 0300 05 Toner Bottle Motor error Detection Description Rotation error of the Toner Bottle Motor C was detected Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Feed Drum Driver PCB UN2 J211 and the Bottle Motor C M11 J2113 Harness between the Feed Drum Driver PCB UN2 J212 and...

Page 519: ...or and parts After performing the remedy work go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR 025 0400 05 Toner Bottle Motor error Detection Description Rotation error of the Toner Bottle Motor Bk was detected Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Feed Drum Driver PCB UN2 J211 and the Bottle Motor Bk M12 J2114 Harness between the Feed Drum Driver PCB UN2 J212 and the...

Page 520: ...ttle Front Inner Door 2 Check that the Bottle Cover Open Close Switch Bk is properly installed 3 Turn the gear of the Set on Drive Assembly counterclockwise while the Delivery Tray is removed to check opening and closing of the Inner Door 4 Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts After performing the remedy work go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ...

Page 521: ...d Drum Driver PCB UN2 J212 and the Toner Sensor Relay PCB C UN41 J1420 Developing Motor C M7 Developing Assembly C Main Drive Assembly Set on Hopper Assembly Feed Drum Driver PCB UN2 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check that the Developing Coupling of the Developing Assembly is not damaged 2 Check that the Developing Coupling of the Main Dri...

Page 522: ...ver PCB UN3 J305 and the Registration Shutter Solenoid SL1 J6064 Patch Sensor UN49 Registration Shutter Solenoid SL1 DC Controller PCB UN1 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Remove soiling on the Patch Sensor 2 Check the operation of the Registration Shutter Solenoid 3 Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before ...

Page 523: ...fer Roller Disengagement Motor M15 ITB Displacement Sensor PCB UN60 Intermediate Transfer Belt Assembly Front Driver PCB UN3 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 074 0003 05 Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor error Detection Description Both the Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 1 and 2 detected home position at the same time during engagement disengagement operation...

Page 524: ...se to rotate the ITB 1 4 As the ITB is getting closer to the center adjust the ITB position 2 Check replace the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller 3 Execute COPIER FUNCTION MISC P ITB INIT 4 If the value displayed in COPIER DISPLAY MISC ITB POS ITB POS2 is out of the appropriate reference value range execute the ITB alignment 5 Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 075 0004 05 I...

Page 525: ... the ITB Displacement Control Motor M14 J3031 ITB Steering Sensor PS24 ITB Displacement Control Motor M14 ITB Displacement Sensor PCB UN60 Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Intermediate Transfer Belt Assembly Front Driver PCB UN3 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared a If the ITB is not at full displacement position 1 Check replace the related harness ...

Page 526: ... between the Main Controller PCB and the Riser PCB Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN1 J171 and the Laser Driver PCB Y UN13 J851 Laser Driver PCB Y UN13 Laser Driver PCB M UN12 Main Controller PCB Riser PCB DC Controller PCB UN1 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and re...

Page 527: ...Coaxial Cable connecting from the Riser PCB J9 to the Laser Driver PCB Y and M UN13 J101 and UN12 J822 Laser Driver PCB Y UN13 Laser Driver PCB M UN12 Riser PCB Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 102 0301 05 EEPROM error Detection Description An error in check sum of EEPROM on the Laser Scanner was detected C Bk Remedy Related parts R1 00 Small diameter Coaxial Cabl...

Page 528: ...unication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Laser Scanner Y M was detected Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN1 J171 and the Laser Driver PCB Y UN13 J851 Small diameter Coaxial Cable connecting from the Riser PCB J9 to the Laser Driver PCB Y and M UN13 J802 and UN12 J822 Laser Driver PCB Y UN13 Laser Driver PCB M UN12 Riser PCB DC Controller PCB UN1 Remedy...

Page 529: ...rence Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 197 2003 05 Serial communication error Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Main...

Page 530: ...EVEL2 OPTION FNC SW SELF CHK to 1 it is handled as an error 199 0103 05 Error in high voltage sequence C Detection Description Error for collecting log Remedy Remedy Collect debug log and contact to the sales company Reference By setting COPIER LEVEL2 OPTION FNC SW SELF CHK to 1 it is handled as an error 199 0104 05 Error in high voltage sequence K Detection Description Error for collecting log Re...

Page 531: ...R LEVEL2 OPTION FNC SW SELF CHK to 1 it is handled as an error 199 0304 05 Error in high voltage sequence K Detection Description Error for collecting log Remedy Remedy Collect debug log and contact to the sales company Reference By setting COPIER LEVEL2 OPTION FNC SW SELF CHK to 1 it is handled as an error 202 0001 04 Reader Scanner Unit HP error Detection Description The Reader Scanner Unit coul...

Page 532: ...rence Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES 202 0004 04 Reader Scanner Unit HP error Detection Description Home position error of the Reader Scanner Unit was detecte...

Page 533: ...ower cycling of the machine Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES 227 0101 04 Power supply error Detection Description The DADF Driver PCB did not detect 24 V when t...

Page 534: ...the sales company 246 0003 00 System error Detection Description System error Remedy Contact to the sales company 246 0005 00 System error Detection Description System error Remedy Contact to the sales company 247 0001 00 System error Detection Description System error Remedy Contact the service company office 247 0002 00 System error Detection Description System error Remedy Contact to the sales ...

Page 535: ...Controller PCB UN1 J122 and the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN18 J657 Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN1 J123 and the Charging High Voltage PCB YMC UN77 J641 Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN1 J124 and the Developing High Voltage PCB YMC UN76 J611 DC Controller PC UN1 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 260 0002 05 Power supply error Detection D...

Page 536: ...able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES 280 0101 04 Communication error Detection Description Communication between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit was not completed within the specified period of time Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J4 and the DADF Driver P...

Page 537: ... SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES 302 0101 04 Error in paper back white shading Detection Description An access error to the paper back white shading RAM or a paper back white shading value out of specification was detected Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J4 and the DADF Driver PCB PCB1 J401 DADF Driver PCB PCB1 Reader C...

Page 538: ...rror Detection Description System error Remedy Contact to the sales company 355 0003 00 System error Detection Description System error Remedy Contact to the sales company 355 0004 00 System error Detection Description System error Remedy Contact to the sales company 400 0001 04 Communication error Detection Description A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PC...

Page 539: ...replacing the Reader Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES 412 0005 04 Fan error Detection Description Rotation of fan was detected after the stop signal for the DADF Cooling Fan was transmitte...

Page 540: ...nector between the DC Controller PCB and the Finisher Controller PCB 2 Replace the Finisher Controller PCB Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment Adjustment when Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual 3 Replace the DC Controller PCB Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data and restore the backup data after the replacement s...

Page 541: ...n the Finisher and Puncher Unit Finisher H1 Y1 Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Puncher Controller PCB was detected Command transmission error Remedy a INNER FIN H1 Related parts Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Puncher Controller PCB Finisher Controller PCB PCB1 Puncher Controller PCB PCB1 b STAPLE FIN Y1 BOOKLET...

Page 542: ...etected Command transmission error Remedy STAPLE FIN Y1 BOOKLET FIN Y1 Related parts Harnesses and connectors from the Buffer Pass Controller PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB Buffer Pass Controller PCB PCB401 Finisher Controller PCB PCB101 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check replace the harness and connector between the Buffer Pass Contro...

Page 543: ...ta read from Finisher Controller PCB has an error The read data doesn t match with the written data Remedy a INNER FIN H1 Related parts Finisher Controller PCB PCB1 Remedy Check replace the Finisher Controller PCB PCB1 b STAPLE FIN Y1 BOOKLET FIN Y1 Related parts Finisher Controller PCB PCB101 Remedy Replace the Finisher Controller PCB Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to ...

Page 544: ...ist HP Sensor Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Assist Motor Assist HP Sensor PS7 Assist Motor M5 Finisher Controller PCB PCB1 b STAPLE FIN Y1 BOOKLET FIN Y1 Related parts Harnesses from the Paper End Assist HP Sensor PS123 to the Finisher Controller PCB Harnesses from the Paper End Assist Motor M113 to the Finisher Controller PCB Paper End Assist HP Sensor PS123 Pap...

Page 545: ...placing the Parts in the Service Manual 530 8001 02 a Rear Alignment Motor error Finisher H1 b Error in the Front Alignment Motor Finisher Y1 Detection Description a The Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after the Rear Alignment Motor operation started b The front alignment plate does not come off the Front Alignment HP Sensor when the Front Alignment M...

Page 546: ...2 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment When Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual 531 8001 02 a Stapler Motor error Finisher H1 b Error in the Staple Motor Finisher Y1 Detection Description a The Staple HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 0 4 seconds had passed after the Stapler Motor opera...

Page 547: ...tch SW102 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment When Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual 532 8001 02 a Stapler Shift Motor error Finisher H1 b Error in the Stapler Shift Motor Finisher Y1 Detection Description a The Stapler Shift HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed afte...

Page 548: ...eturn Belt Motor error Finisher H1 Detection Description The Return Belt HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after the Return Belt Motor operation started Remedy Related parts Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Return Belt HP Sensor Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Return Belt Motor Return Belt HP Sensor PS3 Return...

Page 549: ...Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment When Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual 535 8002 02 Error in the Swing Guide Motor Finisher Y1 Detection Description The Swing Guide HP Sensor does not detect the swing guide when the Swing Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second Remedy STAPLE FIN Y1 BOOKLET FIN Y1 Related parts Harnesses from the Swing Guide HP Sensor PS119 to the Finisher Contr...

Page 550: ...Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment When Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual 537 8002 02 a Front Alignment Motor error Finisher H1 b Error in the Rear Alignment Motor Finisher Y1 Detection Description a The Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 seconds had passed after the Front Alignment Motor operation started b The Rear Alignment HP Sensor does not detect th...

Page 551: ...ck Tray HP Sensor PS106 to the Finisher Controller PCB Harnesses from the Stack Tray Full Sensor 1 2 3 PS107 PS108 PS109 to the Finisher Controller PCB Harnesses from the Stack Tray Upper Limit Sensor PS110 to the Finisher Controller PCB Harnesses from the Stack Tray Shift Motor M105 to the Finisher Controller PCB Stack Tray HP Sensor PS106 Stack Tray Full Sensor 1 2 3 PS107 PS108 PS109 Stack Tray...

Page 552: ...perform the following work before checking the related parts 1 Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit 2 Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch SW102 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment When Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual...

Page 553: ...nisher Controller PCB PCB101 Points to note at work When the Swing Guide Safety Switch SW102 turns on at the detection timing of this error this error code may be displayed Accordingly perform the following work before checking the related parts 1 Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit 2 Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch SW102 R...

Page 554: ...PCB101 Points to note at work When the Swing Guide Safety Switch SW102 turns on at the detection timing of this error this error code may be displayed Accordingly perform the following work before checking the related parts 1 Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit 2 Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch SW102 Remedy Check replace th...

Page 555: ...h is turned ON for 0 3 seconds The Front Cover Switch is turned OFF for 0 3 seconds when the Front Cover Sensor is ON Remedy STAPLE FIN Y1 BOOKLET FIN Y1 Related parts Harnesses from the Swing Guide Safety Switch SW102 to the Finisher Controller PCB Harnesses from the Stack Tray Shift Motor M105 to the Finisher Controller PCB Swing Guide Safety Switch SW102 Stack Tray Shift Motor M105 Finisher Con...

Page 556: ...cond Remedy STAPLE FIN Y1 BOOKLET FIN Y1 Related parts Harnesses from the Saddle Paddle HP Sensor PS206 to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB Harnesses from the Saddle Feed Paddle Motor M201 to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB Saddle Paddle HP Sensor PS206 Saddle Feed Paddle Motor M201 Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB PCB201 Finisher Controller PCB PCB101 Remedy Check replace the related harness c...

Page 557: ...t the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch SW102 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment When Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual 57B 8001 02 Error in the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor Finisher Y1 Detection Description The paper end pushing guide does not come off the Paper End Pushing...

Page 558: ... in the Service Manual 583 8001 02 Error in the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor Finisher Y1 Detection Description The tray auxiliary guides don t come off the Front Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensors when the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second Remedy STAPLE FIN Y1 BOOKLET FIN Y1 Related parts Harnesses from the Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor PS117 to the Finisher Controller...

Page 559: ...02 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment When Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual 590 0002 02 Error in the Punch Inner Puncher B1 Detection Description The Puncher does not come on the Punch HP Sensor after driving stopped during initialization The Punch HP Sensor does not detect the punch w...

Page 560: ...B Harnesses from the Punch HP Sensor 2 PS304 to the Puncher Relay PCB Harnesses from the Punch Motor Clock Sensor PS305 to the Puncher Relay PCB Harnesses from the Punch Motor M301 to the Puncher Relay PCB Punch HP Sensor 1 PS303 Punch HP Sensor 2 PS304 Punch Motor Clock Sensor PS305 Punch Motor M301 Puncher Relay PCB PCB302 Puncher Controller PCB PCB301 Finisher Controller PCB PCB101 Points to no...

Page 561: ...ontal Registration Motor Inner Puncher B1 Detection Description The Horizontal Registration HP Sensor does not detect the punch unit when shifting the punch unit by 37mm toward rear Remedy Related parts Harnesses from the Horizontal Registration HP Sensor S1 to the Puncher Controller PCB Harnesses from the Punch Horizontal Registration Motor M1 to the Puncher Controller PCB PHorizontal Registratio...

Page 562: ...elated harness cable connector and parts Reference When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment When Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment When Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual 5F0 8001 02 Error in the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor Finisher Y1 Detection Description The saddle paper end stopper d...

Page 563: ...ock Sensor PS211 Saddle Delivery Motor M207 Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB PCB201 Finisher Controller PCB PCB101 Points to note at work When the Swing Guide Safety Switch SW102 turns on at the detection timing of this error this error code may be displayed Accordingly perform the following work before checking the related parts 1 Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit 2...

Page 564: ...15 Saddle Stitcher Motor M208 Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB PCB201 Finisher Controller PCB PCB101 Points to note at work When the Swing Guide Safety Switch SW102 turns on at the detection timing of this error this error code may be displayed Accordingly perform the following work before checking the related parts 1 Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit 2 Check whether...

Page 565: ...Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment When Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual 5F6 8002 02 Error in the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate Folding Motor Finisher Y1 Detection Description The Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor does not detect the saddle paper pushing plate when the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate Folding Motor has been driven for 3 seconds Remedy STAPLE FIN Y1 BOOKLET FIN Y1 Relat...

Page 566: ...e When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment When Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual 5F8 8001 02 Error in the Saddle Switching Lever Motor Finisher Y1 Detection Description The saddle switching lever does not come off the Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor when the Saddle Switching Lever Motor has been driven for 1 second Remedy STAPLE FIN Y1 BOOKLET FIN Y1 Related parts H...

Page 567: ... Gripper HP Sensor PS209 Saddle Gripper Motor M205 Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB PCB201 Finisher Controller PCB PCB101 Points to note at work When the Swing Guide Safety Switch SW102 turns on at the detection timing of this error this error code may be displayed Accordingly perform the following work before checking the related parts 1 Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide...

Page 568: ...the error log Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between Main Controller PCB and the HDD HDD Main Controller PCB Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared When prioritizing clearing of the error skip Remedies 2 and 3 Although the error is cleared by HD CHECK it may occur again Thus perform Remedies 1 to 4 1 Check the related harness cable and connector 2...

Page 569: ...ory 7 Check replace the related parts 602 0201 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between Main Controller PCB and the HDD HD...

Page 570: ... SST or a USB memory 7 Check replace the related parts 602 0301 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the MEAP related area Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between Main Controller PCB and the HDD HDD Main...

Page 571: ...r a USB memory 7 Check replace the related parts 602 0401 00 HDD error Detection Description Logical partition error was detected Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between Main Controller PCB and the HDD HDD Main Controller PCB ...

Page 572: ... replace the related parts 602 0501 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between Main Controller PCB and the HDD HDD Main Cont...

Page 573: ...SB memory 7 Check replace the related parts 602 0601 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between Main Controller PCB and the ...

Page 574: ...memory 7 Check replace the related parts 602 0701 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in general application temporary area temporary file Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between Main Controller PCB and th...

Page 575: ...or a USB memory 7 Check replace the related parts 602 0801 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the general application related area Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between Main Controller PCB and the HD...

Page 576: ...a USB memory 7 Check replace the related parts 602 0901 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in PDL spool data temporary file Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between Main Controller PCB and the HDD HDD Main...

Page 577: ...a USB memory 7 Check replace the related parts 602 1001 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the SEND related area Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between Main Controller PCB and the HDD HDD Main Control...

Page 578: ...B memory 7 Check replace the related parts 602 1101 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the update related area Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between Main Controller PCB and the HDD HDD Main Controlle...

Page 579: ...nce All the partitions that can be deleted are deleted 6 Enter safe mode using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory 7 Check replace the related parts 602 1201 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the license related area Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not be...

Page 580: ...cleared by HD CHECK it may occur again Thus perform Remedies 1 to 5 1 Check the related harness cable and connector 2 Turn OFF and then ON the main power and check whether the error is cleared 3 Select COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM CHK TYPE 13 and execute HD CHECK Then turn OFF and then ON the main power 4 Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to the backup data list Reference For backup and rest...

Page 581: ...mode using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory 7 Check replace the related parts 602 1411 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in SWAP temporary file alternative memory area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between Main Controller PCB and the H...

Page 582: ...mode using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory 7 Check replace the related parts 602 1711 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the debug log area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between Main Controller PCB and the HDD HDD Main Controller PC...

Page 583: ...mode using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory 7 Check replace the related parts 602 1811 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the image data storage area in Advanced Box File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between Main Controller PCB and the H...

Page 584: ...mode using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory 7 Check replace the related parts 602 1911 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of data for printing File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between Main Controller PCB and the HDD HDD...

Page 585: ...in power and check whether the error is cleared 2 Execute the key clear using SST to make an unformatted disk CAUTION E602 0001 will be indicated if activating the machine with the unformatted disk Therefore be sure to format the HDD 3 Enter safe mode using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB 602 5001 00...

Page 586: ...y insufficient image memory Detection Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB Remedy Make the Memory capacity at Main Controller PC as indicated by 0512 613 1024 00 Faulty insufficient image memory Detection Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB Remedy Make the Memory capacity at Main Controller PCB as indicated by 1024 613 1536 00 Faulty insufficient image memory D...

Page 587: ...TA Flash PCB again to check that it is properly installed 2 Enter safe mode using 2 8 startup and execute Flash Format using SST or a USB flash drive 3 After replacing the SATA Flash PCB reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB Reference For backup and restoration refer to Adjustment Main Controller System and Appendix Backup Data List in the S...

Page 588: ... HD CHECK it may occur again Thus perform Remedies 1 to 4 1 Check the related harness cable and connector 2 Select COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM CHK TYPE 0 and execute HD CHECK Then turn OFF and then ON the main power 3 Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to the backup data list Reference For backup and restoration refer to Adjustment Main Controller System and Appendix Backup Data List in the ...

Page 589: ...der while checking whether the error is cleared Although the error is cleared by HD CHECK it may occur again Thus perform Remedies 1 to 4 1 Check the related harness cable and connector 2 Select COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM CHK TYPE 0 and execute HD CHECK Then turn OFF and then ON the main power 3 Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to the backup data list Reference For backup and restoration ...

Page 590: ...y Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Related parts R1 00 Sata Flash PCB Main Controller PCB Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared When prioritizing clearing of the error skip Remedies 2 and 3 Although the error is cleared by HD CHECK it may occur again Thus perform Remedies 1 to 4 1 Check the related harness cable and connector ...

Page 591: ...ction Description An error was detected in the license related area Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Related parts R1 00 SATA Flash PCB Main Controller PCB Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Obtain the ...

Page 592: ...e using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory 7 Check replace the related parts 614 0711 00 Error in file system on the Flash PCB Detection Description An error was detected in system setting value service mode etc storage area File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Sata Fl...

Page 593: ...rm the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 After turning OFF the main power remove and then install the SATA Flash PCB again to check that it is properly installed 2 Enter safe mode using 2 8 startup and execute Flash Format using SST or a USB flash drive 3 After replacing the SATA Flash PCB reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 614 4003 00 E...

Page 594: ...g Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 After turning OFF the main power remove and then install the SATA Flash PCB again to check that it is properly installed 2 Enter safe mode using 2 8 startup and execute Flash Format using SST or a USB flash drive 3 After replacing the SATA Flash PCB reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive...

Page 595: ...form the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared Although the error is cleared by HD CHECK it may occur again Thus perform Remedies 1 to 4 1 Check the related harness cable and connector 2 Select COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM CHK TYPE 0 and execute HD CHECK Then turn OFF and then ON the main power 3 Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to the backup data list Reference...

Page 596: ...nnector and parts 674 0002 07 Fax Board communication error Detection Description An error was detected for the specified number of times in communication with the Fax Board Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Fax Board and the Riser PCB Fax Board Riser PCB Main Controller PCB Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 674 0004 07 Fax Board communication error De...

Page 597: ...d installed while the IP Fax license was enabled Remedy Install the Fax Board 1 line to use the machine as an IP Fax model Uninstall the IP Fax license and install the G3 Fax Board to use the machine as a G3 Fax model 677 0001 00 Print server error Detection Description Abnormality detected on the exhaust fan operation of printer server Remedy 1 Check supplying power to the exhaust fan 2 Exhaust f...

Page 598: ... Adjustment when Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual for the Finisher 713 0011 05 Finisher communication error Detection Description Retransmission of NACK was detected consecutively in communication between the host machine and the finisher Remedy a STAPLE BOOKLET FINISHER Y1 Related parts R1 00 Harnesses connecting the DC Controller PCB UN1 J110 the Relay Path Unit and the Finisher Control...

Page 599: ...Adjustments Adjustment when Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual for the Finisher 713 0021 05 Finisher communication error Detection Description Reception incomplete was detected consecutively in communication between the host machine and the finisher Remedy a STAPLE BOOKLET FINISHER Y1 Related parts R1 00 Harnesses connecting the DC Controller PCB UN1 J110 the Relay Path Unit and the Finishe...

Page 600: ...efer to Adjustments Adjustment when Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual for the Finisher 713 0030 05 Finisher communication error Detection Description An initialization error was detected in communication between the host machine and the finisher Remedy a STAPLE BOOKLET FINISHER Y1 Related parts R1 00 Harnesses connecting the DC Controller PCB UN1 J110 the Relay Path Unit and the Finisher C...

Page 601: ...Coin Vendor Detection Description In the case of communication error with the coin vendor while obtaining the unit price at start up Remedy Check the connection between charging management equipment and machine and check that the Cable is not open circuit Clear the error while the charging management equipment is connected to operate and when switching to the operation without charging management ...

Page 602: ...communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB was detected Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 Riser PCB Main Controller PCB Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB back up the service mode...

Page 603: ...rror between the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB was detected Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 Riser PCB Main Controller PCB Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 ...

Page 604: ...as detected at communication with the Reader Remedy Replace the Reader Unit with the one for this model 733 0000 05 Printer communication error Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB was detected at startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harnesses between the DC Controller PCB UN1 J100 J101 and the Riser PCB J2 J10 DC Controller PCB UN1 Ri...

Page 605: ...etection Description Communication error that can be recovered by reboot If it is detected again immediately after reboot E733 0002 is generated Remedy It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after log collection 733 9999 05 Printer communication error Detection Description The Finisher connection information error was detected between the DC Controlle...

Page 606: ...hether the error is cleared 1 Remove and then install the Image Analysis Board 2 If the error is not cleared replace the Image Analysis Board 3 After replacing the Image Analysis Board reinstall the firmware of the Image Analysis Board or the system software which version is supported by this model using SST or a USB flash drive 746 0022 00 Image Analysis Board error Detection Description Differen...

Page 607: ... the customer to enter System Manager ID and System Manager PIN when logging in 3 Enter the password set at backup operation 4 When the restoration completion screen is displayed click OK Remove the USB memory and turn OFF and then ON the main power 746 0033 00 TPM error Detection Description It was detected that data in TPM was inconsistent Remedy If the TPM key was backed up Restore the TPM key ...

Page 608: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 011A 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 609: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 0319 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 610: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 041B 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 611: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 0619 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 612: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 071A 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 613: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 081B 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 614: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 0A18 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 615: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 0B19 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 616: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 0C1A 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 617: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 1200 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 618: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 1205 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 619: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 2000 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 620: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 201F 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 621: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 221F 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 622: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 620C 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 623: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 6211 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 624: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 621C 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 625: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 6514 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 626: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 651A 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 627: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 6A1F 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 628: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 711F 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 629: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 751C 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 630: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 850F 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 631: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 8517 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 632: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 851D 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 633: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 9F00 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 634: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 C51C 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 635: ... 00 Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 J109 and the Riser PCB J7 Bypass PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Open I F PCB when non Canon made controller is installed Riser PCB Main Controller PCB HDD Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 747 DC00 00 Board error Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC Remedy Related pa...

Page 636: ... IPL startup program was not found or the HDD could not be recognized Remedy Related parts R1 00 Cable between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD SATA FLASH PCB Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Disconnect the cable between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD and turn ON the main power a When the error code has not been changed 1 Obtain the ne...

Page 637: ...be detected Remedy Remedy Turn OFF and then ON the main power Reference Options are recognized again by turning OFF and then ON the main power In the case of changing option configuration disconnect the power plug or turn OFF the breaker after turning OFF the main power so that an error does not occur 753 0001 00 Download Error Detection Description Update of the system software failed Remedy Perf...

Page 638: ... signal was detected while the fan was being stopped or the signal was not detected during operation Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Feed Drum Driver PCB UN2 J213 and the Delivery Fan 1 FM7 J6061 Delivery Fan 1 FM7 Feed Drum Driver PCB UN2 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 806 0001 05 Delivery fan Error Detection Description Rotation error of the Del...

Page 639: ...ng relay was ON Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN1 J173 and the AC Driver PCB UN6 J505 AC Driver PCB UN6 DC Controller PCB UN1 Remedy Check the voltage of the outlet and connect the machine to the correct outlet if it is wrong Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data ...

Page 640: ...replace the HDD Cooling Fan 881 0001 00 Board over heat error Detection Description Abnormal temperature of the Main Controller CPU was detected Remedy Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared a If the error occurred during a service visit and then occurred again replace the Main Controller PCB b If the error does not occur during a service visit but is...

Page 641: ...0CA4 05 Error for collecting log Printer Detection Description Error for collecting log Printer Continuous 0CA4 jam was detected Remedy Remedy Collect debug log and contact to the sales company Reference By setting COPIER LEVEL2 OPTION FNC SW JM ERR D to 1 it is handled as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence 996 0CA5 05 Error for collecting log Printer Detection Description Error f...

Page 642: ...FNC SW JM ERR D to 1 it is handled as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence 996 0CAC 05 Error for collecting log Printer Detection Description Error for collecting log Printer Continuous 0CAC jam was detected Remedy Remedy Collect debug log and contact to the sales company Reference By setting COPIER LEVEL2 OPTION FNC SW JM ERR D to 1 it is handled as an error instead of a jam from t...

Page 643: ...ure of a drive motor or soiling pa per dust deterioration failure of a drive roller Power on A power on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power on Remaining paper in the machine Soiling on the target sensor Failure of the target sensor Foreign matter on the target sensor paper dust paper lint Error avoidance An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine excluding parts fai...

Page 644: ...PS34 00 0107 DELAY Inner Delivery Sensor PS37 00 0108 DELAY First Delivery Sensor PS41 00 0109 DELAY Second Delivery Sensor PS42 00 010A DELAY Reverse Sensor PS39 00 010B DELAY Third Delivery Sensor PS43 00 010C DELAY Duplex Inlet Sensor PS40 00 010D DELAY Duplex Paper Sensor PS38 00 010E DELAY Multi Purpose Tray Pullout Sensor PS72 00 0114 DELAY Pre Reverse Sensor PS57 00 0115 DELAY Between Casse...

Page 645: ...C POWER ON Duplex Inlet Sensor PS40 00 0A0D POWER ON Duplex Paper Sensor PS38 00 0A0E POWER ON Multi Purpose Tray Pullout Sensor PS72 00 0A14 POWER ON Pre Reverse Sensor PS57 00 0A15 POWER ON Cassette 1 2 Vertical Pass Sensor PS76 00 0B00 DOOR OP Door Open 00 0CA1 SEQUENCE Sequence Jam 00 0CA2 SEQUENCE Sequence Jam 00 0CA3 SEQUENCE Sequence Jam 00 0CA4 SEQUENCE Sequence Jam 00 0CA5 SEQUENCE Sequen...

Page 646: ... Description Sensor ID 00 AA71 P STOP Forcible stop of paper feed 00 AA99 P STOP Forcible stop of paper feed ADF Reader PS_A3 PS_A4 PS_A1 PS_A2 UN_BO6 PS_A7 PS_A6 PS_R2 PS_A9 UN_BO7 UN_BO8 PS_R1 PS_A5 PS_N1 PS_R3 7 Error Jam Alarm 632 ...

Page 647: ...ation Sensor PS_R1 01 0043 DELAY Arch Sensor PS_A1 01 0044 STNRY Arch Sensor PS_A1 01 0045 DELAY Registration Sensor PS_R2 01 0046 STNRY Registration Sensor PS_R2 01 0047 DELAY Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6 01 0048 STNRY Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6 01 0049 DELAY Lead Sensor 2 PS_A7 01 0050 STNRY Lead Sensor 2 PS_A7 01 0060 OVERLAP Double Feed Detection PCB UN_BO7 UN_BO8 01 0061 COM ERR Double Feed Detection PCB UN_...

Page 648: ...Original Size Sensor Inch PS_R2 01 00A4 POWER ON Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6 01 00A5 POWER ON Lead Sensor 2 PS_A7 Cassette Feeding Unit AM1 PS106 PS104 PS102 PS108 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Description Sensor ID 00 0103 DELAY Cassette 3 Pullout Sensor PS101 00 0104 DELAY Cassette 4 Pullout Sensor PS102 00 0203 STNRY Cassette 3 Pullout Sensor PS101 00 0204 STNRY Cassette 4 Pullout Sensor PS102 00 0A...

Page 649: ...07 PS113 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Description Sensor ID 00 0103 DELAY High Capacity Cassette Pullout Sensor PS101 00 0203 STNRY High Capacity Cassette Pullout Sensor PS101 00 0A03 POWER ON High Capacity Cassette Pullout Sensor PS101 7 Error Jam Alarm 635 ...

Page 650: ...k Unit F1 PS2 PS1 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Description Sensor ID 00 010F DELAY Deck Pullout Sensor PS2 00 020F STNRY Deck Pullout Sensor PS2 00 0A0F POWER ON Deck Pullout Sensor PS2 7 Error Jam Alarm 636 ...

Page 651: ...1 POWER ON Delivery Sensor PS1 02 1400 COVER OP Front cover switch MSW1 02 1500 STAPLE 02 1701 INIT ROT Delivery Sensor PS1 02 1801 ERROR 02 1802 ERROR 02 1803 ERROR 02 1804 ERROR 02 1805 ERROR 02 1C14 ERROR 02 1C16 ERROR 02 1C30 ERROR 02 1C32 ERROR 02 1C35 ERROR 02 1C37 ERROR 02 1C40 ERROR 02 1C77 ERROR 02 1F01 OTHER 02 1F32 OTHER 02 1F90 SEQUENCE 7 Error Jam Alarm 637 ...

Page 652: ... Escape Delivery Sensor PS111 02 1108 STNRY Saddle Delivery Sensor PS203 02 1109 STNRY Saddle Inlet Sensor PS201 02 1200 TIMING 02 1301 POWER ON Inlet Sensor PS101 02 1302 POWER ON Delivery Sensor PS102 02 1303 POWER ON Buffer Sensor PS103 02 1304 POWER ON Escape Delivery Sensor PS111 02 1307 POWER ON Saddle Processing Tray Paper Sensor PS202 02 1308 POWER ON Saddle Delivery Sensor PS203 02 1309 P...

Page 653: ...RROR 02 1C37 ERROR 02 1C40 ERROR 02 1C53 ERROR 02 1C54 ERROR 02 1C77 ERROR 02 1C78 ERROR 02 1C7B ERROR 02 1C83 ERROR 02 1CF0 ERROR 02 1CF1 ERROR 02 1CF3 ERROR 02 1CF6 ERROR 02 1CF8 ERROR 02 1CFA ERROR 02 1F01 OTHER 02 1F32 OTHER 02 1F90 SEQUENCE Only Booklet Finisher Y1 2 4 Hole Puncher Unit A1 PS301 PS304 PS303 7 Error Jam Alarm 639 ...

Page 654: ...Name Description Sensor ID 02 1002 DELAY Punch Trailing Edge Sensor PCB3 02 1003 DELAY No 2 path sensor S2 02 1102 STNRY Punch Trailing Edge Sensor PCB3 02 1103 STNRY No 2 path sensor S2 02 1302 POWER ON Punch Trailing Edge Sensor PCB3 02 1303 POWER ON No 2 path sensor S2 02 1600 PUNCH Punch HP Sensor 1 Punch HP Sensor 2 S5 S6 02 1601 PUNCH Punch Waste Box Sensor S4 02 1C90 ERROR 02 1C93 ERROR 7 E...

Page 655: ... DELAY Buffer Pass Exit Sensor PS402 02 110A STNRY Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PS401 02 110B STNRY Buffer Pass Exit Sensor PS402 02 1201 TIMING Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PS401 02 130A POWER ON Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PS401 02 130B POWER ON Buffer Pass Exit Sensor PS402 02 1405 COVER OP OPEN detection sensor PS403 02 1F3E ERROR 7 Error Jam Alarm 641 ...

Page 656: ...start of rising Movement symptom While failure has occurred an alarm has occurred the target paper source cannot be used because it is in no paper state Measures While the Cassette 1 is removed turn ON the power and then insert the Cassette 1 and check the operation sound of the motor When there is operation sound of the motor check if the Middle Plate has been lifted up When the Middle Plate has ...

Page 657: ... side missing teeth swing 4 Check the Cassette 2 Lifter Motor 5 Replace the DC Controller 04 0003 Cassette 3 Lifter error A Operation B Cause C Remedy Cause Error in the Lifter Motor or Lifter Sensor Detection condition timing When failure of the Cassette Lifter was detected When rising of the lifter was not completed the Paper Surface Sensor was not turned ON within the specified period of time a...

Page 658: ...ror A Operation B Cause C Remedy Cause Error in the Pickup Motor or HP Sensor Detection condition timing When failure of the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller lifting mechanism was detected When lifting of the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller was not completed within the specified period of time after the start of lifting Movement symptom While failure has occurred an alarm has occurred the target ...

Page 659: ...ection condition timing When pickup jam occurred multiple times in the Cassette 3 Movement symptom There is a possibility that pickup jam occurs frequently Measures Check the life of the Pickup Roller Feed Roller Separation Roller of the Cassette 3 Check that there is no paper lint at the pickup slot Replace the Pickup Roller if necessary 04 0014 Cassette 4 pickup retry error A Operation B Cause C...

Page 660: ...if the Lifter Plate stops at the bottom of the receptacle 04 1539 Paper Surface Sensor alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Cause Deck Lifter Motor alarm The lifter cannot be raised Detection condition timing The Paper Surface Sensor was not turned ON within the specified period of time when raising the lifter Movement symptom While failure has occurred an alarm has occurred the target paper source ...

Page 661: ...osition of the Lifter Plate Check for any improper connection caught harness and disconnection of the Bottom Sensor PS9 and the Lower Limit Detection Switch SW3 Execute service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR DK RCV and check if the machine is recovered If the machine is not recovered replace the Bottom Sensor PS9 and the Lower Limit Detection Switch SW3 04 1586 Deck interlock alarm A Operation B Cause...

Page 662: ...as detected Detection condition timing When detecting the upper limit three times Movement symptom While failure has occurred an alarm has occurred the target paper source cannot be used because it is in no paper state Measures Check for any foreign matter in the receptacle Check the connector of the Pickup Unit Check the Upper Limit Sensor of the Pickup Unit Check the Pickup Roller of the Pickup ...

Page 663: ... 5 Disconnect and then connect the connector J306 of the Font Driver PCB UN3 6 Disconnect and then connect the connector J301 of the Front Driver PCB UN3 7 Disconnect and then connect the connector J111 of the DC Controller UN1 8 Replace the Drum Unit M 9 Replace the Front Driver PCB UN3 09 0012 Drum memory detection error C A Operation B Cause C Remedy Cause The memory of the Drum Unit C could no...

Page 664: ...roller 10 0007 Patch Sensor error 2 A Operation B Cause C Remedy Movement Patch control not to execute Dmax real time multiple tone control and ATR control Cause S wave intensity of LED was out of the specified range soiled window failure of the sensor Measures 1 Clean the window of the Patch Sensor and execute light intensity correction Turn OFF and then ON the main power and execute the correcti...

Page 665: ...ner M could not be detected 1 Remove and then install the Toner Bottle 2 Check for any scar or soiling on the memory area of the Toner Bottle 3 Check the connector between the Bottle New Old Sensor M UN67 and the DC Controller PCB 4 Check for any soiling or damage on the Bottle New Old Sensor M UN67 5 Replace the Toner Bottle M 10 0093 Toner memory detection alarm C A Operation B Cause C Remedy Ca...

Page 666: ...dy Turn OFF and then ON the main power 31 0020 The configuration of an option controlled by the RCON has been changed A Operation B Cause C Remedy Due to a change in the configuration related to the scanner a change in the hardware configuration which requires turning OFF and then ON the power was detected Detection condition timing At the time of startup only Remedy Turn OFF and then ON the main ...

Page 667: ... is open circuit 4 Replace the Environment Sensor UN50 5 Replace the DC Controller PCB 31 0053 External Environment Sensor humidity upper limit detection alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Cause External Temperature Sensor error A temperature higher than the specified value was detected Detection condition timing Detection is always performed and an alarm occurs when a value that exceeds the thres...

Page 668: ...ector of the Internal Temperature Sensor UN22 2 Disconnect and then connect the connector J171 of the DC Controller PCB 3 Check if the harness of the Internal Temperature Sensor is open circuit 4 Replace the Internal Temperature Sensor UN22 5 Replace the DC Controller PCB 31 0106 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 31 0116 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 31 0126 For R D A Operation B Cause C...

Page 669: ...egistration Detection Sensor is soiled 4 Check if the connector of the Registration Detection Sensor is disconnected 5 If the measures 1 to 4 do not solve the problem replace the Registration Detection Sensor 40 0070 Reserve A Operation B Cause C Remedy 40 0071 Reserve A Operation B Cause C Remedy 40 0072 Reserve A Operation B Cause C Remedy 40 0073 Reserve A Operation B Cause C Remedy 40 0076 Res...

Page 670: ... paper lint disconnect and then connect the connectors replace the Double Feed Detection PCB replace the RCON DF Driver PCB replace the harnesses 61 0002 Finisher Staple Free Stapling alarm Fin H1 Y1 A Operation B Cause C Remedy Cause The staple free staple unit is broken Operation Operation stops as jam After jam processing the paper is delivered without stapling until a job is finished Recovery ...

Page 671: ...onnection error of network linked service Detection condition timing Movement symptom During data conversion process using network linked service the LAN Cable is physically removed or communication with the server is not available due to an error in the communication path or the conversion server Measures Check if the LAN Cable is properly connected If the LAN Cable is properly connected check th...

Page 672: ...Service Mode 8 Overview 659 COPIER 675 FEEDER 1070 SORTER 1075 BOARD 1096 ...

Page 673: ... MODELIST and MODELIST CLASSIC Press the button to display the initial screen of each mode The differences between these modes are described below Top screen MODELIST In this mode functions for referring to each item in service mode etc are available Updater This button is used to access the CDS and UGW servers and update system software BACKUP This button is used to back up the service mode setti...

Page 674: ...yed Operation Check of Electrical Components In situation mode of service mode among electrical components used motors fans solenoids and clutches operation of those that can operate alone can be checked on the Parts Check screen NOTE The service mode used below utilizes the system where electrical components used are operated by control signals sent from the DC Controller If a control signal is s...

Page 675: ...ed device whose operation can be checked is displayed 4 Select the electrical component you want to operate and then press the Start button to send a signal for driving the selected electrical component for a specified period of time from the DC Controller 5 ACTIVE is displayed while the electrical component is driven After the electrical component has been driven for a specified period of time OK...

Page 676: ... i Press the button to display the screen showing the locations of electrical components 8 Service Mode 662 ...

Page 677: ...f service mode the searchability of an electrical component has been improved Moreover the signal input output I O state of the electrical components sensors motors fans etc in use can be checked on the screen 1 Start service mode 2 Select SITUATION 3 On the SITUATION MODE screen select Sensor Check 8 Service Mode 663 ...

Page 678: ...nsor of the host machine press the button red dotted frame at COPIER P SENSOR Electrical parts classification Device classification 5 A list of electrical component types for the selected device is displayed 6 Select an electrical component to display the details in the frame red dotted frame at the bottom of the screen 8 Service Mode 664 ...

Page 679: ...an CAUTION This setting is enabled without restarting the host machine After setting the password the following screen will be displayed by accessing service mode Therefore when the PSWD SW is set to 2 system administrator service technician enter the system administrator password System Manager ID and System Manager PIN in Settings Registrations Management Settings User Management System Manager ...

Page 680: ...play Level 1 2 Switching of screens between Level 1 and Level 2 becomes easier By pressing LEVEL 1 at the upper right of the screen while Level 1 screen is displayed the screen is switched to Level 2 screen Service Mode Backup Adjustment is made to every machine at the time of shipment to write the adjustment value in the service label When replacing the DC Controller PCB or clearing RAM the adjus...

Page 681: ...ultiple service data such as P PRINT and HIST PRINT are saved in the HDD of the host machine it will be exported collectively to SST or a USB flash drive It can be exported to SST or a USB flash drive by entering download mode even when the host machine has stopped because of no papers NOTE Service print data cannot be output when an error has occurred When connecting USB devices that run on exter...

Page 682: ...tails on print job history 100 jobs PJH P 2 Output of details on print job history all jobs USBH PRT Output of USB device information report Moving the file in service mode Preparation USB memory device FAT32 format file system with no password locks Overall flow 1 Selecting RPT FILE Select service mode Copier Function MISC P RPT FILE and then press OK 2 Generating report file After the ACTIVE bli...

Page 683: ... image similar to the image output on paper may be displayed in some cases Moving the file in download mode Preparation USB memory device FAT32 format file system with no password locks Overall flow 1 Selecting RPT FILE Select service mode Copier Function MISC P RPT FILE and then press OK 2 Generating report file After the ACTIVE blinks for 3 to 4 minutes generation of a report file is complete as...

Page 684: ...ownloaded file is opened as plain text the paragraphs are misaligned which makes it difficult to read the data When the file is dragged to WordPad an image similar to the image output on paper may be displayed in some cases Moving the service report file to a PC using SST 1 Start up the SST 2 Select the model 1 and the type of system software 2 Single then check the network settings and click STAR...

Page 685: ...3 Click Upload Data 4 Select P PRINT RPT txt and click Start 5 Select the name of the Folder to store and as necessary a brief description then click Save 6 Click OK 8 Service Mode 671 ...

Page 686: ...ion called Remote Operation Viewer for remote control via a network This option enables a service technician to perform maintenance on the machine from a remote location However the same screen is displayed on the Remote Operation Viewer screen and the Control Panel during the work which carries the following risks The screen being operated can be seen by the user During remote operation the user ...

Page 687: ... on the service mode top screen Exit Remote Operation Viewer The remote access is disconnected due to a network failure etc The machine is shut down power down or restarted If this function is disabled while the service mode is being operated the service mode is forcibly exited and the previous screen is displayed However the service mode is not forcibly terminated if the Updater screen has been a...

Page 688: ...ling this function is shown below 1 Perform one of the following operations Access the service mode press LUI MASK and check that the button is disabled has turned gray Exit the Remote Operation Viewer Disconnect the network disconnect the network cable disable the network function etc Shut down or restart the machine 8 Service Mode 674 ...

Page 689: ...99 ECO 1 Display of ECO ID PCB firmware version Detail To display the firmware version of the ECO ID PCB Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SORTER 1 Display of FIN CONT firmware version Detail To display the firmware version of Finisher Controller PCB Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Displ...

Page 690: ...ANG DE 1 Display of German language file version Detail To display the version of German language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG IT 1 Display of Italian language file version Detail To display the version of Italian language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only ...

Page 691: ...KO 2 Display of Korean language file version Detail To display the version of Korean language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG NL 2 Display of Dutch language file version Detail To display the version of Dutch language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display ...

Page 692: ...01 to 99 99 LANG ZH 2 Dspl of Chinese language file ver smpl Detail To display the version of Chinese language file simplified Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 ECO ID 2 Display of ECO ID code Detail To display the ECO ID code Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set ...

Page 693: ...When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 MEDIA JA 2 Dspl of Japanese media information ver Detail To display the version of Japanese media information Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 MEDIA EN 2 Dspl of English media information ver Detail To display the ...

Page 694: ...DIA CS 2 Dspl of Czech media information version Detail To display the version of Czech media information Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 MEDIA EL 2 Dspl of Greek media information version Detail To display the version of Greek media information Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display ...

Page 695: ...2 Dspl of Polish media information version Detail To display the version of Polish media information Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 MEDIA PT 2 Dspl of Portuguese media information ver Detail To display the version of Portuguese media information Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display...

Page 696: ...re Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 MEDIA CA 2 Dspl of Catalan media information ver Detail To display the version of Catalan media information Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 FAX1 1 Display of 1 line FAX PCB ROM version Detail To display the ROM version of 1 line FAX PCB N...

Page 697: ...S LNG GR 1 Dspl of service mode German file version Detail To display the version of German language file in service mode Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 S LNG SP 1 Dspl of service mode Spanish file ver Detail To display the version of Spanish language file in service mode Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set...

Page 698: ...f COPY appli Chinese file ver trad Detail To display the traditional Chinese language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 COPY KO 2 Dspl of COPY appli Korean file version Detail To display the Korean language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the fir...

Page 699: ...PY appli Norwegian file ver Detail To display the Norwegian language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 COPY PL 2 Dspl of COPY appli Polish file version Detail To display the Polish language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Ope...

Page 700: ... of COPY appli Romanian file version Detail To display the Romanian language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 COPY SK 2 Dspl of COPY appli Slovak file version Detail To display the Slovak language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj...

Page 701: ...pli Euskera file ver Detail To display the Euskera language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SEND FR 1 Dspl of SEND appli French file version Detail To display the French language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Meth...

Page 702: ...spl of SEND appli Danish file version Detail To display the Danish language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SEND EL 2 Dspl of SEND appli Greek file version Detail To display the Greek language file version of the SEND application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Ad...

Page 703: ... appli Russian file version Detail To display the Russian language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SEND SL 2 Dspl of SEND appli Slovenian file ver Detail To display the Slovenian language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Ope...

Page 704: ... Dspl of SEND appli Catalan file version Detail To display the Catalan language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SEND TH 2 Dspl of SEND appli Thai file version Detail To display the Thai language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj ...

Page 705: ...e Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 INTRO DE 1 Dspl of usful feat intro German file ver Detail To display the version of German language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 INTRO ES 1 Dspl useful feat intro Spanish file ver Detail To display t...

Page 706: ...stonian file ver Detail To display the version of Estonian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 INTRO FI 2 Dspl useful feat intro Finnish file ver Detail To display the version of Finnish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use Case When...

Page 707: ...o Swedish file ver Detail To display the version of Swedish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 INTRO ID 2 Dspl of useful feat intro Indon file ver Detail To display the version of Indonesian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use Case...

Page 708: ...o Vietnamese file ver Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 INTRO AR 2 Dspl useful func intro Arabic file ver Detail To display the version of Arabic language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use Case...

Page 709: ...hinese file ver smpl Detail To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for custom menu application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 CSTMN TW 2 Dspl custom menu Chinese file ver trad Detail To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for custom menu application Use Case When upgrading th...

Page 710: ...tom menu Dutch file version Detail To display the version of Dutch language file for custom menu application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 CSTMN NO 2 Dspl of custom menu Norwegian file ver Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file for custom menu application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj S...

Page 711: ...f custom menu Croatian file ver Detail To display the version of Croatian language file for custom menu application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 CSTMN RM 2 Dspl of custom menu Romanian file ver Detail To display the version of Romanian language file for custom menu application Use Case When upgrading the firmware ...

Page 712: ...tom menu Hindi file ver Detail To display the version of Hindi language file for custom menu application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 CSTMN EU 2 Dspl of custom menu Euskera file ver Detail To display the version of Euskera language file for custom menu application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Opera...

Page 713: ...2 Dspl of accessibility Czech file version Detail To display the version of Czech language file for Accessibility application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 ACSBT DA 2 Dspl of accessibility Danish file ver Detail To display the version of Danish language file for Accessibility application Use Case When upgrading the...

Page 714: ...bility Portuguese file ver Detail To display the version of Portuguese language file for Accessibility application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 ACSBT RU 2 Dspl of accessibility Russian file ver Detail To display the version of Russian language file for Accessibility application Use Case When upgrading the firmware...

Page 715: ...f accessibility Turkish file ver Detail To display the version of Turkish language file for Accessibility application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 ACSBT CA 2 Dspl of accessibility Catalan file ver Detail To display the version of Catalan language file for Accessibility application Use Case When upgrading the firmw...

Page 716: ...1 to 99 99 Supplement Memo ERS Error Recovery System ERS IT 1 Display of ERS Italian file version Detail To display the version of Italian language file for ERS application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo ERS Error Recovery System ERS DE 1 Display of ERS German file version Detail To display the versi...

Page 717: ...h file version Detail To display the version of Danish language file for ERS application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo ERS Error Recovery System ERS EL 2 Display of ERS Greek file version Detail To display the version of Greek language file for ERS application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Ad...

Page 718: ... version Detail To display the version of Polish language file for ERS application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo ERS Error Recovery System ERS PT 2 Display of ERS Portuguese file ver Detail To display the version of Portuguese language file for ERS application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Ad...

Page 719: ...file version Detail To display the version of Croatian language file for ERS application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo ERS Error Recovery System ERS RM 2 Display of ERS Romanian file version Detail To display the version of Romanian language file for ERS application Use Case When upgrading the firmw...

Page 720: ...nguage file for ERS application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo ERS Error Recovery System BCT 1 Display of self diagnosis tool version Detail To display the version of self diagnosis tool Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 ...

Page 721: ...X appli Chinese file ver trad Detail To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 BOX KO 2 Display of BOX appli Korean file version Detail To display the version of Korean language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the f...

Page 722: ...li Norwegian file version Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 BOX PL 2 Display of BOX appli Polish file version Detail To display the version of Polish language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Se...

Page 723: ...l of BOX appli Romanian file version Detail To display the version of Romanian language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 BOX SK 2 Display of BOX appli Slovak file version Detail To display the version of Slovak language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmw...

Page 724: ...ile version Detail To display the German language file version of job hold application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 HOLD ES 1 Dspl of job hold Spanish file version Detail To display the Spanish language file version of job hold application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method...

Page 725: ...d Finnish file version Detail To display the Finnish language file version of job hold application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 HOLD HU 2 Dspl of job hold Hungarian file version Detail To display the Hungarian language file version of job hold application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Se...

Page 726: ...job hold Bulgarian file version Detail To display the Bulgarian language file version of job hold application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 HOLD CR 2 Dspl of job hold Croatian file version Detail To display the Croatian language file version of job hold application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmwa...

Page 727: ... BOX AR 2 Dspl of BOX appli Arabic file ver Detail To display the version of Arabic language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 BOX MS 2 Dspl of BOX appli Malay file ver Detail To display the version of Malay language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware ...

Page 728: ...isplay the version of Danish language file for Remote UI Portal Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 RPTL EL 2 Dspl RUI Portal Greek file version Detail To display the version of Greek language file for Remote UI Portal Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 0...

Page 729: ...ortal Russian file version Detail To display the version of Russian language file for Remote UI Portal Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 RPTL SL 2 Dspl RUI Portal Slovenian file version Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file for Remote UI Portal Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Met...

Page 730: ...spl RUI Portal Catalan file version Detail To display the version of Catalan language file for Remote UI Portal Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 RPTL TH 2 Dspl RUI Portal Thai file version Detail To display the version of Thai language file for Remote UI Portal Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Meth...

Page 731: ...ains the function of secured print PPA CA 2 Dspl of PPA appli Catalan file version Detail To display the version of Catalan language file for PPA application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo PPA Personal Print Application A function to hold print job It contai...

Page 732: ...A Personal Print Application A function to hold print job It contains the function of secured print PPA ES 1 Dspl of PPA appli Spanish file version Detail To display the version of Spanish language file for PPA application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo PPA ...

Page 733: ...A Personal Print Application A function to hold print job It contains the function of secured print PPA HU 2 Dspl of PPA appli Hungarian file version Detail To display the version of Hungarian language file for PPA application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo ...

Page 734: ... Personal Print Application A function to hold print job It contains the function of secured print PPA NO 2 Dspl of PPA appli Norwegian file version Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file for PPA application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo P...

Page 735: ...o PPA Personal Print Application A function to hold print job It contains the function of secured print PPA SL 2 Dspl of PPA appli Slovenian file version Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file for PPA application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement M...

Page 736: ... upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo PPA Personal Print Application A function to hold print job It contains the function of secured print PPA ZH 2 Dspl of PPA appli Chinese file ver smpl Detail To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for PPA application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use...

Page 737: ...e version Detail To display the version of Danish language file for mobile application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 DEA DE 2 Dspl of mobile appli German file version Detail To display the version of German language file for mobile application JAVA UI is displayed when no ...

Page 738: ...version Detail To display the version of French language file for mobile application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 DEA HI 2 Dspl of mobile appli Hindi file version Detail To display the version of Hindi language file for mobile application JAVA UI is displayed when no file...

Page 739: ...rsion Detail To display the version of Dutch language file for mobile application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 DEA NO 2 Dspl mobile appli Norwegian file version Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file for mobile application JAVA UI is displayed when no fi...

Page 740: ...file version Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file for mobile application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 DEA SV 2 Dspl mobile appli Swedish file version Detail To display the version of Swedish language file for mobile application JAVA UI is displayed whe...

Page 741: ...lay Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo Status monitor application An application to display a screen when the Status Monitor Cancel key is pressed SYSMO BU 2 Dspl status mon appli Bulgarian file ver Detail To display the version of Bulgarian language file for status monitor application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Ra...

Page 742: ...itor application An application to display a screen when the Status Monitor Cancel key is pressed SYSMO EL 2 Dspl status mon appli Greek file version Detail To display the version of Greek language file for the status monitor application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo Status monitor applicati...

Page 743: ...nitor application An application to display a screen when the Status Monitor Cancel key is pressed SYSMO HI 2 Dspl status mon appli Hindi file version Detail To display the version of Hindi language file for status monitor application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo Status monitor application ...

Page 744: ...monitor application An application to display a screen when the Status Monitor Cancel key is pressed SYSMO NL 2 Dspl status mon appli Dutch file version Detail To display the version of Dutch language file for status monitor application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo Status monitor applicatio...

Page 745: ...tus monitor application An application to display a screen when the Status Monitor Cancel key is pressed SYSMO SK 2 Dspl status mon appli Slovak file ver Detail To display the version of Slovak language file for status monitor application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo Status monitor applicat...

Page 746: ...n the Status Monitor Cancel key is pressed SYSMO VN 2 Dspl sta mon appli Vietnamese file ver Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file for status monitor application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo Status monitor application An application to display a screen when the Status Mo...

Page 747: ...e Browser button is displayed on the service mode initial screen The value of BRWS STS switches whenever BRWS ACT is executed but ON OFF of service browser is enabled after reboot If the service browser does not start even though the value of BRWS STS is 1 turn OFF ON the main power switch Use Case When checking the usage status of service browser Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Caution Th...

Page 748: ... is connected Copy is not available 1 Card Reader is not connected or card is inserted while the Card Reader is connected Copy is available RAM 1 Display of MNCON PCB memory capacity Detail To display the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB Use Case When checking the memory capacity of the machine Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Unit MB COINROBO 1 Dspl of Coin Manager connection sta...

Page 749: ...r PCB Use Case When checking the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Unit MB ANALOG COPIER DISPLAY ANALOG TEMP 1 Display of outside temperature Detail To display the temperature outside the machine This is measured by the Environment Sensor 2 that detects the outside air Use Case When checking the temperature outside the machine Adj Set Operate Method...

Page 750: ...r center temperature Detail To display the center temperature of the Fixing Heater detected by the Main Thermistor 1 Use Case When checking the temperature at the center of Fixing Heater Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 300 Unit deg C Amount of Change per Unit 1 FIX E2 1 Dspl Fixing Heater front edg temperature Detail To display the front edge temperature of the F...

Page 751: ...ge temperature Detail To display the front edge temperature of the Fixing Film detected by the Sub Thermistor 3 Use Case When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Film Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 300 Unit deg C Amount of Change per Unit 1 FIX R 1 Dspl Fixing Film rear edge temperature Detail To display the rear edge temperature of the Fixing Film detec...

Page 752: ...r the log information for the appropriate control COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR 1TR CLR If the two values are both small the Primary Transfer Roller may have reached the end of life Use Case When estimating the life of Primary Transfer Roller based on the displayed value Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 900 Unit uA Appropriate Target Value 50 700 Related Service Mode COPI...

Page 753: ...the end of life Use Case When identifying the cause at the occurrence of an image failure Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 900 Unit uA Appropriate Target Value 50 700 Amount of Change per Unit 1 CCD COPIER DISPLAY CCD TARGET B 2 Shading target value B Detail To display the shading target value of Blue Continuous display of 0 minimum or 65535 maximum is considered ...

Page 754: ... Adj Set Range 0 to 65535 Appropriate Target Value 0 143 GAIN OG 2 Gain level of Read Sensor odd bit G frt Detail To display the Green gain level adjustment value in odd numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit for front side Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit Reader Controller PCB When the value is out of the target value range image failure or...

Page 755: ...ng to the value Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB At scanned image failure Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 65535 Appropriate Target Value 0 143 GAIN ER 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit R frt Detail To display the Red gain level adjustment value in even numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit for front side Continuous display of upper ...

Page 756: ...lor scanning mode Use Case When image failure occurs at back side scanning in color mode Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 55 to 275 Appropriate Target Value 100 275 Supplement Memo LED cannot be replaced individually Replace the Scanner Unit OFST BW 2 Dspl Read Sensor offset value B W front Detail To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit for fr...

Page 757: ...isplay the Reading Sensor B W gain level adjustment value 4 of Scanner Unit for front side Use Case When image failure occurs at front side scanning in black mode Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 65535 Appropriate Target Value 0 143 GAIN2BW1 2 Read Sensor gain level adj VL1 B W back Detail To display the Reading Sensor B W gain level adjustment value 1 of Scanner ...

Page 758: ...lay of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit Reader Controller PCB Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB At scanned image failure Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 65535 Appropriate Target Value 0 143 GAIN2 OB 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor odd bit B back Detail To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd numbered bit on the Read...

Page 759: ...pper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit Reader Controller PCB Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB At scanned image failure Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 65535 Appropriate Target Value 0 143 OFST2 CL 2 Dspl Read Sensor offset value clr back Detail To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit for back side in colo...

Page 760: ... DENS DENS Y 1 Dspl of Y developer density change ratio Detail To display difference between Y color developer density and the target value in percentage Intolerable difference will trigger E020 This may be caused by deterioration of the developer failure open circuit of the ATR Sensor or error in toner supply system The value is updated upon print operation after power on Use Case When the densit...

Page 761: ...n Use Case When the density varies dramatically When the density is unstable even after gradation correction Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 7 to 7 Unit Appropriate Target Value 4 5 4 5 Related Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY DENS SGNL C Amount of Change per Unit 1 DENS K 1 Dspl Bk developer density change ratio Detail To display difference between Bk color developer dens...

Page 762: ...ated by ATR control Use Case When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 300 700 D M TRGT 2 Dspl of M patch target density ATR ctrl Detail To display the target density for M patch image created by ATR control Use Case When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj ...

Page 763: ...L K 1 Display of Bk color developer density Detail To display the measured value of Bk color developer density The density is measured with the ATR Sensor for each job The value is updated upon print operation after power on Use Case When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 255 Appropriate Target Value 20 230 Related Service Mode COPI...

Page 764: ...voltage Detail To display the latest primary charging DC voltage of Y color Use Case When decrease in density fogging occurs Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 1500 to 0 Unit V Appropriate Target Value 900 400 Amount of Change per Unit 1 CHG DC M 2 Dspl M color primary charge DC voltage Detail To display the latest primary charging DC voltage of M color Use Case When dec...

Page 765: ...veloping Assembly at low density or fogging deterioration Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 255 Appropriate Target Value 20 230 DENS M H 2 Dspl of M clr TD ratio log ATR control Detail To display the latest 8 M toner density log data TD ratio detected by the ATR Sensor at ATR control Sharp change in values may indicate open circuit failure of ATR Sensor whereas gra...

Page 766: ...s gradual change may indicate failure in toner supply system This is particularly caused by Patch Sensor Use Case When analyzing the cause of E020 Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 200 900 DS S K H 2 Dspl of Bk color patch image density log Detail To display the latest 8 Bk patch image density log data It is the reference for judging t...

Page 767: ...in the Developing Assembly at low density or fogging deterioration Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 255 Appropriate Target Value 20 230 SPL LG K 2 Display of Bk color toner supply log Detail To display the latest 8 Bk toner supply log data Each data represents the number of toner blocks supplied per paper Use Case When checking the toner supply status at low densi...

Page 768: ... At replacement of ITB related parts Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 600 to 600 Unit pulse Appropriate Target Value 350 350 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P ITB INIT COPIER DISPLAY MISC ITB POS Amount of Change per Unit 1 TNRB IDY 1 Display of Y color Toner Container ID Detail To display the ID of Y color Toner Container that is installed to the machine Use...

Page 769: ...y Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 0 700 TGT A M 2 Multi tone scrnA M patch tgt VL H SPD Detail To display the M color patch target value of screen A in real time multiple tone control at high speed Among 10 gradation patch images formed by each dithering method error diffusion low screen ruling high screen ruling 5th patch image is the target When hue variation occurs and the disp...

Page 770: ...dj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 0 700 TGT B M 2 Multi tone scrnB M patch tgt VL H SPD Detail To display the M color patch target value of screen B in real time multiple tone control at high speed Among 10 gradation patch images formed by each dithering method error diffusion low screen ruling high screen ruling 5th patch image is the ...

Page 771: ...Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 0 700 TGT C M 2 Multi tone scrnC M patch tgt VL H SPD Detail To display the M color patch target value of screen C in real time multiple tone control at high speed Among 10 gradation patch images formed by each dithering method error diffusion low screen ruling high screen ruling 5th patch image is the...

Page 772: ...of screen A in real time multiple tone control at middle speed Among 10 gradation patch images formed by each dithering method error diffusion low screen ruling high screen ruling 5th patch image is the target When hue variation occurs and the displayed value is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset the target value Check the Patch Sensor if not corrected Use Case ...

Page 773: ... Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 0 700 TGT A Y3 2 Multi tone scrnA Y patch tgt VL L SPD Detail To display the Y color patch target value of screen A in real time multiple tone control at low speed Among 10 gradation patch images formed by each dithering method error diffusion low screen ruling high screen ruling 5th patch image is the target Use Case When hue variation occ...

Page 774: ...me multiple tone control at low speed Among 10 gradation patch images formed by each dithering method error diffusion low screen ruling high screen ruling 5th patch image is the target Use Case When hue variation occurs Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 0 700 TGT B C3 2 Multi tone scrnB C patch tgt VL L SPD Detail To display the C colo...

Page 775: ...j Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 0 700 TGT B C2 2 Multi tone scrnB C patch tgt VL M SPD Detail To display the C color patch target value of screen B in real time multiple tone control at middle speed Among 10 gradation patch images formed by each dithering method error diffusion low screen ruling high screen ruling 5th patch image is th...

Page 776: ...j Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 0 700 TGT C C2 2 Multi tone scrnC C patch tgt VL M SPD Detail To display the C color patch target value of screen C in real time multiple tone control at middle speed Among 10 gradation patch images formed by each dithering method error diffusion low screen ruling high screen ruling 5th patch image is th...

Page 777: ...ing 5th patch image is the target Use Case When hue variation occurs Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 0 700 TGT C K3 2 Multi tone scrnC Bk patch tgt VL L SPD Detail To display the Bk color patch target value of screen C in real time multiple tone control at low speed Among 10 gradation patch images formed by each dithering method erro...

Page 778: ...isplay Adj Set Range 0 to 4 1 Y 2 M 3 C 4 Bk 0 Others REP S Y 1 Dspl Drum Unit replacement station Y Detail To display the color of the station where the Drum Unit has been replaced Use Case When outputting the drum report When checking the station information Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 4 1 Y 2 M 3 C 4 Bk 0 Others DRSTS C COPIER DISPLAY DRSTS C DR I D C 1 Ds...

Page 779: ...isplay Adj Set Range 0 to 4 1 Y 2 M 3 C 4 Bk 0 Others REP S C 1 Dspl Drum Unit replacement station C Detail To display the color of the station where the Drum Unit has been replaced Use Case When outputting the drum report When checking the station information Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 4 1 Y 2 M 3 C 4 Bk 0 Others DRSTS M COPIER DISPLAY DRSTS M DR I D M 1 Ds...

Page 780: ...play Adj Set Range 0 to 4 1 Y 2 M 3 C 4 Bk 0 Others REP S M 1 Dspl Drum Unit replacement station M Detail To display the color of the station where the Drum Unit has been replaced Use Case When outputting the drum report When checking the station information Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 4 1 Y 2 M 3 C 4 Bk 0 Others DRSTS K COPIER DISPLAY DRSTS K DR I D K 1 Dspl...

Page 781: ...e Drum Unit was installed first Use Case When outputting the drum report When checking the station information Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 4 1 Y 2 M 3 C 4 Bk 0 Others REP S K 1 Dspl Drum Unit replacement station Bk Detail To display the color of the station where the Drum Unit has been replaced Use Case When outputting the drum report When checking the statio...

Page 782: ...21 L OPEN 5 Front Door Sensor PS18 L OPEN 4 3 2 1 0 P019 15 0 P020 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 ITB Displacement Sensor PCB Sensor 5 UN60_5 H ON 4 ITB Displacement Sensor PCB Sensor 4 UN60_4 H ON 3 ITB Displacement Sensor PCB Sensor 3 UN60_3 H ON 2 ITB Displacement Sensor PCB Sensor 2 UN60_2 H ON 1 ITB Displacement Sensor PCB Sensor 1 UN60_1 H ON 0 ITB Steering Sensor PS24 H ON P021 15 14 13 12 11 ...

Page 783: ... Nip Sensor PS74 H ON 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Transparency Sensor PS77 H ON 0 Multi Purpose Tray Pullout Sensor PS72 H ON P023 15 Pre Reverse Sensor PS57 H ON 14 Fixing Inlet Sensor PS34 H ON 13 12 11 10 Third Delivery Sensor PS43 H ON 9 Second Delivery Sensor PS42 H ON 8 Reverse Sensor PS39 H ON 7 Duplex Inlet Sensor PS40 H ON 6 5 4 3 2 Duplex Paper Sensor PS38 H ON 1 Fixing Arch Sensor 2 PS36 H ON 0 F...

Page 784: ...e Switch A_SW2 SW8_2 L ON 2 Cassette 2 Size Switch B_SW0 SW9_0 L ON 1 Cassette 2 Size Switch B_SW1 SW9_1 L ON 0 Cassette 2 Size Switch B_SW2 SW9_2 L ON P028 15 Cassette 2 Paper Surface Sensor PS69 L Paper present 14 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor PS50 L Paper present 13 Cassette 1 Paper Surface Sensor PS68 L Paper present 12 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor PS49 L Paper present 11 Right Lower Door Sensor PS19 L O...

Page 785: ...030 15 0 P031 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bottle Rotation Sensor C PS62 L ON 0 P032 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Toner Supply Sensor M PS2 L ON 2 1 Waste Toner Container Detection Switch SW10 H ON 0 First Delivery Tray Full Sensor PS44 L Full P033 15 14 13 Bottle Rotation Sensor M PS61 L ON 12 11 Toner Supply Sensor Y PS1 L ON 10 9 Bottle Rotation Sensor Y PS60 L ON 8 7 6 8 Service Mode...

Page 786: ... Sensor Bk PS63 L ON 2 1 0 P035 15 14 13 Toner Supply Sensor C PS3 L ON 12 Cassette 2 Pre Registration Sensor PS56 H ON 11 Cassette 1 Pre Registration Sensor PS55 H ON 10 9 8 7 6 Between Cassette 1 2 Sensor PS76 H ON 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reader R CON P001 to P006 Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P001 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 8 Service Mode 772 ...

Page 787: ... P002 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Scanner Unit HP Sensor PS_A1 H ON 0 P003 15 0 P004 15 0 P005 15 0 P006 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Original Size Sensor Inch PS_R2 L Paper 0 Original Size Sensor AB PS_R1 L Paper ADF R CON P002 FEEDER P002 to P009 R CON Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P002 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 8 Service Mode 773 ...

Page 788: ...0 9 8 7 Cover Open Closed Sensor PS_A5 H OPEN 6 Large Small Sensor PS_R3 L ON 5 4 3 2 1 0 P003 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 LTR R LGL Sensor PS_A3 H Paper 2 AB Inch Sensor PS_A4 H Paper 1 Delivery Tray Sensor PS_A2 H Paper 0 Original Sensor PS_N1 L Paper P004 15 0 P005 15 0 P006 15 0 P007 15 0 P008 15 0 P009 15 14 13 12 11 10 8 Service Mode 774 ...

Page 789: ... 4 Pullout Sensor PS102 H Paper 8 Cassette 4 Pickup Nip Sensor PS104 H Paper 7 Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor A PS109 H ON 6 Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor B PS110 H ON 5 Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor A PS111 H ON 4 Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor B PS112 H ON 3 Cassette 4 Size Switch A_SW2 SW103_2 L ON 2 1 0 Cassette 3 Size Switch A_SW2 SW101_2 L ON P037 15 Cassette 3 Size Switch A_SW1 SW101_1 L ON 1...

Page 790: ...acity Cassette Pickup Nip Sensor PS103 H Paper 11 Right Cassette Paper Sensor PS121 H Paper 10 High Capacity Cassette Paper Level Sensor PS118 H ON 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P037 15 0 P038 15 Right Door Open Close Switch SW105 L OPEN 14 13 High Capacity Cassette Open Close Detect Sensor PS123 H OPEN 12 High Capacity Cassette Upper Limit Sensor PS113 L Paper 11 Left Cassette Paper Sensor PS120 H Paper 10...

Page 791: ...t sensor 1 PS4 H ON 0 P013 15 Deck pull out sensor PS2 H Paper 14 Deck pickup sensor PS1 H Paper 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P014 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Deck connection switch SW2 L Disengage 0 Compartment open close sensor PS8 H OPEN P015 15 Deck open sensing switch SW1 H ON 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 8 Service Mode 777 ...

Page 792: ...3 L ON 6 Deck lifter lower position sensor PS9 H ON 5 4 3 2 Separation roller sensor PS7 H ON 1 0 Inner Finisher H1 SORTER P001 to P006 Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P001 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Stack Tray HP Sensor PS14 H HP 1 0 P002 15 Stack Tray Paper Height Sensor PS9 L Paper 14 13 12 Processing Tray Paper Sensor PS6 H Paper 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 8 Service Mode 778 ...

Page 793: ... 13 Disengaging Sensor PS16 H Connect 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Manual Staple Sensor PS12 L Paper 3 Manual Staple Switch PCB PCB3 H ON 2 1 0 P005 15 14 13 12 11 Delivery Sensor PS1 H Paper 10 Stack Tray Lower Limit Sensor PS10 H ON 9 Stapler Shift HP Sensor PS11 H HP 8 Return Belt HP Sensor PS3 H HP 7 6 Clinch Motor Drive Detection Sensor PS13 H ON 5 4 3 2 1 Clinch HP Sensor PS15 H ON 0 P006 15 14 13 P...

Page 794: ...s P001 15 Buffer Sensor PS103 H Paper 14 13 Inlet Sensor PS101 H Paper 12 11 Delivery Sensor PS102 H Paper 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P002 15 Escape Delivery Sensor PS111 H Paper 14 13 12 11 10 9 Swing Guide HP Sensor PS119 H ON 8 7 6 5 4 Paper End Assist HP Sensor PS123 H ON 3 Manual Staple Switch SW103 H ON 2 1 0 P003 15 14 13 12 11 Processing Tray Paper Sensor PS114 H Paper 8 Service Mode 780 ...

Page 795: ... 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Front Cover Switch SW101 L ON 2 1 Paddle HP Sensor PS120 H ON 0 P005 15 0 P006 15 0 P007 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor PS117 H ON 7 6 Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor PS122 H ON 5 4 Return Roller HP Sensor PS121 H ON 3 2 1 Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor PS118 H ON 0 P008 15 0 P009 15 0 P010 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Service Mode 781 ...

Page 796: ...P013 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 Swing Guide Safety Switch SW102 H ON 4 3 2 1 Stack Tray HP Sensor PS106 H ON 0 Stack Tray Full Sensor 1 PS107 H FULL P014 15 0 P015 15 14 13 12 Staple free Binding HP Sensor PS129 H ON 11 Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor PS112 H ON 10 9 Stapler Shift HP Sensor PS124 H ON 8 Staple HP Sensor PS125 L ON 7 Stack Tray Full Sensor 2 PS108 H FULL 6 Stack Tray Full Sensor ...

Page 797: ...ON 12 11 10 9 Saddle Delivery Sensor PS203 H Paper 8 Saddle Paddle HP Sensor PS206 H ON 7 Front Saddle Stitcher Staple Sensor PS214 H ON 6 Rear Saddle Stitcher Staple Sensor PS213 H ON 5 Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor PS215 L ON 4 3 Saddle Delivery Tray Paper Sensor PS216 H Paper 2 1 Saddle Processing Tray Paper Sensor PS202 L Paper 0 2 4 Hole Puncher Unit A1 SORTER P051 to P052 Address bit Name Symbol...

Page 798: ...Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P009 15 14 13 Punch HP Sensor 1 S5 L ON 12 11 Horizontal Registration Sensor 4 PCB3 4 H Paper 10 Horizontal Registration Sensor 3 PCB3 3 H Paper 9 Horizontal Registration Sensor 2 PCB3 2 H Paper 8 Horizontal Registration Sensor 1 PCB3 1 H Paper 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P010 15 Punch Waste Box Sensor S4 H ON 14 13 12 11 Trailing Edge Sensor PCB3 5 H Paper 10 Punch HP Sensor 2...

Page 799: ... S1 H HP 0 P011 15 14 13 12 11 10 No 2 Path Sensor S2 H Paper 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Buffer Pass Unit L1 SORTER P065 Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P065 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 OPEN Detection Sensor PS403 L OPEN 1 Buffer Pass Exit Sensor PS402 L Paper 0 Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PS401 L Paper 8 Service Mode 785 ...

Page 800: ...splay Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 ADJ Y 1 Adj start pstn in book mode horz scan Detail To adjust the image reading start position in the horizontal scanning direction at copyboard reading When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Decrease the value when the non image width is larger than the standard...

Page 801: ... in horizontal scanning direction at DADF reading When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label As the value is incremented by 1 the image position is moved to the rear side by 0 1 mm Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Tu...

Page 802: ...bel As the value is incremented by 1 the image position is moved to the rear side by 0 1 mm Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Display Adj Set Ra...

Page 803: ...he value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data When replacing the Copyboard Glass Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Display Adj Set Range 1 to 9999 Default Value ...

Page 804: ...Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data When replacing the Scanner Unit for front side Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Display Adj Set Range 256 to 256 Unit line Default Value 0 Amou...

Page 805: ...PCB enter the value of service label When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit for front side execute COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL1 DF WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit for front side Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and th...

Page 806: ... to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Change per Unit 1 MTF2 M4 1 MTF value 4 entry horz scan front side Detail To enter the setting value 4 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM ...

Page 807: ... to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Change per Unit 1 MTF2 M8 1 MTF value 8 entry horz scan front side Detail To enter the setting value 8 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM ...

Page 808: ... to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Change per Unit 1 MTF2 S3 1 MTF value 3 entry vert scan front side Detail To enter the setting value 3 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM da...

Page 809: ... to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Change per Unit 1 MTF2 S7 1 MTF value 7 entry vert scan front side Detail To enter the setting value 7 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM da...

Page 810: ...K key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 256 to 256 Unit line Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 001 100DF2RG 2 Img Sensr RG color displace crrct back Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit for back side When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service...

Page 811: ...he main power switch Display Adj Set Range 1 to 2550 Default Value 2000 Amount of Change per Unit 1 DFCH2B10 1 Complex chart No 10 data B entry front Detail To derive the front back side linearity enter the Blue data on the front side of No 10 image in DADF complex chart Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Opera...

Page 812: ...Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Change per Unit 1 MTF M2 1 MTF value 2 entry horz scan back side Detail To enter the setting value 2 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Ente...

Page 813: ... to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Change per Unit 1 MTF M6 1 MTF value 6 entry horz scan back side Detail To enter the setting value 6 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM da...

Page 814: ...20 to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Change per Unit 1 MTF S1 1 MTF value 1 entry vert scan back side Detail To enter the setting value 1 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM da...

Page 815: ... to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Change per Unit 1 MTF S5 1 MTF value 5 entry vert scan back side Detail To enter the setting value 5 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data...

Page 816: ... switch Display Adj Set Range 20 to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Change per Unit 1 MTF S9 1 MTF value 9 entry vert scan back side Detail To enter the setting value 9 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Reader ...

Page 817: ...he main power switch Display Adj Set Range 1 to 2550 Default Value 2000 Amount of Change per Unit 1 DFCH B10 1 Complex chart No 10 data B entry back Detail To derive the front back side linearity enter the Blue data on the back side of No 10 image in DADF complex chart Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate...

Page 818: ...vice Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Change per Unit 1 MTF2 M11 1 MTF value 11 entry horz scan front side Detail To enter the setting value 11 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 En...

Page 819: ... to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Change per Unit 1 MTF2 S12 1 MTF value 12 entry vert scan front side Detail To enter the setting value 12 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM...

Page 820: ...20 to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Change per Unit 1 MTF S10 1 MTF value 10 entry vert scan back side Detail To enter the setting value 10 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM...

Page 821: ...d then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 1 to 2550 Default Value 2000 Amount of Change per Unit 1 DFCH2K10 1 Complex chart No 10 data B W entr frt Detail To derive the front back side linearity enter the B W data on the front side of No 10 image in DADF complex chart Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PC...

Page 822: ...eader Controller PCB clearing RAM data When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit for front side Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 1 to 2047 Default Value 1209 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL3 4 Amount of Change per Unit 1 DFTBK G 1 Shading target VL G entry back side Detail To ente...

Page 823: ... COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL1 DF WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data When replacing the Scanner Unit for back side Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 700 to 1400 Default Value 1156 Related Service Mod...

Page 824: ... Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit pixel Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 REG H K 1 Ruf adj Bk clr wrt start pstn horz scan Detail To adjust the write start position of Bk color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel Use Case When Bk color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negat...

Page 825: ...lue switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit pixel Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 32 REG V Y 1 Ruf adj Y clr wrt start pstn vert scan Detail To adjust the write start position of Y color image in the vertical scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel Use Case When Y color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs Adj Set Ope...

Page 826: ...lt Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 REG V M 1 Ruf adj M clr wrt start pstn vert scan Detail To adjust the write start position of M color image in the vertical scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel Use Case When M color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Rang...

Page 827: ...Default Value 0 REF Y 1 Y toner dens target VL entry Detail To enter the target value of ATR control for the ATR Sensor Y Be sure to check the value before clearing RAM and enter it again after RAM clear Use Case When checking the value before RAM clear and re entering it after RAM clear Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Disp...

Page 828: ...ause the density target value of D max control becomes out of the setting table due to environment change Adjust the offset of the M color density target value of D max control The setting is reset when auto gradation adjustment full adjustment is executed Use Case When an image failure occurs due to environment change Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by ke...

Page 829: ... adherence etc occur Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch 3 Make 50 prints of approx 10 image ratio e g COPIER TEST PG TYPE 16 4 times 4 Execute auto gradation adjustment full adjustment Caution Execute the auto gradation adjustment first to increase the density If you adjust the offset of the target v...

Page 830: ...auto gradation adjustment full adjustment is executed Use Case When an image failure occurs due to environment change Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this item only for the printer models Display Adj Set Range 128 to 128 Default Value 0 Additional Functions Mode Adjustment Maintenance ...

Page 831: ...s changed write the changed value in the service label Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1024 Unit V Amount of Change per Unit 0 01 CONT K 1 ATR Sensor Bk control voltage entry Detail To enter the density detection control voltage of the ATR Sensor Bk When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label As the value is changed by 1 the control voltage is changed by 0 01...

Page 832: ... increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel 0 0423 mm Use Case Upon user s request to reduce the margin When increasing the margin for transfer separation fixing separation Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1000 Unit pixel Default Value 59 Amount of Change per Unit 1 BLANK B 1 Adjustment of trailing edge margin Detail To adjust...

Page 833: ...djustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Amount of Change per Unit 10 VCONT M 2 Adj of M color contrast potential Detail To adjust the contrast potential Vcont for M color As the value is changed by 1 the contrast potential is changed by 10 V Image becomes darker Image becomes lighter When the value is too large paper winds around the Fixing Roller or a transfer...

Page 834: ...ment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Amount of Change per Unit 10 VCONT K 2 Adj of Bk color contrast potential Detail To adjust the contrast potential Vcont for Bk color As the value is changed by 1 the contrast potential is changed by 10 V Image becomes darker Image becomes lighter When the value is too large paper winds around the Fixing Roller or a transfer fa...

Page 835: ...stment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Amount of Change per Unit 5 VBACK M 2 Adj M color fogging removal potential Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for M color A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Correct Color Cast in Settings Registration to the setting value of this item is applied as the correction value As the va...

Page 836: ...tment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Amount of Change per Unit 5 VBACK K 2 Adj Bk color fogging removal potential Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Bk color A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Correct Color Cast in Settings Registration to the setting value of this item is applied as the correction value As the v...

Page 837: ... Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Display Adj Set Range 128 to 128 Default Value According to the adjustment value of the Reader at factory shi...

Page 838: ...uce density difference between devices Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 8 to 8 Default Value 0 ADJ M 1 Adjustment of color balance for M color Detail To adjust the default value of the color balance for M color when the density of M color varies between devices As the value is...

Page 839: ...match in Settings Registration Use Case When the background of a document cannot be read correctly When removal of the background cannot be performed correctly and a fogging like image appears Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 32 to 32 Default Value 0 OFST M 1 Adj M clr brit ar...

Page 840: ...kground cannot be performed correctly and a fogging like image appears Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 32 to 32 Default Value 0 LD OFS Y 2 Adj Y low dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Y color for copy operation As the valu...

Page 841: ...tting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage LD OFS C 2 Adj C low dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of C color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the setting value of this i...

Page 842: ...ting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage MD OFS Y 2 Adj Y mid dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Y color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the setting value of this...

Page 843: ...tting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage MD OFS C 2 Adj C mid dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of C color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the setting value of thi...

Page 844: ...of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage HD OFS Y 2 Adj Y hi dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Y color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the setting value of this item is appli...

Page 845: ...tting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage HD OFS C 2 Adj C hi dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of C color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the setting value of this i...

Page 846: ... value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage PL OFS Y 2 Adj Y clr low dens area clr balance PDL Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Y color at PDL print As the value is larger the image gets darker In case of data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box a value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in Access Store...

Page 847: ...tting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage PL OFS C 2 Adj C clr low dens area clr balance PDL Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of C color at PDL print As the value is larger the image gets darker In case of data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box a value obtained by adding the value adjusted in...

Page 848: ...ting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage PM OFS Y 2 Adj Y clr mid dens area clr balance PDL Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Y color at PDL print As the value is larger the image gets darker In case of data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box a value obtained by adding the value adjusted ...

Page 849: ...tting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage PM OFS C 2 Adj C clr mid dens area clr balance PDL Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of C color at PDL print As the value is larger the image gets darker In case of data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box a value obtained by adding the value adjusted...

Page 850: ...setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage PH OFS Y 2 Adj Y clr hi dens area clr balance PDL Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Y color at PDL print As the value is larger the image gets darker In case of data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box a value obtained by adding the value adjusted ...

Page 851: ...tting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage PH OFS C 2 Adj C clr hi dens area clr balance PDL Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of C color at PDL print As the value is larger the image gets darker In case of data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box a value obtained by adding the value adjusted in...

Page 852: ... Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Color Balance Coated Fine Adjust Density Supplement Memo In Fine Adjust Density in Adjustment Maintenance the same value is set as the density for copy operation and file storage In Fine Adjust Density under Copy and Access Stored Files in the main menu the density value can be set individually Although the setting value of this item is just one value t...

Page 853: ...ing value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use OFSTAC C only when an image failure is not alleviated with DIS TGC In such case be sure to change the setting value of this item back to the original one If both the settings are enabled an over discharge occurs Do not use this item if adjustment has been made with OFSTAC C first Display Adj ...

Page 854: ...ting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use OFSTACM2 only when an image failure is not alleviated with DIS TGM2 In such case be sure to change the setting value of this item back to the original one If both the settings are enabled an over discharge occurs Do not use this item if adjustment has been made with OFSTACM2 first Display Ad...

Page 855: ... Change per Unit 5 OFSTAC Y 1 Adj Y color charging AC voltage H SPD Detail To adjust the offset of the charging AC voltage for Y color at high process speed The setting is applied to paper which paper weight is 128 g m2 or less excluding coated paper As the value is changed by 1 the voltage is changed by 20 Vpp Decrease the value when image smear occurs and increase the value when an image failure...

Page 856: ...Unit V Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST HV PRI DIS TGM Amount of Change per Unit 20 OFSTAC C 1 Adj C color charging AC voltage H SPD Detail To adjust the offset of the charging AC voltage for C color at high process speed The setting is applied to paper which paper weight is 128 g m2 or less excluding coated paper As the value is changed by 1 the voltage is changed by 20 Vpp Decr...

Page 857: ...es shorter Display Adj Set Range 20 to 20 Unit V Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST HV PRI DIS TGK Amount of Change per Unit 20 OFSTACY2 1 Adj Y color charging AC voltage L SPD Detail To adjust the offset of the charging AC voltage for Y color at low process speed The setting is applied to paper which paper weight is 129 g m2 or more and coated paper As the value is changed by 1 th...

Page 858: ...nit V Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST HV PRI DIS TGM2 Amount of Change per Unit 20 OFSTACC2 1 Adj C color charging AC voltage L SPD Detail To adjust the offset of the charging AC voltage for C color at low process speed The setting is applied to paper which paper weight is 129 g m2 or more and coated paper As the value is changed by 1 the voltage is changed by 20 Vpp Decrease th...

Page 859: ...and decrease the value when fogging occurs especially in the 94 mm portion of the image leading edge By setting this item primary transfer ATVC control is automatically executed during initial rotation for next image formation and the setting value is reflected Use Case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positiv...

Page 860: ...ge By setting this item primary transfer ATVC control is automatically executed during initial rotation for next image formation and the setting value is reflected Use Case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs in black mode Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Execute 1ATVC EX Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit uA ...

Page 861: ...on of the image leading edge By setting this item primary transfer ATVC control is automatically executed during initial rotation for next image formation and the setting value is reflected Use Case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Execute 1ATVC EX Display Adj Set Range 50 to...

Page 862: ...tem primary transfer ATVC control is automatically executed during initial rotation for next image formation and the setting value is reflected Use Case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs in black mode Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Execute 1ATVC EX Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit uA Default Value 0 Rela...

Page 863: ...ransfer ATVC control is automatically executed during initial rotation for next image formation and the setting value is reflected Use Case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Execute 1ATVC EX Caution This item is enabled only when using heavy paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 with 60 ppm...

Page 864: ...urs and decrease the value when fogging occurs especially in the 95 mm portion of the image leading edge By setting this item primary transfer ATVC control is automatically executed during initial rotation for next image formation and the setting value is reflected Use Case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs in color mode Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switc...

Page 865: ...se the value if density on the leading edge of paper is low transfer is weak Use Case When an image failure white spots at the leading edge occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this item only when an image failure occurs Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit V Default Value 0 Amount ...

Page 866: ...pots occur Increase the value if density on the leading edge of paper is low transfer is weak Use Case When an image failure white spots at the leading edge occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this item only when an image failure occurs Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit V Defaul...

Page 867: ... plain paper in single Bk color mode Increase the value when white spots at the leading trailing edge occur Use Case When an image failure white spots at the leading trailing edge occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this item only when an image failure occurs Display Adj Set Range 2...

Page 868: ...n single Bk color mode Increase the value when white spots at the leading trailing edge occur Use Case When an image failure white spots at the leading trailing edge occurs Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Use this item only when an image failure occurs Display Adj Set Range 20 to 60 Unit uA Amount of Change per Unit 1 FEED ADJ...

Page 869: ...changed by 0 1 mm Left margin becomes larger An image moves to the right Left margin becomes smaller An image moves to the left When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 50...

Page 870: ...is changed by 0 1 mm Left margin becomes larger An image moves to the right Left margin becomes smaller An image moves to the left When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range...

Page 871: ... by 0 1 mm Left margin becomes larger An image moves to the right Left margin becomes smaller An image moves to the left When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 55 to 55 ...

Page 872: ... 0 1 mm Left margin becomes larger An image moves to the right Left margin becomes smaller An image moves to the left When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 55 to 55 Uni...

Page 873: ...to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 REG DUP1 1 Adj register start timing 1 1 SPD 2nd Detail To adjust the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor when feeding 2nd side at 1 1 speed As the value is incremented by 1 the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0 1 mm Top margin becomes smaller An image moves upward Top margin becomes larger An image moves downward Us...

Page 874: ...OK key Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 LP DUP1 1 Adj pre rgst arch amount plain 2 sided Detail To adjust the arch amount before registration for plain paper fed in 2 sided mode As the value is changed by 1 the arch amount is changed by 0 1 mm Increase Decrease Use Case When an image on the 2nd side of plain paper fed in 2 sided mode is skewed Ad...

Page 875: ...te the value in the service label on the host machine Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data When replacing the Multi Tray Unit Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Be sure to adjust MF MAX MIN A4R A5R together with this i...

Page 876: ... clearing RAM data When replacing the Multi Tray Unit Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Be sure to adjust MF MAX MIN A4 A4R together with this item Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1024 Default Value According to the setting at shipment Related Servi...

Page 877: ...s the greater value is set the judgment area is widened Use Case When adjusting the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in ACS mode Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 Default Value 0 ACS EN2 2 Set ACS mode jdgmt area in DADF mode Detail To set the judg...

Page 878: ...ath As the value is increased the original tends to be detected as a B W document and as the value is decreased the original tends to be detected as a color document Use Case When adjusting the color detection level in ACS mode back side at duplex reading with 1 path Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switc...

Page 879: ...ront side is stronger than the back side and increase the value when it is weaker Use Case When moire frequently occurs on images of COPY and SEND output Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 3 to 3 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST MISC SH ADJ EXP LED COPIER ADJUS...

Page 880: ...6 14 Approx 93 15 Approx 100 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST V CONT VCONT M VBACK M PR EXP C 2 Adj of C Pre exposure LED current Detail To adjust the current of the Cleaning Pre exposure LED C As the current is increased light intensity of the LED becomes strengthened so the potential of the Photosensitive Drum is decreased Set 15 the maximum current when drum ghost uneven densi...

Page 881: ...ice Mode COPIER ADJUST V CONT VCONT K VBACK K FUNCTION INSTALL COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL STIR Y 1 Stirring of Y color developer Detail To stir developer in the Y color Developing Unit Use Case At installation of the machine When an image failure occurs Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Requir...

Page 882: ...in feed direction when stream reading original with DADF The adjustment result is reflected to COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY STRD POS Use Case At DADF installation uninstallation Adj Set Operate Method 1 Close the DADF 2 Select the item and then press OK key The operation automatically stops after the adjustment 3 Write the value displayed by COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY STRD POS in the service label Caution Write...

Page 883: ...normal termination NG Required Time 155 sec Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET M C K 4 INISET M 1 Exe of Dev Unit M initial install mod Detail To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the Developing Unit M 1 Idle rotation of the Developing Unit 2 Initialization of the ATR Sensor 3 Secondary transfer ATVC control 4 Patch light intensity correction 5 ...

Page 884: ...tail To set whether to use the Embedded RDS Use Case When using Embedded RDS Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Be sure to use E RDS RGW PORT COM TEST COM LOG and RGW ADR as a set Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Not used 1 Used All the counter information is sent Default Value It differs according to the location Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL...

Page 885: ...company s server via SOAP protocol RGW ADR 1 URL setting of Sales Company s server Detail To set the URL of the sales company s server to be used for Embedded RDS Use Case When using Embedded RDS Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select the URL 2 Enter the URL and then press OK key 3 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Do not use Shift JIS character strings Be sure to use E RDS RGW PORT COM TEST COM ...

Page 886: ...n necessary for initial installation of the Developing Units for all colors 1 Idle rotation of the Developing Unit 2 Initialization of the ATR Sensors for all colors 3 Secondary transfer ATVC control 4 Patch light intensity correction 5 Background correction 6 Discharge current control 7 Primary transfer ATVC control 8 Initialization of the Patch Sensor 9 Color displacement correction control 10 D...

Page 887: ...of service browser ON OFF of service browser switches whenever the main power switch is turned OFF ON after execution If connection with the UGW server is successful OK is displayed If NG is displayed execute a communication test using COM TEST The setting is enabled after reboot Whether the service browser is ON or OFF can be checked in COPIER DISPLAY USER BRWS STS 1 ON 2 OFF Use Case When using ...

Page 888: ...hether to enable the installed NFC option Set 1 when using the NFC option Use NFC Card Emulation is displayed in Settings Registration Use Case When installing the NFC option Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 0 Additional Functions Mode Management Settings Device Managemen...

Page 889: ... DADF front back linearity Detail To derive the front back side linearity in DADF mode based on the scanning data which has been backed up at factory Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the value of the reader s service label COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH R2 DFCH G2 DFCH B2 DFCH K2 DFCH R10 DFCH G10 DFCH B10 DFCH K10 DFCH2R2 DFCH2G2 DFCH2B2 D...

Page 890: ...inished normally OK Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL3 BW TGT 1 Set of B W shading target value Detail After the white level data X Y Z for the Standard White Plate is set read the Standard White Plate and set the black and white shading target value Use Case When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Be sure ...

Page 891: ...g operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Required Time 10 sec LD ADJ K 2 Return Bk Skew Crrct Motor to ini pstn Detail When Bk color skew volume in vertical scanning direction is larger than estimation the Skew Correction Motor Bk is locked and color displacement cannot be corrected even when color displacement correction control is executed This item places the Skew Correction Motor...

Page 892: ...eviated with H PS ADJ Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Execute auto color displacement correction Caution Do not execute H PS ADJ after executing this item Otherwise the result of manual correction is disabled Display Adj Set Range 4535 to 4535 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION LASER H PS ADJ YM Additional Functions Mode Adjustm...

Page 893: ...it When continuously using a drum unit that had been used in another machine for a while Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Do not execute this item when temporarily using a drum unit that had been used in another machine for a while for checking Required Time 2 min Related Service Mode COPIER COUNTER LF C DRM LF COPIER FUNCTI...

Page 894: ...nto the surface of the roller so adhesion of substances leaking from the roller can be prevented Use Case When replacing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Be sure to execute this item to the roller which surface is not soiled Display Adj Set Range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK FIXING COPIER FUNCTIO...

Page 895: ...press OK key Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION PANEL LED CHK KEY CHK 1 Check of key entry Detail To check the key input on the Control Panel Use Case When replacing the LCD Panel Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select the item and press the key on the Control Panel 2 Check that the input value is displayed 3 Cancel the selection to terminate checking TOUCHCHK 1 Adj of coordinate pstn of Touch Panel De...

Page 896: ...he fan checking the operation Adj Set Operate Method Enter the value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 1 to 99 1 Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1 FM1 2 Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2 FM2 3 Not used 4 Process Cartridge Fan Rear FM4 5 Fixing Cooling Fan Front FM5 6 Fixing Cooling Fan Rear FM6 7 Delivery Fan 1 FM7 8 Secondary Transfer Exhaust Fan FM8 9 Delivery Fan 2 FM9 10 Process Cartridge Fan Front ...

Page 897: ...Motor M M10 11 Bottle Motor C M11 12 Bottle Motor Bk M12 13 Drum Motor YMC M1 Drum Motor Bk M4 and ITB Motor M13 2 14 ITB Displacement Control Motor M14 1 15 Primary Transfer Disengagement Motor M15 3 16 Fixing Motor M21 264 mm sec 17 Fixing Motor M21 222 mm sec 18 Fixing Motor M21 145 mm sec 19 Fixing Motor M21 132 mm sec 20 Waste Toner Feed Motor M26 and Waste Toner Stirring Motor M45 4 21 Fixin...

Page 898: ...e COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK MTR SL 1 Specification of operation solenoid Detail To specify the solenoid to operate Use Case When replacing the solenoid checking the operation Adj Set Operate Method Enter the value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 1 to 9 1 Registration Shutter Solenoid SL1 2 to 4 Not used 5 First Delivery Flapper Solenoid SL5 6 Second Delivery Flapper Solenoid SL6 7 Third...

Page 899: ...the item and then press OK key ERR HIST 1 Clearing of error log Detail To clear the error logs Use Case When clearing the error logs Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Related Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY ERR PWD CLR 1 Clear of system administrator password Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To clear the pas...

Page 900: ...the setting values of address lists forwarding settings Settings Registration and service mode For details refer to Backup Data List in the Service Manual Use Case When initializing the setting values Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select the item and then press OK key The machine is automatically rebooted 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Output the service mode setting values by P PRINT befo...

Page 901: ...e SCM value of the Embedded RDS stored in the SRAM SCM values are ON OFF of E RDS server s port number server s SOAP URL and communication schedule with the server how often the data is acquired etc The value set by E RDS RGW PORT RGW ADR COM LOG is cleared Use Case When upgrading the Bootable in the E RDS environment Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Usage of th...

Page 902: ...Use Case When deleting switching language files Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Download the firmware in which the necessary language files are included using SST or a USB flash drive Caution A language file is not uninstalled unless the downloaded language files are installed by SST or a USB flash drive after the execution of this item If installation is not execu...

Page 903: ...arm Detail To clear the alarm occurred in the Paper Deck Use Case At recovery Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch CUSTOM2 2 For customization MISC R COPIER FUNCTION MISC R SCANLAMP 1 Lighting check of Scanner Unit frt LED Detail To light up the Scanning Lamp for 3 seconds under the White Plate and the Copyboard Glass respectively Use C...

Page 904: ...F duplex reading Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 N A 1 Front side 2 Back side Default Value 0 1PCLBUDR 1 DADF 2 faces clr differ crrct lowr limit Detail To keep colors which do not need to be corrected at DADF duplex stream reading the correction amount is adjusted so that the effect of correction is weakened The result is reflect...

Page 905: ...vice mode setting value Use Case Before executing the CLEAR service mode etc Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Be sure to use A4 LTR size plain paper recycled paper HIST PRT 1 Output of jam and error history Detail To print the jam history and error history Use Case When printing the jam error history Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key C...

Page 906: ... Output the print job history with detailed information which is not displayed printed in the job history screen under System Monitor Print Log Printer and in the report of the print job history PJH P 2 1 Detail info of print job history all job Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To print the history of all print jobs stored in the ...

Page 907: ...d or USB flash drive after starting the machine in download mode Use Case When obtaining the service report as a file instead of printing the report out Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Supplement Memo File size Approx 1 MB at a maximum RPT2USB 1 Write serv rpt file to USB flash drive Detail To store the report file of service mode saved in HDD by RPT FILE to a USB flas...

Page 908: ... color tone settings Registration of correction pattern Registration of correction pattern 2 COLR 03 Auto correction color tone settings Registration of correction pattern Registration of correction pattern 3 COLR 04 Auto correction color tone settings Registration of correction pattern Registration of correction pattern 4 COLR 05 Auto correction color tone settings Registration of correction patt...

Page 909: ...en press OK key Caution Use this item when color displacement is not alleviated by executing ITB INIT or auto color displacement correction Required Time 70 sec Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P ITB INIT Additional Functions Mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch SYSTEM COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD 1 Shift to download mode Detail To make the machi...

Page 910: ... one of them By selecting 8 HD CLEAR HD CHECK is also executed to 7 9 11 and 17 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM HD CLEAR HD CHECK HD CHECK 1 File system check of specified partition Detail To execute system check of the partition specified by CHK TYPE at the next startup Use Case When E602 E614 error file corruption etc occurs Adj Set Operate Method Enter 1 and then pre...

Page 911: ...troller PCB SRAM Detail To back up the setting data in SRAM of the Reader Controller PCB Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Caution During operation the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment When backup data which has been left for a long period of time...

Page 912: ...en setting a new condition is necessary read the operation setting file provided by R D from the USB memory Use Case When changing the conditions of debug log to automatically store When setting a new condition Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION DBG LOG LOG2USB LOG2SRVR HIT STS 2 Display of debu...

Page 913: ...ning area from the specified paper size When the paper size is larger than the original size selecting ON reduces productivity because the scanning area gets larger Use Case When matching the scanning area with the paper size Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF calculated from the detected ori...

Page 914: ...it is detected at the start of the machine Use Case When installing removing the Reader Unit Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Not installed 1 Installed Default Value 0 Printer model 1 Copier model ORG LGL 2 Special paper size set in DADF mode LGL Detail To set the size of special paper LGL conf...

Page 915: ...not be recognized in DADF stream reading mode Use Case Upon user s request When picking up special paper size original from DADF Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 B5 1 Korean government office paper Default Value 0 INTROT 1 1 Set ppr interval auto adj exe interval Detail To set the number of she...

Page 916: ...Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Black mode 1 Color mode Default Value 1 MODELSZ2 2 Ppr size dtct global support in bookmode Detail To set whether to enable global support of original size detection at Copyboard reading Use Case Upon user s request original consists of mixed media AB Inch configuration Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch...

Page 917: ...e Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Go through the following COPIER OPTION FNC SW MODEL SZ and if MODEL SZ is 0 AB configuration this mode is enabled Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Not supported 1 Supported Default Value JP 0 USA 0 EUR 0 AU 0 CN 1 KR 0 TW 0 ASIA 0 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW MODEL SZ Supplement Memo 8K ...

Page 918: ... not executed If the value displayed in HT C is erratic when hue variation occurs set the value of this item to 1 and check the hue If hue variation is alleviated analyze the cause of ARCDAT control error developer Patch Sensor etc Use Case When hue variation occurs Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 when ARCDAT control i...

Page 919: ...ch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 All charge counters are obtained 1 Only displayed counter is obtained 2 All charge counters are not obtained Counter specified by the following COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER 1 to 6 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER1 6 CNTR SW 1 Init of parts counter replacement timing Detail To return the estimated life of parts counter to the initial va...

Page 920: ...111111 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW PSWD SW RPT2SIDE 1 Set of report 1 sided 2 sided output Detail To set whether to use 1 sided or 2 sided for report output of service mode Use Case When making 1 sided report output Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 1 sided 1 2 sided Default Value ...

Page 921: ...d then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Registered PDL license is enabled 1 Disabled Default Value 0 IMGCNTPR 1 Setting of image quality mode Detail To set the image quality mode The counter priority mode is applied when 1 is set and the image quality priority mode is applied when 0 is set Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method Enter the ...

Page 922: ...ress OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default Value It differs according to the location Supplement Memo CDS Contents Delivery System LOCLFIRM 1 Set to allow firmware update by file Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set whether to permit the user administrator to update...

Page 923: ...of jammed paper is necessary to analyze the cause of a problem Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 ON 1 OFF Default Value 0 JLK PWSC 2 ON OFF of PCAM password auth doc scan Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set whether to scan the PCAM password authentication docume...

Page 924: ...awing algorithm of the conventional iR C series 2 3 For R D use Default Value 0 CDS LVUP 1 Set to allow CDS periodical update Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set whether to allow the user administrator to perform periodical update linked with CDS When 1 is set setting of periodical update can be made in Settings Registration m...

Page 925: ...se Case Upon user s request not to use the Unified Authentication function Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 ON 1 OFF Default Value 0 Supplement Memo Unified Authentication A function with which it is considered that login authentication under it is performed by logging in it using SSO H MIB NVT...

Page 926: ... CDS FIRM Additional Functions Mode Management Settings License Other Register Update Software Software Management Setting Setting Supplement Memo When local CDS is used iW EMC MC device firmware update plug in is required STNDBY B 1 Setting of duration of standby mode Detail To set the duration of standby mode In standby mode the Fixing Film and the Pressure Roller are heated rotated while they a...

Page 927: ...Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Main Menu screen 1 Screen registered as the startup screen Default Value 0 NO LGOUT 1 Display hide of logout button Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set whether to display or hide Logout button When 0 is set Logout button is displayed on the screen and...

Page 928: ... log at the occurrence of 0CAx jam Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Display as a jam 1 Display as an error Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW JM ERR R JM ERR R 2 Set of error display of 0071 jam RCON Detail To set whether to display 0071 jam as the error E996 0071 In the case of a jam a log may not be able to...

Page 929: ...opriate operation with the combination of firmware versions has not yet been checked failure where analysis is difficult may occur It is possible to check the firmware versions at the start of the machine and automatically write the firmware stored in the Main Controller in PCB option collectively as needed When 0 is set versions are not checked and firmware update is not performed Therefore it is...

Page 930: ...Picture Login function Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 1 Additional Functions Mode Management Settings User Management Authentication Management Use User Authentication Picture Login DP DV Y 1 Reserve Amount of Change per Unit 1 DP DV M 1 Reserve Amount of Change per Uni...

Page 931: ...hanging the timing to notify the end of life according to the usage status Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 40 Unit Default Value 12 Amount of Change per Unit 1 TRYFLOFF 2 ON OFF of full detection Detail To set whether to perform full detection When a finisher is disconnected from the host machine full detection becomes unavailable so ...

Page 932: ...ge failure that occurs only when feeding coated paper continuously It does not occur when feeding a single sheet of the paper DCONRTRY 2 Set of retry at DCON comctn error occur Detail To set whether to perform retry processing when communication error occurs between the Main Controller and the DC Controller Set 1 to 3 when E733 occurs Communication error may be avoided by retry It is effective esp...

Page 933: ...1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION USER MF LG ST Supplement Memo When 1 is set jammed paper being ejected may trigger another jam When a jam is removed size mismatch jam is displayed DSPLY SW COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW UI COPY 2 Display hide of copy screen Detail To set whether to display or hide the copy function Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter...

Page 934: ... To set OFF ON of network related error message display When setting 0 OFF while the machine is not connected to network the error message Check the network connection is not displayed Use Case When using the machine as a copy machine Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 0 Co...

Page 935: ...request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 Hide all UIs related to secured print 1 Display all UIs related to secured print 2 Hide Secured Print button in the main menu and the simple authentication settings in Settings Registration menu Default Value 0 IMGC ADJ 1 ON OFF of img adj item display S...

Page 936: ...de when POD function is ON and JAL is ON Default Value 1 Supplement Memo POD function JDF HOLD functions JAL function A function to save the print result as a thumbnail TNR WARN 1 ON OFF of toner warning display Detail To set whether to display the toner level warning Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power sw...

Page 937: ...mory Media in Settings Registration menu respectively The setting is reflected after turning OFF ON the power Use Case When not displaying the memory media screen on the Control Panel Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 1 Additional Functions Mode Preferences Display Setting...

Page 938: ... To set whether to display PPA related information on the Control Panel or remote UI The setting is linked with LGCY SCP When LGCY SCP is set to 0 the setting of this item becomes 1 When LGCY SCP is set to 1 the setting of this item becomes 0 Use Case When not displaying PPA related information on the screen Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the m...

Page 939: ...ming to display the toner level warning message for the user to whom toner is not delivered automatically Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 40 Unit Default Value It differs according to the location Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW TNR WARN Supplement Memo It is not linked with COPIER OPT...

Page 940: ...Service Mode COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW TNR WARN Amount of Change per Unit 1 SND NAME 1 Setting of Scan and Send button name Detail To set the name of Scan and Send button displayed in the main menu Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 Scan and Send 1 Scan 2 Scan Default Va...

Page 941: ...erate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 999 0 E mail text not printed 999 Unlimited Default Value 500 SMTPTXPN 2 Setting of SMTP TX port number Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set SMTP transmission port number Use Case Upon user s request Adj S...

Page 942: ...ed by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To restrict use of GSSAPI authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 SMTP server dependent 1 Not used Default Value 0 Supplement Memo SMTP authentication Proto...

Page 943: ... function is added to SMTP which is the protocol to be used for e mail transmission At the time of e mail transmission this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e mail transmission only when it s authenticated NS LGN 2 Limit LOGIN authentication at SMTP auth Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting o...

Page 944: ... Set Range 1 to 65535 Default Value 515 Supplement Memo LPD port Network port for TCP IP communication when making prints through network WUEV SW 2 Setting of sleep notification execution Detail To set whether to notify the sleep mode to the application imageWARE etc on the network when shifting to recovering from the sleep mode Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setti...

Page 945: ...splay Adj Set Range 10 to 600 Unit sec Default Value 15 Amount of Change per Unit 1 IFX CHIG 1 Set operation by IFAX recv mail content Detail To set the number of characters for the IFAX received mail content so that the mail is not printed forwarded when the characters in the text is less than the number of specified characters This machine can output blank paper because some senders send e mail ...

Page 946: ... for query from Windows correctly Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 No proxy response 1 Proxy response Default Value 1 WOLTRANS 1 ON OFF sleep recover by packet reception Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set whether to recove...

Page 947: ...Board is used Normally SRAM needs to be cleared in the case of mismatch in SPD value NCONF SW 1 ON OFF of Network Configurator function Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set ON OFF of Network Configurator function If the user does not use the function select OFF to prevent remote attack through network Use Case Upon user s reque...

Page 948: ...1 is set address filter is enabled for all protocols so all packets are recorded in the filter log However logs of multicast broadcast packets sent from a harmless device or an address that are subject to rejection and have no direct relation to the machine are also recorded and consequently the number of logs is increased Use Case Upon user s request to collect all filter logs Adj Set Operate Met...

Page 949: ...ce is lowered When 1 is set RST is returned to the port 113 without blocking packets Use Case When executing FTP SEND against the OS which supports authentication of the FTP port 113 while the IP filter is enabled Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 0 IPMTU 1 Setting of MTU size Detail To set MTU size of network...

Page 950: ...then press OK key Caution When 1 is set IPFAX fails with the destination where the session starts with audio session Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 audio 1 T 38 Default Value 0 Supplement Memo SIP Session Initiation Protocol SIPINOUT 2 Set of internal external number to URI Detail To set whether to store the external number or the internal number in From URI when using NGN Use Case When a call can...

Page 951: ... deep sleep when pressing the button to reflect the setting dynamic update If IP address of the machine has not been set an IP address is assigned after participating in VLAN FTPMODE 1 Set of FTP print default operation mode Detail To set the default operation mode of FTP print Switch the default operation mode between ASCII mode and BIN mode in accordance with user s environment Use Case At insta...

Page 952: ...aiting Time for Connection at Startup WLAN USE 2 Setting of wireless LAN invalidation Detail To set whether to disable the wireless LAN Bringing in and installation of the wireless LAN equipment may be prohibited depending on user In such case set 0 to prevent the wireless LAN to be used When 0 is set Wireless Connection Settings is not displayed in Settings Registration Use Case When bringing in ...

Page 953: ...w Display Adj Set Range 10 to 1 10 to 1 dBm Default Value 5 ENV SET COPIER OPTION ENV SET ENVP INT 1 Temp hmdy Fix Film temp log get cycle Detail To set the cycle to obtain log of the temperature and humidity inside the machine and the surface temperature of the Fixing Film As the value is incremented by 1 the cycle is increased by 1 minute Collected log can be displayed in COPIER DISPLAY ENVRNT U...

Page 954: ... band to reduce friction between the ITB and the ITB Cleaning Blade Environment In high all environments Paper interval Every 30 60 100 sheets At last rotation Every 30 60 100 sheets Band length 20 100 mm As the interval is shorter and the band length is longer the lubricating effect is high but downtime and toner consumption are increased Use Case When noise occurs due to the ITB Cleaning Blade A...

Page 955: ... value for DRMR TMG Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 Auto 1 60 sheets 2 30 sheets Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION CLEANING DRMR TMG DRMR TMG 2 Setting of drum idle rotation interval Detail To set the number of sheets as the intervals to perform idle rotation of the Photosensitive Drum at paper interval last rotation When 0 is set the interval is automatically determined based on t...

Page 956: ...g m3 or more of absolute moisture content Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution When 1to 6 is set FCOT becomes longer Switch the setting according to the usage environment Display Adj Set Range 0 to 6 0 OFF 1 30 seconds Moisture content 19 8 g m3 or more 2 60 seconds Moisture content 19 8 g m3 or more 3 30 seconds Moistur...

Page 957: ...delivery destination which priority is set as high at Output Tray Settings in Settings Registration menu Use Case When changing the delivery tray Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Output from the tray from which the last job was output 1 Output from the delivery destination which priority is hig...

Page 958: ...value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 20 deg C 10 seconds 1 10 deg C 20 seconds 0 0 deg C 1 10 deg C 45 seconds 2 20 deg C 60 seconds Unit deg C Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 5 INTPPR 2 2 Set multi tone ctrl light stop intvl Detail To set the number of sheets which the real time multiple tone control li...

Page 959: ...he cleaning instruction is not displayed Increase the value when black lines appear As the value is larger the small dust is more likely to be detected Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution If the value is too small black lines may appear on the image Display Adj Set Range 0 to 255 0 OFF Defau...

Page 960: ...data Detail To set the gradation adjustment data that is used at image formation When 0 is set the initial LUT is used When 1 is set the gradation adjustment data gamma LUT that is generated by auto gradation adjustment full quick adjustment control is used Use Case When PASCAL related failure occurs when identifying the cause of PASCAL related failure Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting va...

Page 961: ...oire occurs or jaggy is significant in case of printing an image containing many halftone dots or photos When avoiding to replace the processed black with single Bk color Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution This setting trades off with reproducibility of text Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 High screen ruling gray compen...

Page 962: ...DL text mode Black text is reproduced with 4 colors Error diffused image The hue of the photo area is more vivid than that of 2 1 Equivalent to PDL photo mode Black text is reproduced with 4 colors Screen processed image 2 Equivalent to scanned text mode Black text is reproduced with a single Bk color Error diffused image The hue of the photo area might be different from that of 0 3 Equivalent to ...

Page 963: ...ack text is reproduced with 4 colors Screen processed image 2 Equivalent to scanned text mode Black text is reproduced with a single Bk color Error diffused image The hue of the photo area might be different from that of 0 3 Equivalent to scanned photo mode Black text is reproduced with a single Bk color Screen processed image Default Value 0 Supplement Memo BMLinkS Business Machine Linkage Servic...

Page 964: ...Change this value when you want to prioritize smoothness in small text Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99 Default Value 1 PASCL TY 2 Set of paper type for auto gradation adj Detail Auto gradation adjustment is normally executed with the recommended paper specified for ...

Page 965: ...tion Since the background color is set to be washed out with this mode not only the background of yellowed blank paper but also other light colors light blue etc are washed out Display Adj Set Range 15 to 15 Default Value 0 Additional Functions Mode Copy Options Density Background Density DITH FB 2 Real time multi tone ctrl crrct dither Detail To set the extent of the correction result of gradatio...

Page 966: ...ed to other dithering methods at the rate set in DITH FB Use Case When hue variation occurs Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Patch pattern 1 1 Patch pattern 2 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION IMG MCON DITH FB BOLD SEL 1 For R D IMG DEV COPIER OPTION IMG DEV INTPPR 1 2 Set multi tone control light exe intvl Detail ...

Page 967: ...COLOR K 4 Set 255 solid black for DENS K 5 Set 10 for PG QTY 6 Set 5 whole area halftone image for TYPE DVTGT Y 2 Adj of ATR Sensor Y gain value offset Detail To actually correct the TD ratio by setting the offset of the gain value of ATR Sensor Y When the value is increased TD ratio is increased uneven density due to poor stirring by screw is alleviated but fogging may occur The target value of T...

Page 968: ...OLOR M 4 Set 255 solid black for DENS M 5 Set 10 for PG QTY 6 Set 5 whole area halftone image for TYPE DVTGT C 2 Adj of ATR Sensor C gain value offset Detail To actually correct the TD ratio by setting the offset of the gain value of ATR Sensor C When the value is increased TD ratio is increased uneven density due to poor stirring by screw is alleviated but fogging may occur The target value of TD...

Page 969: ...rval for every 400 sheets at last rotation for every 280 sheets 4 At paper interval for every 700 sheets at last rotation for every 490 sheets 5 At paper interval for every 1000 sheets at last rotation for every 700 sheets Default Value 2 Amount of Change per Unit 1 PCHINT V 2 Adj ATR patch VD counter total VL intvl Detail To adjust the interval of the total video counter value that is the conditi...

Page 970: ...but fogging is likely to occur Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 5 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 Default Value 1 DELV THK 2 Set image ratio for Bk color toner eject Detail To set the threshold value of average image ratio of Bk color that is the condition to perform the low duty toner ejection sequence Wh...

Page 971: ... press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch 3 Execute auto gradation adjustment full adjustment Display Adj Set Range 3 to 3 Default Value 0 DMX OF M 2 Adj of M color D max target density Detail To adjust the target density of D max control in the case where density of solid area on M color image is not appropriate even when auto gradation adjustment is executed Increase the value when the d...

Page 972: ...ner deposit on the contact area of the drum As the result white lines appear on Bk color image at intervals of drum circumference 94 mm The newer the ITB is the more likely the component penetrates Therefore toner band is formed on the contact area of the drum and the ITB while drive is stopped until the number of sheets set in ZAB TH is fed When 0 is set toner band is not formed When 1 to 5 is se...

Page 973: ... appear If the value is too large soiled back of paper occurs Be sure to change the value back to the default when replacing the ITB Display Adj Set Range 13 to 13 Appropriate Target Value 3 3 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION IMG DEV ZAB TH COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 TR BLT Supplement Memo When the value of TR BLT ITB parts counter is larger than the number of sheets specified in ZAB ...

Page 974: ... decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When offset fixing failure occurs on heavy paper 1 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 5 TMP TBL3 1 Set fixing co...

Page 975: ... the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 5 TMP TBL6 1 Set fixing control temperature envelope Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for envelope As the value is changed by 1 the temperature is changed by 5 deg C Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs and dec...

Page 976: ...2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 5 FXS TMP5 1 Set ITOP control temp thin paper 2 Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for thin paper 2 52 to 59 g m2 As the value is changed by 1 the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C Use Case When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 94 mm Adj Set Operate Metho...

Page 977: ...F temp Detail To set the ON OFF temperature of the Fixing Cooling Fan Front Rear Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs on the edge of small size paper and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When fixing offset fixing failure occurs on the edge of small size paper Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF...

Page 978: ...ixing failure occurs and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When offset fixing failure occurs on transparency Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 5 T...

Page 979: ...N the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 5 FXS TMP8 1 Set ITOP control temp transparency Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for transparency As the value is changed by 1 the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C Use Case When uneven gloss occurs on the leading ...

Page 980: ...n feed direction causes the image failure Use Case When an image failure on the trailing edge occurs with thin paper Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 3 0 Small arch 1 Large arch 2 Small arch for paper whose length is 220 0 mm or less large arch for paper whose length exceeds 220 0 mm 3 Large arch for paper whose length is 220 0 mm or l...

Page 981: ...ed paper Set 2 or 3 if paper length in feed direction causes the image failure Use Case When an image failure crepe marks occurs with plain paper colored paper Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 3 0 Small arch 1 Large arch 2 Small arch for paper whose length is 220 0 mm or less large arch for paper whose length exceeds 220 0 mm 3 Large a...

Page 982: ...g C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 5 FXS T003 1 Set ITOP control temp heavy paper 4 Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for heavy paper 4 164 to 180 g m2 As the value is changed by 1 the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C Use Case When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 94 mm Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter ...

Page 983: ...g C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 5 FXS T007 1 Set ITOP control temp 1 side coat ppr 3 Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for 1 sided coated paper 3 221 to 256 g m2 As the value is changed by 1 the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C Use Case When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 94 mm Adj Set Operate Method 1 Ent...

Page 984: ...mm Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 5 FXS T012 1 Set ITOP control temp recycled paper 2 Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for recycled paper 2 76 ...

Page 985: ...e is changed by 1 the temperature is changed by 5 deg C Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When offset fixing failure occurs on thin paper 1 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 ...

Page 986: ...the value when a fixing failure occurs and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When offset fixing failure occurs on plain paper 3 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default Value 0 Amount of ...

Page 987: ...e when a fixing failure occurs and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When offset fixing failure occurs on 1 sided coated paper 3 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default Value 0 Amount of...

Page 988: ...ge 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default Value 0 TMP T011 1 Set fixing control temp recycled paper 2 Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for recycled paper 2 76 to 90 g m2 As the value is changed by 1 the temperature is changed by 5 deg C Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use C...

Page 989: ...ng control temp plain paper 1 Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for plain paper 1 64 to 75 g m2 As the value is changed by 1 the temperature is changed by 5 deg C Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When a fixing failure fixing offset occurs on plain paper 1 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value s...

Page 990: ...he main power switch Caution Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division Display Adj Set Range 00000000 to 11111111 Default Value 00000000 DEV SP3 2 Device special settings 3 Detail To execute the device special settings 3 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Change the ...

Page 991: ...ault Value 00000000 USEUPTNR 1 Set Toner Container use up mode Detail To set the maximum number of rotations of the Toner Container to use up toner in the container When the machine is slanted it is judged that toner in the Toner Container is empty before actual life When 2 is set the Toner Container Motor is driven longer than when setting to 1 so toner in the Toner Container can be used up more ...

Page 992: ... special setting Use Case For customization Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given Display Adj Set Range 00000000 to 11111111 Default Value 0 RDEV SP5 2 RCON device special settings 5 Detail To execute the device special setting Use Case For customization Adj Set Oper...

Page 993: ... PAP TYPE 2 For customization TIFFJPEG 2 For customization DCM EXCL 1 For customization Default Value 0 FPOT MD 2 For customization USER COPIER OPTION USER COPY LIM 1 Setting of upper limit for copy Detail To set the upper limit value for copy Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Rang...

Page 994: ...dj Set Range 0 to 999 0 No registration Default Value It differs according to the location COUNTER3 1 Setting of software counter 3 Detail To set counter type for software counter 3 on the Counter Check screen Use Case Upon user dealer s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 999 0 No registratio...

Page 995: ...2 0 YYMM DD 1 DD MMYY 2 MM DD YY Default Value It differs according to the location Additional Functions Mode Preferences Timer Energy Settings Date Time Settings MB CCV 2 Control card usage limit for Mail Box Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To restrict use of control card for Mail Box Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate...

Page 996: ... Options Supplement Memo Up to 630mm length paper is supported when DADF is used CNT DISP 2 Display hide of serial No Detail To set whether to display or hide the serial No on the Counter Check screen Use Case When setting to display hide serial No on the Counter Check screen Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set ...

Page 997: ...t Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Not rotated 1 Rotated Default Value 0 PR PSESW 1 ON OFF Pause All Print Jobs button dspl Detail To set whether to display Pause All Print Jobs button on the Status Monitor Cancel screen Use Case Upon user s request When preferring to promptly stop the print jo...

Page 998: ...to the Service Manual Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Type1 1 Type2 Default Value 0 TAB ACC 1 Not used BCNT AST 1 Set of box print charge target job Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set the job ...

Page 999: ... scan and store function in the screen displayed by pressing Scan in the main menu with one of the following methods Settings Registration Function Settings Store Access Files Common Settings Scan and Store Settings Access Stored Files Settings Change Default Settings Initialize Logo icon in upper right of the screen Change Default Settings Initialize Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate M...

Page 1000: ...ission is set to High Rati As the value is larger the compression ratio is higher the file size becomes small Use Case When making the transmission file size smaller Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution As the value is larger image quality is decreased Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 Compression ratio 1 16 1 Compression r...

Page 1001: ... Case Perform system recovery processing when MEAP platform fails to be activated due to resource confliction between MEAP applications service registration or use order Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Normal mode 1 Safe mode Default Value 0 TRAY FLL 2 Not used PRNT POS 2 ON OFF of all pauses ...

Page 1002: ... MODE 2 Setting of compatible mode at PS usage Detail To set the image processing at PS print Set 8 when line width differs depending on the drawing position although the same line width is set Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 65535 0 to 7 Spare 8 Strokeadjustment is en...

Page 1003: ...the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Single color counter 1 Full color counter Default Value It differs according to the location JA FUNC 2 Display of job archive function ON OFF Detail To display ON OFF of job archive function Make the setting with the MEAP program which supports job archiving Use Case When using the job archiv...

Page 1004: ...shes with the next Default Value 4 Supplement Memo LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol Registering LDAP server enables to search e mail address etc from LDAP server and the result can be registered in the Address Book etc Registration is available by the following Set Destination Register LDAP Server FROM OF 1 Deletion of mail sender s address Detail Operation on this item is restricted by ...

Page 1005: ... the address because E mail is not displayed on the transmission screen The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be used Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution To restrict addresses for transmission be sure to manually delete them because the addresses registered in the Address ...

Page 1006: ... jobs other than FAX reception and I Fax reception etc In service mode display is available but settings cannot be made To make the settings use the MEAP application which supports job archiving Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Caution In service mode display is available but settings cannot be made To make the settings use the MEAP application which supports jo...

Page 1007: ...uest Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Caution Setting cannot be made with this item Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Packet JPEG 1 Raster JPEG Default Value 0 HDCR DSW 1 ON OFF of HDD complete deletion display Detail To set whether to display Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion in Settings Registration When 1 is set unneeded data in the hard disk can be deleted completely on the HDD Data Complet...

Page 1008: ... Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 1 Additional Functions Mode Preferences External Interface USB Settings Use MEAP Driver for USB External Device USBI DSP 2 ON OFF USB input device MEAP driver use Detail To set whether to display Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device in Settings Registration menu When 0 is set the item is not displayed so that the user administrator cannot change the setti...

Page 1009: ... OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default Value JP 1 USA 0 EUR 0 AU 0 CN 0 KR 0 TW 0 ASIA 0 JA SBOX 2 Setting of linking with Advanced Box SAM Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set the link with Advanced Box when iW SAM is enabled When 1 is set linking with Advanced Box is enabled Use Ca...

Page 1010: ...eration for Inbox document at the time of iW SAM When 1 is set the Inbox document can be operated Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default Value 0 JA FORM 2 Setting of image composition SAM Detail Operat...

Page 1011: ...tting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set whether merging jobs is allowed when iW SAM is enabled When 1 is set jobs can be merged Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default Value 0 JA JDF 2 Se...

Page 1012: ...aution Be sure not to allow the user to execute export without encryption because of security concern Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 1 SMD EXPT 1 Setting of export target data remote UI Detail To set whether to export service mode data from remote UI When 1 is set service mode data is displayed as the target data of export on remote UI When installing more than 1 machine at ...

Page 1013: ...N ACC COIN SJ CLMSK 2 ON OFF secured job stop button display Detail To set whether to display the button to stop a secured job When 0 is set the stop button is displayed When COIN is set to 6 or 7 charge mode Type C set 1 Since the stop button is not displayed the secured job cannot be stopped Use Case When prohibiting to stop the secured job in charge mode Type C Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter th...

Page 1014: ...splay Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Based on Output Tray Settings 1 Priority on job settings deliver to a delivery destination where offset is possible Default Value 1 Additional Functions Mode Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings Output Tray Settings LGCY SCP 2 Setting of PPA secured print switch Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Acce...

Page 1015: ... Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Y M C 3 1 Y M C Bk 4 Default Value 0 VC HIGH 2 Tiered base pricing cntr High thrshld Detail To set the threshold value for the tiered base pricing counter High To enter the value 10 times higher than the estimated video count value Video count correction value higher than the value setting value x 0 1 is judged as High As the value ...

Page 1016: ...rver Detail To set user name of the relay server used for DRS Use Case When using DRS Adj Set Operate Method Enter user name and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range Up to 256 characters Supplement Memo DRS Abbreviation of Direct Remote Service Providing remote support using service support tool by directly connecting PC at call center and the device DRS PSWD 2 Setting of password of DRS relay ...

Page 1017: ... Additional Functions Mode Preferences Paper Settings Paper Settings A5R STMTR Paper Selection CST3 P1 1 Setting of Cst3 paper size A5R STMTR Detail To set the paper size A5R STMTR used in the Cassette 3 Use Case When setting the paper size for the Cassette 3 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 A5...

Page 1018: ... Settings Registration For other locations only EXEC can be set Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution When K size paper cannot be selected in Settings Registration only the setting value 0 can be set Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 EXEC 1 16K Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW KSIZE SW Supplement Memo 16K pap...

Page 1019: ...Settings Registration For other locations only EXEC can be set Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution When K size paper cannot be selected in Settings Registration only the setting value 0 can be set Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 EXEC 1 16K Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW KSIZE SW Supplement Memo 16K pape...

Page 1020: ...E mail I Fax Settings Communication Settings SMTP Receive POP OFF Following items are automatically specified when changing the value to 4 from 0 to 2 when setting 4 The change will not be returned even if changing back the value to 0 to 2 from 4 once the mode has been changed COPIER OPTION USER AFN PSWD 1 COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW UI BOX UI SEND UI FAX UI RSCAN UI EPRNT UI HOLD 0 Management Settings...

Page 1021: ...r is included Default Value 3 OUT TRAY 1 Presence absence of Third Delivery Tray Detail To set whether the Third Delivery Tray is installed or not When it is installed set 1 Use Case When the Third Delivery Tray is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Not installed 1 Installed Default Val...

Page 1022: ...through the following COPIER OPTION ACC UNIT PRC entry is in fractional unit Entry of 50 indicates 50 cents 0 50 Use Case At installation of Coin Manager Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following COPIER OPTION ACC COIN Display Adj Set Range 0 to 9999 Default Value 10 Rel...

Page 1023: ...y on the upper limit number of sheets processing performance of the printer engine is decreased depending on pickup location Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 No support 1 Priority on speed 2 Priority on upper limit number of sheets Default Value 0 PDL THR 2 ON OFF PDL print external charge mode Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To se...

Page 1024: ...a coin manager other than CV3 is connected When 1 is set an error occurs Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 0 IMG RTRY 1 ON OFF of img form proc for Coin Manager Detail To set whether to perform image formation process supporting the connected Coin Manager Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 0 INT FACE COPIER OPTION INT FACE IMG CONT 1 Connection setting of pri...

Page 1025: ... 1 to 999 1 Not yet connected 400 to 499 EFI print server 600 to 699 Creo print server 700 to 799 Oce print server Default Value 1 VTRNS TO 2 For R D Amount of Change per Unit 1 LCNS TR COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST SEND 2 Installation state dspl of SEND function Detail To display installation state of SEND function when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When checking whether SEND fu...

Page 1026: ...se Case When checking whether Searchable PDF is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST SPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR SPDF Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR SPDF 2 Trns license key dspl of Searchable PDF Detail To display tran...

Page 1027: ... license key to use Direct Print PDF when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST PDFDR 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR PDFDR Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST SCR 2 Install state dspl of Encry Secure Print Detail To display installation state of Encrypted Se...

Page 1028: ... transferring the license Use Case When checking whether Remote Operators Software is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST VNC 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR VNC Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR VNC 2 Trns lcns dspl of Remote Op...

Page 1029: ...y to use High Compression PDF when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST HRPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR HRPDF Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST TRSND 2 Install state dspl Trial SEND function Detail To display installation state of Trial SEND function...

Page 1030: ... checking whether Time Stamp PDF JP only is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST TSPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR TSPDF Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR TSPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Time Stamp PDF JP Detail To display trans...

Page 1031: ...ture PDF when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST DVPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR DVPDF Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST SCPDF 2 Install state dspl of Trace Smooth PDF Detail To display i...

Page 1032: ... Operate Method 1 Select ST ERDS 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR ERDS Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment Supplement Memo Monitoring service function A function to send charge counter to the non Canon made charge server TR ERDS 2 Trns lcns key...

Page 1033: ...ction when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST PCL 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR PCL Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST PSLI5 2 Install state dspl PS LIPS4 LIPS LX JP Detail To display installation state of PS LIPS4 LIPS LX function JP only when disablin...

Page 1034: ... and then transferring the license Use Case When checking whether LIPS4 function JP only is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST LIPS4 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR LIPS4 Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR LIPS4 2 Trns license ke...

Page 1035: ... PCL UFR II function when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST PCLUF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR PCLUF Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST PSLIP 2 Install state dspl of PS LIPS4 func JP Detail To display installation state of PS LIPS4 function JP only wh...

Page 1036: ... transferring the license Use Case When checking whether UFR II function is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST LXUFR 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR LXUFR Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR LXUFR 2 Trns license key dspl of UFR II...

Page 1037: ...nse key to use Document Scan Lock when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST JBLK 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR JBLK Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST AFAX 2 Installation state display of Remote Fax Detail To display installation state of Remote Fax when ...

Page 1038: ...n transferring the license Use Case When checking whether Office Open XML is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST OOXML 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR OOXML Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR OOXML 2 Trns lcns key display of Offic...

Page 1039: ...er license key to use IEEE2600 1 security function when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST 2600 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR 2600 Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST OPFNT 2 Install state display of PCL Font Set Detail To display installation state of P...

Page 1040: ...nd then transferring the license Use Case When checking whether IPFAX is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST IPFAX 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR IPFAX Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value 0 TR IPFAX 2 Transfer license key dspl of IPFAX Detail To display transfer license...

Page 1041: ...nse key to use MS Office direct function when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST OFIC 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR OFIC Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST SMLG 2 Install state dspl of picture login func Detail To display installation state of picture l...

Page 1042: ... Range 24 digits Additional Functions Mode Function Settings Printer Output Report PCL Font List TR DRS 2 Trns license key dspl of DRS function Detail To display transfer license key to use DRS function when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST DRS 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license ke...

Page 1043: ...ization SP B20 2 For customization SP B21 2 For customization SP B22 2 For customization SP B23 2 For customization SP B24 2 For customization SP B25 2 For customization SP B26 2 For customization SP B27 2 For customization SP B28 2 For customization SP B29 2 For customization SP B30 2 For customization SP B31 2 For customization SP B32 2 For customization SP B33 2 For customization SP B34 2 For c...

Page 1044: ...ization SP B61 2 For customization SP B62 2 For customization SP B63 2 For customization SP B64 2 For customization SP B65 2 For customization SP B66 2 For customization SP B67 2 For customization SP B68 2 For customization SP B69 2 For customization SP B70 2 For customization SP B71 2 For customization SP B72 2 For customization SP B73 2 For customization SP B74 2 For customization SP B75 2 For c...

Page 1045: ...ization SP V22 2 For customization SP V23 2 For customization SP V24 2 For customization SP V25 2 For customization SP V26 2 For customization SP V27 2 For customization SP V28 2 For customization SP V29 2 For customization SP V30 2 For customization SP V31 2 For customization SP V32 2 For customization SP V33 2 For customization SP V34 2 For customization SP V35 2 For customization SP V36 2 For c...

Page 1046: ...ization SP V60 2 For customization SP V61 2 For customization SP V62 2 For customization SP V63 2 For customization SP V64 2 For customization SP V65 2 For customization SP V66 2 For customization SP V67 2 For customization SP V68 2 For customization SP V69 2 For customization SP V70 2 For customization SP V71 2 For customization SP V72 2 For customization SP V73 2 For customization SP V74 2 For c...

Page 1047: ...ng edge correction of Bk 2 Resolution screen no trailing edge correction of Bk 3 to 4 None 5 600 dpi error diffusion with trailing edge correction of Bk 6 Resolution screen with trailing edge correction of Bk 7 1200 dpi error diffusion no trailing edge correction of Bk 8 1200 dpi error diffusion with trailing edge correction of Bk 9 Gradation screen with trailing edge correction of Bk THRU 1 Set i...

Page 1048: ...olor at the time of test print The setting is applied to all types When setting COLOR Y to 1 and COLOR M C K to 0 a single Y color is output Use Case At test print Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Not output 1 Output Related Service Mode COPIER TEST PG COLOR M C K COLOR M 1 Setting of M color output at test print Detail To set whet...

Page 1049: ...o 1 0 Full color 1 Single color Default Value 0 PG PICK 1 Setting of test print paper source Detail To set the paper source at the time of test print output Use Case At problem analysis Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 1 to 8 1 Cassette 1 2 Cassette 2 3 Cassette 3 4 Cassette 4 5 Multi purpose Tray 6 Paper Deck 7 to 8 Not used 2 SIDE 1 Setti...

Page 1050: ...ue and then press OK key 3 Press Start button The machine outputs a test print Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99 0 N A 1 Staple front 1 2 Staple 2 points 1 3 Staple rear 1 4 Not used 5 Z fold single sleeve 1 6 2 fold 1 7 C fold 2 8 V fold 2 9 4 fold 2 10 Z fold out 3 fold 2 11 Punch Inner Puncher 3 12 Multiple hole punch 4 13 Not used 14 to 99 Spare for future use 1 Finisher 2 Multi folding machine 3 ...

Page 1051: ...isplay Adj Set Range 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 At normal state OK At failure occurrence NG Supplement Memo Remote host address IP address of PC terminal in network Loopback address 127 0 0 1 Checking TCP IP of this machine is available because the signal is returned before NIC NIC Network interface board Local host address IP address of this machine BML DISP 2 Set System Monitor scrn BMlinks supp...

Page 1052: ... Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Related Service Mode COPIER TEST NET CAP Additional Functions Mode Store Network Packet Log PONSTART 2 Set network packet capture start timing Detail To set whether to perform network packet capture from power on Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON...

Page 1053: ...ail To delete the captured packet data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch SIMPFILT 2 For R D ENCDATA 2 For R D CAPIF 2 Setting of network packet capture target Detail To set the network interface to capture the packet data Make this setting before starting network packet capture Use Case When changing the target of network pac...

Page 1054: ...t pass through the specified position Unfixed toner may be adhered on paper depending on the stop position Thus handle it with care Display Adj Set Range 0 to 255 0 OFF 1 Outlet of the Cassette Pickup Assembly 20 Registration Roller 21 Registration Roller 2nd side 30 Inlet of the Fixing Assembly 31 Inlet of the Fixing Assembly 2nd side 32 Outlet of the Fixing Assembly 33 Outlet of the Fixing Assem...

Page 1055: ...en the printout is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at Inbox print Large size 1 Small size 1 A blank sheet is not counted Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 RPT PRT 1 Report print counter Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at report print Large size 1 Small size ...

Page 1056: ...ter Detail Total pickup counter value of the Cassette 3 Large size 1 Small size 1 Use Case When checking the counter Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Amount of Change per Unit 1 C4 1 Cassette 4 pickup total counter Detail Total pickup counter value of the Cassette 4 Large size 1 Small size 1 Use Case When checking the counter Adj Set Operate Me...

Page 1057: ...per Unit 1 FEEDER COPIER COUNTER FEEDER FEED 1 DADF original pickup total counter Detail To count up the number of originals picked up from the DADF Use Case When checking the total counter of original pickup by DADF Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Amount of Change per Unit 1 DFOP CNT 1 DADF hinge open close counter Detail To count up the number of open close of the DADF hinge Use C...

Page 1058: ...counter Detail The number of pickup jam occurrences in the Cassette 1 Use Case When checking the jam counter Unit time Amount of Change per Unit 1 C2 1 Cassette 2 jam counter Detail The number of pickup jam occurrences in the Cassette 2 Use Case When checking the jam counter Unit time Amount of Change per Unit 1 C3 1 Cassette 3 jam counter Detail The number of pickup jam occurrences in the Cassett...

Page 1059: ... Stirring Screw Use Case When checking the usage status of toner Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit block Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 T SPLY C 1 C toner supply counter Detail Number of C color toner supply blocks Counted for every one rotation of Toner Stirring Screw Use Case When checking the usage status of toner Adj Set Operate Metho...

Page 1060: ...whether to shift the machine to power saving state after using the printer or scanner for a job Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit time Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 SUC A Y 2 For R D SUC A M 2 For R D SUC A C 2 For R D SUC A K 2 For R D FIN PTH 1 For R D Amount of Change per Unit 1 FR STPL 1 For R D Amount of Change per Unit 1 MSTP B 1 For R D Amount of Change per Unit 1 MSTPL...

Page 1061: ...RBL 1 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 T S UNIT 1 Transfer Separation Guide Unit prts cntr Detail Transfer Separation Guide Unit 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life...

Page 1062: ... Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 2TR ROLL 1 Sec Transfer Outer Roller parts counter Detail Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item a...

Page 1063: ...nsumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 DV UNT C 1 Developing Unit C parts...

Page 1064: ...king the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 DV UNT K 1 Developing U...

Page 1065: ...ase When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 C1 FD RL 1...

Page 1066: ...ase When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 C2 FD RL 1...

Page 1067: ...e Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 M FD RL...

Page 1068: ...cking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 FX LW BR 1 Fixing Bear...

Page 1069: ...the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 PT DR Y 1 Drum Unit Y parts counter Detail Drum Unit Y 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Selec...

Page 1070: ...Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 TR ROLC Amount of Change per Unit 1 TR ROLC 1 Prmry Transfer Roll Y ...

Page 1071: ...ct the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Supplement Memo Regardless of the read mode 1 sided 2 sided the counter is advanced every time a sheet is fed Amount of Change per Unit 1 DF SP RL 1 Separation Roller ...

Page 1072: ...king the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 PD SP RL 1 Separation Roller ...

Page 1073: ...g the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 C3 SP RL 1 Casstt3 Sprtn R...

Page 1074: ... Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 C4 SP RL...

Page 1075: ... Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit time Amount of Change per Unit 1 PUNCH 1 Punch unit parts counter Fin H1 Y1 Detail Punch Unit 1st line total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line estimated life Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts or replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the i...

Page 1076: ...9999999 Unit time Amount of Change per Unit 1 FR STPL 1 Staple free stapling counter Fin H1 Y1 Detail Number of executions of staple free stapling including at the time of paper dust removal 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter va...

Page 1077: ...replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Amount of Change per Unit 1 SW RL CL 1 Low Stck Delvry Rol Clt prts cntr Fin Y1 Detail Lower Stack Delivery Roller Clutch 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the i...

Page 1078: ... replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Defaul...

Page 1079: ...ted life value Detail To display how much the Drum Unit Y is close to the end of life in percentage When a new part is set the value becomes 0 Use Case When checking the life of Drum Unit Display Adj Set Range 0 to 999 Unit M DRM LF 1 Drum Unit M estimated life value Detail To display how much the Drum Unit M is close to the end of life in percentage When a new part is set the value becomes 0 Use ...

Page 1080: ... and large size 2nd line The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Amount of Change per Unit 1 G60 63 1 Delivered sheet counter 60 to 63 g m2 Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets w...

Page 1081: ...r is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size 2nd line The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Amount of Change per Unit 1 G106 128 1 Delivered sheet counter 106 to 128 g m2 Detail To...

Page 1082: ...e counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size 2nd line The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Amount of Change per Unit 1 G221 256 1 Delivered sheet counter 221 to 256 g m2 D...

Page 1083: ... counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size 2nd line The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Amount of Change per Unit 1 G351OVER 1 Delivered sheet counter 351 g m2 or more D...

Page 1084: ...UNCTION TRY A4 Supplement Memo If the edge of an image is still missing after adjustment of A4 paper width 297 0 mm with TRY A4 the original width may be larger than 297 1 mm Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 ADJUST FEEDER ADJUST DOCST 1 Adj of DADF img lead edge margin front Detail To adjust the leading edge margin on the front side at DADF reading Execute this item when the output image after DADF i...

Page 1085: ...witch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 LA SPD2 1 Fine adj img ratio DADF vert scan back Detail To make a fine adjustment of the back side image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at DADF reading As the value is incremented by 1 the image is reduced by 0 01 in vertical scanning direction Th...

Page 1086: ...ion reference point 1 for the DADF Original Pickup Tray A4 Use Case When replacing the Original Width Volume VR When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key TRY A5R 1 Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 2 A5R Detail To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference point 2 for the DADF Original Pickup Tray A5R Use C...

Page 1087: ...opped 2 Press OK key The operation check is completed Caution Be sure to press the OK key again after execution The operation automatically stops after approximately 5 seconds but is not completed unless the OK key is pressed STOP is not displayed Related Service Mode FEEDER FUNCTION FAN CHK SL CHK 1 Specification of DADF operation solenoid Detail To specify the solenoid of DADF to operate The sol...

Page 1088: ...Use Case At operation check Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Related Service Mode FEEDER FUNCTION FEED CHK OPTION FEEDER OPTION R ATM 1 Set DADF double feed dtct highland mode Detail To set the Double Feed Sensor of the DADF to the highland mode Set 1 if the installation site is above the altitude of 2000 meters Use Case When the installation site is above the altitude ...

Page 1089: ...front rear direction is displaced in the front 1 stapling mode When replacing the Finiser Controller PCB clearing the RAM data of the Finiser Controller PCB Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Display Adj Set Range 30 to 30 Unit mm Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 STP R1 1 Rear 1 s...

Page 1090: ... paper shifts toward the delivery side When replacing the Finiser Controller PCB clearing the RAM data of the Finiser Controller PCB enter the value of service label Use Case When the paper displacement occurs on the 1st to 2nd sheets of buffered paper When replacing the Finiser Controller PCB clearing the RAM data of the Finiser Controller PCB Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and th...

Page 1091: ...ng the RAM data of the Finiser Controller PCB Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Display Adj Set Range 20 to 20 Unit mm Related Service Mode SORTER ADJUST SDL STP2 Supplement Memo Because the staple position of the thin paper is changed by this adjustment at the same time perfo...

Page 1092: ...y 1 the position of the adjustment plate is increased by 0 1 mm Inward Outward When replacing the Finiser Controller PCB clearing the RAM data of the Finiser Controller PCB enter the value of service label Use Case When misalignment occurs in A4 size paper When replacing the Finiser Controller PCB clearing the RAM data of the Finiser Controller PCB Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value ...

Page 1093: ...y 1 the height of the swing unit is changed by angle of 0 1 degree Downward Upward When replacing the Finiser Controller PCB clearing the RAM data of the Finiser Controller PCB enter the value of service label Use Case When misalignment occurs by failure of the paper feeding to processing tray When replacing the Finiser Controller PCB clearing the RAM data of the Finiser Controller PCB Adj Set Ope...

Page 1094: ... Unit 0 1 NST SPD 1 Adj dvry speed at non collate Fin Y1 Detail To adjust the delivery speed to the stack tray in non collate mode As the value is incremented by 1 the delivery speed is increased by 10 mm sec Use Case When the stacking condition in non collate mode is poor Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 10 to 10 Unit mm s Amount of Change...

Page 1095: ...ed direction The staple free stapler position is not changed Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 FR STP Y 1 Adj stpl free stpl pstn F R Fin H1 Y1 Detail To adjust the staple position for front rear direction in the staple free stapling mode As the value is changed by 1 the staple position moves by 0 1 mm Toward rear Toward front When replacing the Finiser Controller PCB clearing the RAM data of the Fini...

Page 1096: ...egative positive by key and press OK key Caution Fin H1 After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Fin Y1 The height of Return Belt during the paper alignment on the processing tray is the total of setting values of RBLT PRS and PBLT PS2 so adjust again the setting value of RBLT PS2 if necessary because the height of Return Roller during the paper alignment on ...

Page 1097: ...ress OK key The Alignment Plate moves to the A4 paper width position 2 Set A4 paper on the Processing Tray 3 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 4 Check the operation of the Alignment Plate 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the completion of adjustment 6 Remove the paper on the Processing Tray Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Related Service Mode SORTER ADJUST...

Page 1098: ... Adj of Saddle Sttch stpl pstn Fin Y1 Detail To adjust the staple position of Saddle Stitcher when using the thin paper the paper that the paper weight is less than 64 g m2 As the value is incremented by 1 the staple position moves by 0 1mm The staple position moves toward the left at open page of the book The staple position moves toward the right at open page of the book Use Case When the staple...

Page 1099: ...ion adjustable range Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 ESC1 SPD 1 Adj Escape Tr delivery speed Fin Y1 Detail To adjust the delivery speed to the escape tray As the value is changed by 1 the delivery speed to the lower escape tray changes by 10 mm sec Use Case When the paper stacking to the escape tray is misalignment Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set ...

Page 1100: ...aper stack occurs during alignment operation on the processing tray When replacing the Finiser Controller PCB clearing the RAM data of the Finiser Controller PCB Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution The height of Return Belt during the paper alignment on the processing tray is the total of setting values of RBLT PRS and PBLT PS2 so adjust again the setting v...

Page 1101: ... FIN BK W FIN BK W 1 Writing of Fin backup data Fin H1 Y1 Detail The backup data saved in HDD is written to the finisher controller PCB Use Case When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range During operation ACTIVE At normal termination OK At abnormal termination NG Related Service...

Page 1102: ...t Used 13 Punch Feed Motor 14 Punch Motor 15 Punch Horizontal Registration Motor Fin Y1 16 to 46 16 Inlet Feed Motor 17 Pre processing Buffer Motor 18 Stack Delivery Paddle Motor 19 Not Used 20 Paper End Pushing Guide Motor 21 Stapler Shift Motor 22 Stack Tray Shift Motor 23 Swing Guide Motor 24 Front Alignment Motor 25 Rear Alignment Motor 26 Return Roller Lift Motor 27 Flapper Motor 28 Not Used ...

Page 1103: ...play Adj Set Range During operation ACTIVE At normal termination OK At abnormal termination NG Related Service Mode SORTER FUNCTION SL CHK CNT FCON 1 Parts Counter clear Finisher Fin H1 Y1 Detail To clear the parts counter that the Finisher Controller PCB counts Use Case When clearing the parts counter of the Finisher Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the...

Page 1104: ...data from Puncher Controller PCB and save in HDD Use Case When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range During operation ACTIVE At normal termination OK At abnormal termination NG Related Service Mode SORTER FUNCTION PUN BK W PUN BK W 1 Puncher backup data writing Fin H1 Y1 Detail T...

Page 1105: ...the buffer operation is not performed for all modes The alignment performance is improved but the productivity decreases When 2 is set the buffer operation is performed only for collated mode Use Case When the misalignment of the buffered paper stack occurs on the processing tray Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and press OK Caution When the buffer operation is set to OFF productivit...

Page 1106: ...rate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division Display Adj Set Range 00000000 to 11111111 FIN SP2 2 Finisher special setting 2 Fin H1 Y1 Detail To execute the Finisher special settings 2 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press ...

Page 1107: ...ecomes longer Use Case Upon user s request to improve visibility of the delivered papers Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution When 1 is set FCOT becomes longer Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Normal priority on productivity 1 Lower limit position priority on visibility Default Value 0 Related Service Mode SORTER OPTION TRY STP Supplement Memo When 1 in SORTER...

Page 1108: ...small sizes at shift sort mode Changing the setting to 1 the number of paper in a stack delivery changes as follows For plain paper 1 and 2 Number of paper in a stack changes from 5 to 2 For plain paper 3 Number of paper in a stack changes from 3 to 2 The above setting is not effective for the paper that is more than 106 g m2 or tab paper coated paper Use Case When improving the stacking alignment...

Page 1109: ...ly the tray height limit 3 Clear the limit of stack capacity of both the stapled copies and folded sheets and apply the tray height limit Default Value 0 TRY LMT 1 Set stack limit of stack tray Fin Y1 Detail To set whether to limit the stack capacity of the stack tray Set to 1 when the stack capacity of the stack tray for the small size paper except the thin paper and coated paper is changed from ...

Page 1110: ...BOARD OPTION BOARD OPTION MENU 1 2 Not used MENU 2 2 Not used MENU 3 2 Not used Default Value 0 MENU 4 2 Not used SURF OFF 1 Not used TR DSP 2 Not used 8 Service Mode 1096 ...

Page 1111: ...106 Printer Cover J1 1142 Platen Cover Type W 1146 NFC Kit B1 Flat Control Panel 1151 Reader Heater Unit J1 1160 Paper Deck Heater Unit C1 1165 Inner 2 Way Tray J1 1176 Copy Tray J2 1178 Utility Tray B1 1181 Copy Card Reader F1 Copy Card Reader Attachment B5 1185 IC Card Reader Box C1 1194 Serial Interface Kit K3 Copy Control Interface Kit A1 1201 Document Scan Lock Kit B1 1206 Voice Operation Kit...

Page 1112: ...ovable HDD Kit 1230 TYPE 4 Standard HDD Option HDD 250GB HDD Mirroring Kit 1237 TYPE 5 Standard HDD Option HDD 250GB Removable HDD Kit HDD Mirroring Kit 1243 TYPE 6 2 Option HDDs 1TB HDD Mirroring Kit 1252 TYPE 7 2 Option HDDs 1TB Removable HDD Kit HDD Mirroring Kit 1259 Voice Guidance Kit G1 1269 9 Installation 1098 ...

Page 1113: ...ymbols in this procedure 1x 1x 1x Install Screw Packaged Item Remove Tighten Loosen 1x Connect Connector Disconnect Install Harness Common for Guides and Clamps Remove 1x 1x Connect Power Cord Disconnect Check visually Check the sound Check OFF Cleaning ON Push Power Unused Parts 1x 1x 9 Installation 1099 ...

Page 1114: ...Points to Note at Installation CAUTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes 9 Installation 1100 ...

Page 1115: ...e 1 Be sure that the feet of this machine are properly set In addition be sure to keep the machine horizontal 2 Be sure to keep 100 mm or more distance from the wall to make enough room for performing the operation When option is not installed 4 100 mm or more 19 3 4 500 mm or more 19 3 4 500 mm or more 19 3 4 500 mm or more 82 3 4 2 100 mm or more 70 7 8 1 800 mm or more Booklet Finisher Y1 Paper...

Page 1116: ...ght of the machine is approx 139 kg Be sure to perform the work in accordance with the standard to handle a heavy load in each country In addition be sure to keep the machine leveled when lifting it 9 Installation 1102 ...

Page 1117: ...t To install the Copy Card Reader the Copy Card Reader Attachment Kit is required Copy Card Read er Voice Opera tion Kit Voice Guid ance Kit Utility Tray Serial Inter face Kit Copy Con trol In ter face Kit Copy Card Reader Yes Yes Yes No No Voice Opera tion Kit Yes No No Yes Yes Voice Guid ance Kit Yes No No Yes Yes Utility Tray Yes No No Yes Yes Serial Inter face Kit No Yes Yes No No Copy Control...

Page 1118: ...Unpacking 1 2 1120 mm 840 mm 769 mm 1230 mm 2350 mm 3 9 Installation 1104 ...

Page 1119: ...Checking the Contents 1x 4x 1x 2x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 2x 1x 1x 2x USA and LTN 3x EUR 4x KOREA and THAILAND 1x 230V EUR Only EUR Only Others Including guides 9 Installation 1105 ...

Page 1120: ...N The maximum weight of the host machine is approx 139 kg Be sure to perform the work in accordance with the standard to handle a heavy load in each country Be sure to keep the machine leveled when lifting it 2 CAUTION Remvoe the tape of Front Cover in step 6 Be sure not to remove the Scanner System Fixation Screw before installation of the scanner NOTE Remove the attached tapes and packaging mate...

Page 1121: ...used for explanationmay differ from the actual things the procedure is the same 5 NOTE Although pictures or illustrations used for explanationmay differ from the actual things the procedure is the same 6 NOTE The Front Cover opens when the tape of Front Cover is removed 7 8 9 Installation 1107 ...

Page 1122: ...9 NOTE Install while pressing the claw of Right Front Cover 10 NOTE Install while pressing the claw of Right Rear Cover 9 Installation 1108 ...

Page 1123: ...e Installing the Scanner 1 NOTE Be sure to keep the Scanner System Fixation Screws in a safe place for moving the machine 2x 2 Installing the Drum Unit 1 CAUTION Check that the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is positioned in the direction of the arrow If not adjust its position by turning it clockwise 9 Installation 1109 ...

Page 1124: ...r in the direction of the arrow until the protrusion is aligned with the triangle mark on the plate check that the Right Door is open and then release the pressure 3 4 1x 5 2x NOTE The removed screws will be used in step 12 9 Installation 1110 ...

Page 1125: ...orn seal by pulling the end of it in the direction of the arrow At that time be careful not to leave the torn seal in the Developing Assembly Perform the removal procedure for each color CAUTION To check that the Developing Assembly is properly installed move the Developing Assembly toward the front and rear by hand If it won t move at all check again that the Developing Assembly is properly insta...

Page 1126: ...aper on the Process Unit to block the light to the Drum Unit NOTE Step 8 to 11 is to install the Drum Unit of each color CAUTION Points to Note at Drum Unit Installation Be sure not to rotate the Drum counterclockwise while taking it out from the Container Box removing the Drum Cover and installing to the main body The Scoop up Sheet may be flipped causing toner scattering Be sure not to reinstall...

Page 1127: ...ra care to avoid hitting the Drum area or dropping the Drum Unit when removing the cover from the Drum Unit 9 NOTE Hold the handles at right and left of the Drum Unit CAUTION If pushing it in the angle the shutter may breaks Thus make sure to install it from just above 9 Installation 1113 ...

Page 1128: ...he guide of the Process Unit to the guide of the Drum Unit to install the Drum Unit 11 NOTE Hold down each of the 8 grips lightly with a finger to check that the Drum Units are installed properly 9 Installation 1114 ...

Page 1129: ...se the screw removed in step 5 Remove paper covering the Drum units CAUTION Check that there is no gap between the host machine and the Process Unit and then secure with the screw 2x 13 1x 14 9 Installation 1115 ...

Page 1130: ...rection of the arrow and then fit the projection to the triangle mark on the plate to apply pressure CAUTION When pressuring the ITB Pressure Release Lever be sure that the Right Door is opened first before pressuring 16 17 2x 18 2x 19 9 Installation 1116 ...

Page 1131: ...arging failure is likely to occur in the low humidity environment This is the case that the value of the absolute water volume outside of the machine is about 12g or more Service Mode Level1 COPIER DISPLAY ANALOG ABS HUM 2The temperature inside the machine is below 15 deg C Service Mode Level1 COPIER DISPLAY ANALOG TEMP2 1 2 CAUTION When removing the cover do not insert a screwdriver in the oval h...

Page 1132: ...2 2x 3 2x 4 5 6 NOTE Although the LED Cable is disconnected in the illustration the procedure is the same 9 Installation 1118 ...

Page 1133: ...gh the LED Cable is disconnected in the illustration the procedure is the same 1x 8 NOTE Be sure to adjust release of the Wire Saddle in accordance with the length of the cable of the Card Reader 9 Installation 1119 ...

Page 1134: ...f cushions according to the thickness of the Card Reader 10 11 12 NOTE When tightening the screw be sure to avoid the Card Reader and the cushion sheets 1x 13 NOTE Store the cable in the position as shown in the figure 9 Installation 1120 ...

Page 1135: ...14 6x 1x 3x 1x 15 NOTE Put the excess length of the cable into the Base Plate Lower Cover after connecting the USB cable 16 17 9 Installation 1121 ...

Page 1136: ...18 19 20 21 2x 9 Installation 1122 ...

Page 1137: ...r illustrations used for explanationmay differ from the actual things the procedure is the same Holding the Guide Plate Lever adjust each GuidePlate to the specified size Adjust the position of each Guide Plate according tothe paper size 3 9 Installation 1123 ...

Page 1138: ...Keep the Paper Size Label for use when changing papersize Affix the label with its lower edge aligned with the loweredge of the number label approx 5 0 mm away from thenumber label 5 0 mm Installing Stamp Cartridge 1 CAUTION Be sure to place paper in order to prevent the Copy Board Glass from being damaged when the cover of the document reading area is opened 2 3 4 9 Installation 1124 ...

Page 1139: ...install the Cleaning Cloth Storage Box to a position after checking with the user on where to install it 1 NOTE Clean the position where the Cleaning Cloth Storage Box is to be installed with lint free paper moistened with alcohol 2 9 Installation 1125 ...

Page 1140: ... performed When toner supply is completed the operation stops Approx 2 to 3 minutes Even turning OFF the main power during drum initialization developing assembly initialization and toner fill they will be re executed when turning ON the power again NOTE Turning OFF the Main Power Switch 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp a...

Page 1141: ...Guide can be changed from items in Settings Registration When configuring settings using Setup Guide excluding some of the setting items it is possible to proceed to the next setting without entering the current setting To configure skipped settings configure the settings one by one after exiting Setup Guide If the host machine is turned OFF during registration using Setup Guide Setup Guide is aut...

Page 1142: ...ment instead of the setting of system administrator privilege Press Log in and enter a password CAUTION Do not change Administrator here Enter the initial value 7654321 in the password entry field 4 Use Optional Output Tray Set whether to use the optional output tray CAUTION Make sure the output tray that is set to On is attached to the device or the output tray will not function correctly 5 Date ...

Page 1143: ...Other Installations 1 2 NOTE Only when the Cassette Pedestal is not installe 3 4 9 Installation 1129 ...

Page 1144: ... Cassette 1 or Cassette 2 Do not use the Cassette 3 or Cassette 4 NOTE Install remove the Envelope Attachment A only if requested by the customer Envelope Standards Cassette1 Type Short side X Long Side Y No 10 COM10 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 inch 104 7 x 241 3 mm DL 110 x 220 mm ISO C5 162 x 229 mm Cassette2 Type Long Side X Short side Y Monarch 7 1 2 x 3 7 8 inch 190 5 x 98 4 mm No 10 COM10 9 1 2 x 4 1 8 in...

Page 1145: ...2 When the Kit Is Used 1 2 3 4 Settings after Installation 1 Select Settings Registration Preferences Paper Settings Paper Settings Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Envelope 9 Installation 1131 ...

Page 1146: ...ttachment B CAUTION Use the Envelope Attachment B for the Cassette 1 NOTE Install remove the Envelope Attachment B only if requested by the customer If the Envelope Attachment B is not used give it to the customer and ask to store it Envelope Standards Type Short side X Long Side Y No 10 COM10 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 inch 104 7 x 241 3 mm DL 110 x 220 mm When the Kit Is Used 1 CAUTION In order to prevent sk...

Page 1147: ... If the above work does not solve the problem execute initialization of the Drum Unit for each color in Service Mode Service Mode Level 1 COPIER FUNCTION DPC DRMRSETY M C 2 Check the result of initialization of developing toner ratio in Service Mode Check that each value is within the range of 200 to 450 and then write down the value on the service label at the rear side of the Front Cover Service...

Page 1148: ...t and press OK 5 Follow the below UI and perform the operation In the case of image RUNNER ADVANCE C5560i C5540I C5535 C5535i In case of Plain Paper1 2 3 Heavy1 1 Clean the glass surface of Copyboard Glass on the host machine 2 Load A3 A4 11x17 or LTR paper to the cassette Refer to the cassette setting 3 Select Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation...

Page 1149: ... that the main body is in standby state 2 Execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection Approx 3 to 4minutes Service Mode Level 1 COPIER FUNCTION MISC P ITB INIT 3 Check that the value of the following service mode Level 1 is 350 to 350 COPIER DISPLAY MISC ITB POS COPIER DISPLAY MISC ITB POS2 4 If the value of service mode is out of range perform the ITB Alignment Adjustment NOTE Since this produ...

Page 1150: ...R DISPLAY MISC ITB POS2 13 If the value of service mode is out of range perform the ITB Alignment Adjustment again Adjusting Image Position NOTE The second side of the 2 sided copy mentioned later means the second side in the image formation order With this equipment the second side in the image formation order at the time of 2 sided copy print is equivalent to the first side of the original Casse...

Page 1151: ...tions used for explanationmay differ from the actual things the procedure is the same The cassette left edge margin adjustment for 1st side is performed with the priority on software adjustment Cassette 1 does not have the hardware adjustment mechanism 1 NOTE Make copies using the Cassette 2 and check that the left edge margin is 2 5 1 5 mm L1 image Feeding direction of paper In Case of Out of Ran...

Page 1152: ...ion of paper In Case of Out of Range 2 Change the left edge margin adjustment value for the 1st side of the Multi purpose Tray As making the following selection Service Mode level1 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ MF andset 1 value larger the left edge margin becomes 0 1mm larger 3 Write the new adjustment value on the service label ADJ MF 4 Exit from Service Mode Cassette Left Edge Margin Adjustment Se...

Page 1153: ...t 2nd side 1 Make 2 sided copy from the manual feed tray and check that the left margin on the 2nd side is 2 5 2 0mm 2 If the left margin is out of the specification change the adjustment value for the left margin on the 2nd side from the Multi Purpose Tray Service Mode Level 1 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ MFRE 1 increment of the value reduces the left margin by 0 1mm 3 To make the setting value eff...

Page 1154: ...or Factory default password is as follows System administration division ID Administrator System administration password 7654321 CAUTION Following setting needs to be ON to perform network setting Settings Registration Preferences Network Confirm Network Connection Set Changes Settings Registration Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings Use IPv4 4 Turn OFF the main power switch 5 Turn O...

Page 1155: ...rect 1 Select the following Settings Registration Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings IP Address Settings and note the IP address in the IP Address field 2 Select the following Settings Registration Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings PING Command and enter the IP address If the display shows Response from the host the IP address specified on the host machine is correct...

Page 1156: ...ror may occur when turning ON the power COPIER OPTION FNC SW W SCNR Checking the Contents 1x M4x10 2x 2x Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug Installation Outline Drawing Installation Proc...

Page 1157: ...2 2x NOTE The removed screws and rubber caps will be used in step 12 3 3x 4 4x NOTE The parts removed in the following steps 5 6 and 7 will be used in step 9 5 4x 9 Installation 1143 ...

Page 1158: ...6 2x 7 2x 8 2x 2x 9 NOTE Use the parts removed in steps 5 6 and 7 2x 1x 4x 9 Installation 1144 ...

Page 1159: ...10 2x 11 NOTE Use the screws and rubber caps removed in step 2 M4x10 4x 9 Installation 1145 ...

Page 1160: ...the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off and then disconnect the power plug Installation Outline Drawing Installation Procedure 1 4x 2 2x NOTE The removed screws and Rubber Caps will be used in step 6 9 Installation 1146 ...

Page 1161: ...3 3x 4 4x 5 6 NOTE Use the screws and Rubber Caps removed in step 2 2x 7 2x 9 Installation 1147 ...

Page 1162: ...8 2x Binding M4x8 9 10 9 Installation 1148 ...

Page 1163: ...rence 0 3 mm or less between the White Plate and the Index Sheet Check that the White Plate is not placed on the Index Sheet ADF ADF ADF ADF Index Sheet Index Sheet Index Sheet Index Sheet White Plate White Plate White Plate White Plate Reader Unit Reader Unit Reader Unit Reader Unit 14 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet 9 Installation 1149 ...

Page 1164: ...15 Turn ON the main power switch 9 Installation 1150 ...

Page 1165: ...e used in Installing the NFC Kit Checking the Contents 1x Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off and then disconnect the power plug Installation Outline Drawing Installation procedure Remove the Control Panel 1 2 2x 9 Installation 1151 ...

Page 1166: ...3 2x 4 3x 5 CAUTION Be sure to place 5 or more sheets of paper to prevent damage After completing the work remove papers 6 4x 9 Installation 1152 ...

Page 1167: ...7 1x 8 9 1x 10 2x 11 6x 9 Installation 1153 ...

Page 1168: ...12 1x 13 CAUTION Be careful not to drop the washer 2x 9 Installation 1154 ...

Page 1169: ...ng the NFC Kit CAUTION Be sure to place 5 or more sheets of paper to prevent damage After completing the work remove papers When installing the parts be sure not to get the Protection Sheet caught 1 5x 3x 9 Installation 1155 ...

Page 1170: ...2 1x 3 CAUTION Be careful not to drop the washer 2x 4 1x 9 Installation 1156 ...

Page 1171: ...5 6x 6 2x 7 1x 8 9 1x 9 Installation 1157 ...

Page 1172: ...10 11 CAUTION Do not install the screws to the locations with X marks Tighten screws during the installation of cover in step 13 3x 12 4x 9 Installation 1158 ...

Page 1173: ...he value to 1 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL NFC USE NOTE When System Manager Information Settings is set it is required to log in as a system manager in accordance with instructions of the user administrator 5 Select Settings Registration Management Settings Device Management Use NFC Card Emulation and set the item to ON 6 Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch 7 When a message prompting the version...

Page 1174: ...that the display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off and then disconnect the power plug Installation Outline Drawing Installation Procedure 1 2x 2 CAUTION When removing the Copyboard Glass be careful not to touch the glass surface and the White Plate on the back If the surface becomes dirty clean it with lint free paper White Plate 9 Installation 1160 ...

Page 1175: ...he Scanner Box to the center 4 NOTE Install the Cable Clamps in the direction as shown in the figure 5 CAUTION Be sure to hold down the Reader Heater Harness because it may interfere with moving of the Scanner Box if it is not connected properly 1x Binding M4x6 2x 1x 9 Installation 1161 ...

Page 1176: ...mps in the direction as shown in the figure 7 CAUTION Be sure to hold down the Reader Heater Harness because it may interfere with moving of the Scanner Box if it is not connected properly 1x 2x 1x Binding M4x6 9 Installation 1162 ...

Page 1177: ...ION When installing the Copyboard Glass be careful not to touch the glass surface and back side of the White Plate If the surface becomes dirty clean it with lint free paper White Plate 2x 9 Installation 1163 ...

Page 1178: ... that turn ON the environment switch 10 NOTE The Environment Switch Cover is included in the host machine 11 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet 12 Turn ON the main power switch 9 Installation 1164 ...

Page 1179: ...ents 11 5 10 4 9 12 1 2 3 7 13 14 8 6 1 Heater Unit 1pc 2 Screw Binding M4x4 1pc 3 Wire Saddle Black 5pcs 4 Wire Saddle White 3pcs 1pc is not used 5 Plug Cover 1pc 6 Screw Binding M4x6 1pc 7 Toothed Washer 1pc 8 AC Cable 1pc 9 Relay Harness Unit 1pc 10 Power Supply Label 2pcs 1pc is not used 11 AC Input Connector 1pc 12 Screw Tooth Washer Sems M4x8 2pcs 13 Cable Protection Bushing 1pc 14 AC Output...

Page 1180: ...om the outlet Preparation of the Paper Deck Unit 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Disconnect the lattice connector from the host machine and then release the cable from the wire saddle 1x 1x 3 Pull the release lever and then withdraw the Paper Deck Unit until it stops 9 Installation 1166 ...

Page 1181: ...OTE Insert screwdrivers into the hole indicated by the arrow Insert screwdrivers upward as the release lever is equipped above the hole 5 Remove the rear cover 5 Screws 5x 6 Cut the blindfold cover from the rear cover the removed blindfold cover is not used 7 Remove the right cover 5 Screws 5x 9 Installation 1167 ...

Page 1182: ...ve the upper cover 3 Screws 3x 10 Put the connector through the hole in the top plate and then fix the Heater Unit in the Paper Deck Unit 2 Hooks 1 Screw Binding M4x4 1x Binding M4x4 11 Insert the connector of the Heater Unit to the panel mount part 9 Installation 1168 ...

Page 1183: ...he AC input connector in the power cord mount and then fix the toothed washer and the grounding wire 1 Screw Binding M4x6 1x Binding M4x6 13 Attach the wire saddles black as shown in the figure 9 Installation 1169 ...

Page 1184: ...fix it with the wire saddles black and snap bands 5 Wire saddles black 2 Snap bands 2x 7x 15 Attach the upper cover 1 Screw RS tightening M4x8 2 Screws Binding M4x8 3x 16 Fasten the 2 screws to attach the upper left cover 2x 9 Installation 1170 ...

Page 1185: ...ch the right cover 5 Screws RS tightening M4x8 5x 18 Attach the rear cover 5 Screws RS tightening M4x8 5x 19 Close the compartment and then connect the Paper Deck Unit with the host machine 9 Installation 1171 ...

Page 1186: ...used 2 Attach the wire saddle white 3 Remove the plug cover the removed plug cover is not used the removed screw is used at late procedure 1 Screw 1x 4 Connect the host machine and the Paper Deck Unit with the AC cable and then fix it with the wire saddles 2 Wire saddles white 2x 2x 9 Installation 1172 ...

Page 1187: ...ug cover with the screw removed at procedure 3 1 Screw Binding M4x4 1x 6 Connect the lattice connector of the Paper Deck to the host machine and then fix the cable with the wire saddle 1 Wire saddle 1x 1x 9 Installation 1173 ...

Page 1188: ...7 Paste the power supply label on the lower part of the AC input connector 8 Turn ON the host machine 9 Installation 1174 ...

Page 1189: ...s are remained after the installation procedure 1 Screw Tooth Washer Sems M4x8 2pcs 2 Cable Protection Bushing 1pc 3 AC Output Connector 1pc 4 Power Supply Label 1pc 5 Wire Saddle white 1pc 6 Plug Cover 1pc 7 Blindfold Cover 1pc 8 Blindfold Seal 2pcs 9 Installation 1175 ...

Page 1190: ...e Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off and then disconnect the power plug Installation Outline Drawing Installation Procedure 1 1x TP M3x6 9 Installation 1176 ...

Page 1191: ...allation 1 Set the value of the following service mode Level 1 to 1 COPIER OPTION ACC IN TRAY 2 Turn OFF and then ON the main power 3 Check that the following menu has been added Settings Registration Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings Tray Designation 4 Press Tray Designation 5 According to the user s request set the function of delivering paper to the Tray A B C and the priority orde...

Page 1192: ...n power switch 2 Check that the display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off and then disconnect the power plug Installation Outline Drawing Preparation before Installation CAUTION The Wire Tray attached to the Copy Tray is not necessary for this machine How to remove the Wire Tray 1 9 Installation 1178 ...

Page 1193: ...2 Installation Procedure 1 9 Installation 1179 ...

Page 1194: ...e main power 3 Check that the following menu has been added Settings Registration Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings Tray Designation 4 Press Tray Designation 5 According to the user s request set the function of delivering paper to the Tray A B C and the priority order of the trays and press OK The priority order is displayed as 1 2 and 3 6 Check that the behavior is in accordance wit...

Page 1195: ...ility Tray No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Available No Unavailable CAUTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes Checking the Contents The parts using to install the keyboard 1x 1x 4x 2x 5x 7x M4x8 Black M4x14 M4x10 M4x8 Black 3x Installation Outline Drawing Installation Procedure 1 NOTE Remove the packin...

Page 1196: ...3 CAUTION To avoid damage do not pull the Utility Tray too much 4 9 Installation 1182 ...

Page 1197: ...5 CAUTION Points to Note at Installation Be sure to install it by using the holes with the marks D G J M and P A Q R S B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P D P M J G 5x M4x8 Black 6 9 Installation 1183 ...

Page 1198: ...7 2x 2x M4x8 Black When Installing the USB Keyboard 1 9 Installation 1184 ...

Page 1199: ...eration Table of Options Combination Utility Tray Voice Opera tion Voice Guid ance Kit Copy Control I F Kit Serial I F Kit Copy Card Reader Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Available No Unavailable CAUTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes Checking the Contents Copy Card Reader F1 1x 1x RS 7LJKWHQLQJ M4...

Page 1200: ...ower switch of the host machine 2 Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug Installation Outline Drawing Installation 1 3x 2 3 4 1x 1x 9 Installation 1186 ...

Page 1201: ...5 2x NOTE The removed screws will be used in step 9 6 1x 1x NOTE The removed screws will be used in step 9 7 2x 1x 8 2x 1x 9 Installation 1187 ...

Page 1202: ...removed in steps 5 and 6 3x 1x 10 CAUTION Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops Be sure to push A part hard to install it otherwise the connector may not be connected properly A 1x 1x 9 Installation 1188 ...

Page 1203: ...11 12 13 3x 14 1x 1x Lower Cover 15 1x 9 Installation 1189 ...

Page 1204: ...16 1x 1x 17 1x 1x 18 1x 19 TP M3x12 2x 9 Installation 1190 ...

Page 1205: ...20 TP M3x6 4x 21 22 9 Installation 1191 ...

Page 1206: ...To ensure that the connector does not become disconnected be sure to place the tie wrap of the Card Reader External Relay Harness on the inside of the Connector Cover 1x 1x TP M3x6 24 1x 25 26 9 Installation 1192 ...

Page 1207: ...d by a user 1 to 2001 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD 1 Starting from the entered card number the number of cards set in step 4 can be used 6 Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch to enable the setting values 7 Insert a card with a card number that has been registered and check that the machine operates normally NOTE Perform the following operations to change the number of cards departments afte...

Page 1208: ...e and deformation of screw holes Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug Installation Outline Drawing Checking the Contents 1x 1x 2x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 11x without LED indication with LED indicat...

Page 1209: ...Installation Procedure 1 2 2x 3 2x 4 2x 9 Installation 1195 ...

Page 1210: ...5 6x 6 4x 7 NOTE Be sure to adjust release of the Wire Saddle in accordance with the length of the cable of the Card Reader 8 1x 9 Installation 1196 ...

Page 1211: ...E Be sure to adjust the number of cushions according to the thickness of the Card Reader 10 11 12 NOTE When tightening the screw be sure to avoid the Card Reader and the cushion sheets 1x 9 Installation 1197 ...

Page 1212: ...3 NOTE Store the cable in the position as shown in the figure 6x 1x 3x 1x 14 NOTE Put the excess length of the cable into the Base Plate Lower Cover after connecting the USB cable 15 9 Installation 1198 ...

Page 1213: ...16 17 18 19 2x 9 Installation 1199 ...

Page 1214: ...20 2x 21 22 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet 23 Turn the main power switch ON 9 Installation 1200 ...

Page 1215: ... Card Read er Serial I F Kit Copy Con trol I F Kit Serial I F Kit Yes Yes Yes No No Copy Control I F Kit Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Available No Unavailable CAUTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes Checking the Contents Serial Interface Kit K3 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 2x 2x TP M3 x 6 3x 1x 1x Copy Control ...

Page 1216: ...switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug Installation Outline Drawing Installation Procedure Preparation 1 3x 2 3 9 Installation 1202 ...

Page 1217: ...4 1x 1x 5 2x Installing the Serial Interface Kit 1 1x 1x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 3 2 1x 9 Installation 1203 ...

Page 1218: ...3 NOTE Use the screw removed in step 1 3x 1x Installing the Copy Control interface Kit 1 2 2x 1x 9 Installation 1204 ...

Page 1219: ...troller PCB 1 until it stops Be sure to push A part hard to install it otherwise the connector may not be connected properly A 1x 1x 2 3 4 3x 5 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet 6 Turn the main power switch ON 9 Installation 1205 ...

Page 1220: ... installing the Image Analysis Board CAUTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes Checking the Contents 3x 1x 1x 2x TP M3x6 1x Binding M3x4 TP M3x6 2x 1x Check Items When Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be ...

Page 1221: ...2 3 4 1x 1x 5 1x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 7 9 Installation 1207 ...

Page 1222: ...w removed in step 5 3x TP M3x6 1x 8 CAUTION Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops Be sure to push A part hard to install it otherwise the connector may not be connected properly A 1x 1x 9 Installation 1208 ...

Page 1223: ...ompting the user to update the version will appear every time the host machine is started In the service mode shown below it is possible to set not to display the message prompting the user to update the version Service mode Level 2 COPIER OPTION FNC SW VER CHNG 4 Ask users to install license 5 Turn OFF ON the main power switch 6 Press the counter check key on the control panel 7 Press Check Devic...

Page 1224: ...ng the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes Checking the Contents 1x 1x 1x 2x Binding M4x20 2x Binding M4x14 1x 1x 1x 2x 1x Binding M3x14 7x 1x TP M3x6 Binding M4x14 1x 1x 1x TP M3x6 1x 1x Others Including guides Check Items When Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch o...

Page 1225: ...Installation Outline Drawing Installation Procedure 1 3x 2 3 4 1x 9 Installation 1211 ...

Page 1226: ...5 1x 1x 6 2x 2x 7 9 Installation 1212 ...

Page 1227: ... 1 flatly Reason Due to the protruded plate the PCB may be deformed if work is performed while it is placed at an angle 9 2x NOTE The removed screws will be used at next step 10 CAUTION Check that the connector is connected properly NOTE Use the screw removed at previous step TP㸹M3x6 3x 1x 9 Installation 1213 ...

Page 1228: ... 12 13 2x 2x 14 CAUTION Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops Be sure to push A part hard to install it otherwise the connector may not be connected properly A 1x 1x 9 Installation 1214 ...

Page 1229: ...15 16 17 3x 18 19 2x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 21 20 Binding M4x14 Binding M3x14 2x M3x14 M4x14 9 Installation 1215 ...

Page 1230: ...21 NOTE Use the screw removed in step 19 2x 22 23 24 15 0 mm 15 0 mm 25 2x 4x 9 Installation 1216 ...

Page 1231: ...on Preferences Accessibility Voice Navigation Settings Voice Navigation at Startup and make sure that is Select Mode at Startup set 5 Settings Registration Preferences Accessibility Voice Navigation Settings and make sure that Tune Microphone is displayed 6 Turn OFF ON the main power of the Host Machine Operation Check When Starting to Use 1 Press Reset key or the Voice Recognition button for more...

Page 1232: ...t TYPE 1 TYPE 1 Option HDD 1TB on page 1221 TYPE 2 Removing the HDD Preparation on page 1219 TYPE 2 Removable HDD Kit on page 1224 TYPE 3 Removing the HDD Preparation on page 1219 TYPE 3 Option HDD 1TB Removable HDD Kit on page 1230 TYPE 4 Removing the HDD Preparation on page 1219 TYPE 4 Standard HDD Option HDD 250GB HDD Mirroring Kit on page 1237 TYPE 5 Removing the HDD Preparation on page 1219 T...

Page 1233: ...after performing this procedure Removed screws will be reused in the installation procedure of each TYPE 1 3x 2 NOTE The Right Upper Cover will open at the same time 3 4 NOTE The removed screw will not be used to install the Removable HDD Kit 1x 5 NOTE When replacing the HDD with an Option HDD 1TB the removed HDD will not be used 9 Installation 1219 ...

Page 1234: ...6 NOTE Do not tighten the screw here 7 NOTE Hold the handle to remove the Main Controller PCB 1 1x 1x 8 2x 2x 9 9 Installation 1220 ...

Page 1235: ...ning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure 1 1x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 6 2 9 Installation 1221 ...

Page 1236: ... 5 6 NOTE Use the screw removed in step 1 1x HDD Initialization Procedure 1 Requirements 1 PC Service Support Tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed 2 Cross Ethernet Cable when SST is used 9 Installation 1222 ...

Page 1237: ...rt up SST and click the USB icon displayed in the target selection screen 3 Select the drive the model series and the version to be written to the USB flash drive and click Confirm 4 Click Start and after the version has been written to the USB flash drive click OK and then remove the USB flash drive 5 Terminate the SST 6 Connect the USB flash drive to the host machine and start the host machine w...

Page 1238: ... OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure CAUTION Be sure to perform Removing the HDD Preparation on page 1219 before performing the following work Installing the Removable HDD Kit 1 2x NOTE The removed screws will be used in step 3 9 Installation 1224 ...

Page 1239: ...DD Connector Support Plate and replace it with the iVDR Cable 1 Red A HDD Sig1 Pow1 The removed cable will not be used 2x 2x 3 NOTE Connect the assembled iVDR Cable 1 Red A HDD Sig1 Pow1 Use the screws removed in step 1 2x 4 9 Installation 1225 ...

Page 1240: ...5 2x 2x 6 CAUTION Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops Be sure to push A part hard to install it otherwise the connector may not be connected properly A 1x 1x 9 Installation 1226 ...

Page 1241: ... sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly resulting in poor contact 3 NOTE Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number and affix it to the area indicated in the figure HDD No XXXXXXXX Serial No 9 Ins...

Page 1242: ...4 5 6 7 Be sure to request the user to padlock the removable HDD to discourage theft 8 NOTE The Right Upper Cover will open at the same time 9 10 3x 9 Installation 1228 ...

Page 1243: ...11 NOTE Affix the HDD Caution Label in the appropriate language by aligning it with the upper left corner 9 Installation 1229 ...

Page 1244: ...n Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure CAUTION Be sure to perform Removing the HDD Preparation on page 1219 before performing the following work Installing the Removable HDD Kit 1 2x NOTE The removed screws will be ...

Page 1245: ...DD Connector Support Plate and replace it with the iVDR Cable 1 Red A HDD Sig1 Pow1 The removed cable will not be used 2x 2x 3 NOTE Connect the assembled iVDR Cable 1 Red A HDD Sig1 Pow1 Use the screws removed in step 1 2x 4 9 Installation 1231 ...

Page 1246: ...5 2x 2x 6 CAUTION Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops Be sure to push A part hard to install it otherwise the connector may not be connected properly A 1x 1x 9 Installation 1232 ...

Page 1247: ...x8 included with the Option HDD 2x P Tightening M3x8 2 Sems M3x4 4x 3 CAUTION Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion Connector 1x 4 NOTE Use the 2 screws P Tightening M3x8 included with the Removable HDD Kit P Tightening M3x8 2x 9 Installation 1233 ...

Page 1248: ... the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly resulting in poor contact 5 NOTE Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number and affix it to the area indicated in the figure HDD No XXXXXXXX Serial No 6 7 8 9 Be sure to request the user to padlock the removable HDD to discourage theft 9 Installation 1234 ...

Page 1249: ...cedure 1 Requirements 1 PC Service Support Tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed 2 Cross Ethernet Cable when SST is used 2 Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1 If both PC and the machine are on turn them off 2 Connect the PC and the host machine using an Cross Ethernet cable when SST is used 3 Turn on the PC 9 Installation 1235 ...

Page 1250: ...d the version to be written to the USB flash drive and click Confirm 4 Click Start and after the version has been written to the USB flash drive click OK and then remove the USB flash drive 5 Terminate the SST 6 Connect the USB flash drive to the host machine and start the host machine with download mode in safe mode 7 When the USB menu is displayed press keys on the Control Panel in the order sho...

Page 1251: ... Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure CAUTION Be sure to perform Removing the HDD Preparation on page 1219 before performing the following work Installing the HDD Mirroring Kit 1 1x 2 9 Installa...

Page 1252: ...3 TP M3x8 Black 2x 4 TP M3x6 2x 5 9 Installation 1238 ...

Page 1253: ... 1 Red to A on the Controller PCB Be sure to connect the HDD Cable 2 Blue to B on the Controller PCB 2x 2x A A B B 7 CAUTION Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops Be sure to push A part hard to install it otherwise the connector may not be connected properly A 1x 1x 9 Installation 1239 ...

Page 1254: ...8 9 NOTE Return the HDD removed from the host machine to the Slot 1 Left Assembling and Installing the Option HDD 1 2x P Tightening M3x8 2 Sems M3x4 4x 9 Installation 1240 ...

Page 1255: ...NOTE Install the Option HDD to the Slot 2 Right 4 NOTE Use the screw removed in step 4 of Removing the HDD Preparation 1x 5 NOTE The Right Upper Cover will open at the same time 6 7 3x 9 Installation 1241 ...

Page 1256: ...r occurs during the rebuild process at the initial installation the hard disk needs to be replaced Call service rep reexecute the process with the following procedure 1 Check that the lighting red LED is HDD2 2 Select Service Mode Level 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW W RAID and set 0 3 To enable the setting value turn OFF ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine 4 Select Service Mode Level 1 CO...

Page 1257: ... M3x8 Black 2x 1x 1x Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure CAUTION Be sure to perform Removing the HDD Preparation on page 1219 before performing the following work Installing the...

Page 1258: ...oved screws will be used in step 5 4 NOTE Disconnect the HDD Cable from the HDD Connector Support Plate and replace it with the iVDR Cable 1 Red A HDD Sig1 Pow1 The removed cable will not be used 2x 2x 9 Installation 1244 ...

Page 1259: ... HDD Sig1 Pow1 Use the screws removed in step 3 2x 6 NOTE Use the iVDR Cable 2 Blue A HDD Sig2 Pow2 included with the Removable HDD Kit TP M3x8 Black 2x 7 NOTE Connect the assembled iVDR Cable 2 Blue A HDD Sig2 Pow2 TP M3x6 2x 8 9 Installation 1245 ...

Page 1260: ... Pow1 to A on the Controller PCB Be sure to connect the iVDR Cable 2 Blue A HDD Sig2 Pow2 to B on the Controller PCB A A B B 2x 4x 10 CAUTION Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops Be sure to push A part hard to install it otherwise the connector may not be connected properly A 1x 1x 9 Installation 1246 ...

Page 1261: ...with the Removable HDD Kit P Tightening M3x8 2x CAUTION Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly resulting in poor contact 3 NOTE Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number and affix it to the ar...

Page 1262: ... HDD removed from the host machine to the Slot 1 Left Assembling and Installing the Option HDD 1 NOTE Use the 2 screws P Tightening M3x8 included with the Option HDD 2x P Tightening M3x8 2 Sems M3x4 4x 9 Installation 1248 ...

Page 1263: ...re to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly resulting in poor contact 5 NOTE Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number and affix it to the area indicated in the figure HDD No XXXXXXXX Serial No 9 Instal...

Page 1264: ...all the Option HDD to the Slot 2 Right 2 2 1 7 1x 8 Be sure to request the user to padlock the removable HDD to discourage theft 9 NOTE The Right Upper Cover will open at the same time 10 11 3x 9 Installation 1250 ...

Page 1265: ...process starts after setting 1 for W RAID If an error occurs during the rebuild process at the initial installation the hard disk needs to be replaced Call service rep reexecute the process with the following procedure 1 Check that the lighting red LED is HDD2 2 Select Service Mode Level 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW W RAID and set 0 3 To enable the setting value turn OFF ON the Main Power Supply Switch ...

Page 1266: ...g OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure CAUTION Be sure to perform Removing the HDD Preparation on page 1219 before performing the following work Installing the HDD Mirroring Kit 1 1x 2 9 Installation 12...

Page 1267: ...3 TP M3x8 Black 2x 4 TP M3x6 2x 5 9 Installation 1253 ...

Page 1268: ... 1 Red to A on the Controller PCB Be sure to connect the HDD Cable 2 Blue to B on the Controller PCB 2x 2x A A B B 7 CAUTION Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops Be sure to push A part hard to install it otherwise the connector may not be connected properly A 1x 1x 9 Installation 1254 ...

Page 1269: ...bling and Installing the Option HDD NOTE Install the 2 Option HDDs according to the steps 1 to 2 1 2x P Tightening M3x8 2 Sems M3x4 4x 3 NOTE Install the first Option HDD to the Slot 1 Left 9 Installation 1255 ...

Page 1270: ... Install the second Option HDD to the Slot 2 Right 5 NOTE Use the screw removed in step 4 of Removing the HDD Preparation 1x 6 NOTE The Right Upper Cover will open at the same time 7 8 3x 9 Installation 1256 ...

Page 1271: ...network cable to the machine In case of USB flash drive 1 Connect the USB flash drive to the PC 2 Start up SST and click the USB icon displayed in the target selection screen 3 Select the drive the model series and the version to be written to the USB flash drive and click Confirm 4 Click Start and after the version has been written to the USB flash drive click OK and then remove the USB flash dri...

Page 1272: ...Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in the consideration Executing Auto Gradation Adjustment When the high capacity HDD is installed the machine initializes its HDD resetting the data used for auto gradation correction ...

Page 1273: ...lack 2x 1x 1x Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure CAUTION Be sure to perform Removing the HDD Preparation on page 1219 before performing the following work Installing the Remova...

Page 1274: ...oved screws will be used in step 5 4 NOTE Disconnect the HDD Cable from the HDD Connector Support Plate and replace it with the iVDR Cable 1 Red A HDD Sig1 Pow1 The removed cable will not be used 2x 2x 9 Installation 1260 ...

Page 1275: ... HDD Sig1 Pow1 Use the screws removed in step 3 2x 6 NOTE Use the iVDR Cable 2 Blue A HDD Sig2 Pow2 included with the Removable HDD Kit TP M3x8 Black 2x 7 NOTE Connect the assembled iVDR Cable 2 Blue A HDD Sig2 Pow2 TP M3x6 2x 8 9 Installation 1261 ...

Page 1276: ... the iVDR Cable 2 Blue A HDD Sig2 Pow2 to B on the Controller PCB A A B B 2x 4x 10 CAUTION Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops Be sure to push A part hard to install it otherwise the connector may not be connected properly A 1x 1x Assembling and Installing the Option HDD NOTE Install the 2 Option HDDs according to the steps 1 to 4 9 Installation 1262 ...

Page 1277: ...ems M3x4 4x 3 CAUTION Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion Connector 1x 4 NOTE Use the 2 screws P Tightening M3x8 included with the Removable HDD Kit P Tightening M3x8 2x 9 Installation 1263 ...

Page 1278: ...ting in poor contact 5 NOTE Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number and affix it to the area indicated in the figure NOTE Affix the HDD No 1 to the HDD to be installed to the Slot 1 Left Affix the HDD No 2 to the HDD to be installed to the Slot 2 Right When affixing HDD No 1 HDD No XXXXXXXX Serial No When affixing HDD No 2 HDD No XXXXXXXX Serial No 9 ...

Page 1279: ...6 7 NOTE Be sure to install the HDD No 1 to the Slot 1 Left Be sure to install the HDD No 2 to the Slot 2 Right HDD No 1 HDD No 2 2 2 1 9 Installation 1265 ...

Page 1280: ... padlock the removable HDD to discourage theft 10 NOTE The Right Upper Cover will open at the same time 11 12 3x 13 NOTE Affix the HDD Caution Label in the appropriate language by aligning it with the upper left corner 9 Installation 1266 ...

Page 1281: ...network cable to the machine In case of USB flash drive 1 Connect the USB flash drive to the PC 2 Start up SST and click the USB icon displayed in the target selection screen 3 Select the drive the model series and the version to be written to the USB flash drive and click Confirm 4 Click Start and after the version has been written to the USB flash drive click OK and then remove the USB flash dri...

Page 1282: ...Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in the consideration Executing Auto Gradation Adjustment When the high capacity HDD is installed the machine initializes its HDD resetting the data used for auto gradation correction ...

Page 1283: ...screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes Checking the Contents 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x Binding M4x6 1x TP M3x6 3x Binding M4x20 2x 2x 1x 1x Binding M4x16 1x Binding M3x16 1x 3x TP M3x6 4x 1x Binding M4x16 Others Including guides Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power sw...

Page 1284: ...Installation Outline Drawing Installation Procedure 1 3x 2 3 4 1x 9 Installation 1270 ...

Page 1285: ...5 1x 1x 6 2x 2x 7 9 Installation 1271 ...

Page 1286: ...ure to place the removed Main Controller PCB 1 flatly Reason Due to the protruded plate the PCB may be deformed if work is performed while it is placed at an angle 9 2x 10 CAUTION Check that the connector is connected properly TP㸹M3x6 3x 1x 11 4x 9 Installation 1272 ...

Page 1287: ... 13 2x 2x 14 CAUTION Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops Be sure to push A part hard to install it otherwise the connector may not be connected properly A 1x 1x 9 Installation 1273 ...

Page 1288: ...15 16 17 3x 18 19 Binding M4x16 Binding M3x16 M4x16 2x M3x16 20 Binding M4x6 1x 9 Installation 1274 ...

Page 1289: ... Speaker Cable 50mm 22 23 NOTE Do not affix the Cord Guide on the Face Seal A A NOTE When using in combination with the Copy Card Reader Affix the 2 Cord Guides A as shown in the figure and use the Wire Saddle B included in the Card Reader Attachment 3x A B 9 Installation 1275 ...

Page 1290: ...ccessibility Voice Navigation Settings Use Voice Navigation and check that the setting is ON 4 Select Settings Registration Preferences Accessibility Voice Navigation Settings Voice Guide from Speakers and check that the setting is ON Operation Check When Starting to Use 1 Press reset key 3secs or more 2 Press Main Menu in Control Panel 3 If the display in panel screen is boxed with red frame Voic...

Page 1291: ... Tool 1278 General Circuit Diagram 1279 Backup Data 1282 Detail of HDD partition 1292 Software Counter Specifications 1294 Removal 1300 Target PCBs of Automatic Update 1303 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored 1304 ...

Page 1292: ...7 Dow Corning made Super Lube Grease Worm Gear FY9 6005 Chemical synthesis oil 85 g Lubricant FLOIL G 337 Scanner Rail FY9 6030 Synthetic hydrocarbon oil 50 cc Conductive grease Applied to the Drum Heater sliding area and the ends of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Electrical continuity of the high voltage contact point FY9 6008 Barrierta IMI 10 g Applied to the ends of the Secondary Transfer ...

Page 1293: ... 4 5 6 1 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 9 1 7 12 1 2 2 12 7 9 9 1 1 1 1 3 1 7 7 3 1 7 7 3 7 7 1 3 1 7 7 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1...

Page 1294: ... 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Device Port LED PCB Motion Sensor Control Panel KEY PCB Control Panel CPU PCB Riser PCB NFC PCB Speaker POWER_ES_LED LED_TA_G LED_ST_G LED_TA_R POWER_LED GND DKEY0 DKEY1 DKEY2 DKEY5 DKEY7 SOFT_SW_N SKEY0 SKEY1 SKEY2 SKEY3 SKEY4 SKEY5 SKEY6 SKEY7 GND 3 3NFC S...

Page 1295: ... BC_RX_11 AP_LOAD_01 AP_LOAD_11 BD_TX_1 GND GND GND GND 6V 6V GND GND GND GND GND 6V GND 12V 12V 12V 12V GND 3 4V 3 2 1 4 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 20 19 18 17 16 25 24 23 22 21 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 49 47 50 48 46 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 47 49 46 48 50 I_OUT_R2 DC_OUT_R I_OU...

Page 1296: ...rity policy settings and the security administrator password HDD Clear Clear Clear Clear 8 UA User Authentication information Management Settings User Management Authentication Management Register Edit Authentication User HDD Clear Clear Printer Settings HDD Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear 8 Set Paper Information HDD Clear Clear 8 Setting items for each menu in Main Menu Copy Scan and Send Fax Scan ...

Page 1297: ... with the Delayed Send mode HDD Clear Clear 2 10 Job logs HDD Clear Clear 8 Audit Log HDD Clear Clear Clear 8 Management Settings Device Management Certificate Settings HDD Clear Auto Adjust Gradation setting values FLAS H HD D Clear Clear Clear Clear PS font HDD Clear Clear 1 Key information to be used for encryption when TPM is OFF FLAS H Clear 11 Clear 12 Clear Clear Key and settings informatio...

Page 1298: ...s model Com patibili ty V3 2 model to this model Yes No Method Loca tion Address List HDD FLASH Yes RUI Settings Registration Man agement Settings Data Manage ment Import Export individuslly Address Lists PC Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Forwarding Settings HDD FLASH Yes RUI Settings Registration Man agement Settings Data Manage ment Import Export individuslly Device Settings Forwarding Settings Address B...

Page 1299: ...s HDD No No No No No Yes 6 Download Mode Meap back PC US B No Setting items for Quick Menu Button Size information Layout of the Shared tab HDD No No No Wallpaper Setting Background of the Shared tab HDD No No No Button information in Quick Menu Shared HDD No No No Restrict Quick Menu HDD No No No Setting items for Main Men Button settings in Main Menu HDD No No No No No No No Button settings on t...

Page 1300: ... Manage ment Settings Data Management TPM Settings USB No No No No No No Manage Personal Settings Display Language HDD No No No Accessibility Settings HDD No No No Default Screen HDD No No No Default Job Settings HDD No No No Quick Menu Personal layout of the Personal tab and background of the Personal tab HDD No No No Address Book Personal Group HDD Yes RUI Settings Registration Man agement Setti...

Page 1301: ...r Authentication information Management Settings User Management Authentication Management Register Edit Authentication User No Printer Settings No Set Paper Information No Setting items for each menu in Main Menu Copy Scan and Send Fax Scan and Store Access Stored Files Fax I Fax Inbox Favorite Settings No Default Settings No Shortcut settings for Options No Previous Settings No Setting items for...

Page 1302: ...l to this mod el Compati bility iR ADV C3300 Series to this mod el Compati bility V3 2 model to this mod el Address List HDD FLASH Yes RUI LUI WebService PC USB Yes Yes Yes Yes WebService PC Yes Yes Yes Yes Forwarding Settings HDD FLASH Yes RUI LUI WebService PC USB Yes Yes Yes Yes WebService PC Yes Yes Yes Yes Settings Registration Preferences Except for Paper Type Management Settings HDD Yes RUI...

Page 1303: ...Confidential Fax Inbox HDD No No No No No Network Place Settings HDD Yes RUI LUI WebService PC USB Yes Yes Yes No Web browser settings Web Access setting information HDD Yes 7 RUI LUI WebService PC USB Yes Yes Yes Yes 7 WebService PC Yes Yes Yes Yes MEAP settings MEAP application HDD No No No No No License files for MEAP applications HDD No No No No No Data saved using MEAP applications 27 HDD Yes...

Page 1304: ...ot be restored to the device 11 If the backup key information in the HDD is missing it is automatically recovered from the key in the FLASH PCB 12 When replacing the HDD and FLASH PCB simultaneously the key information is not restored automatically 13 An error code is displayed when ON is displayed for the TPM setting After all data settings are initialized after restart select ON for the TPM sett...

Page 1305: ...rt Export All 3 Service Mode Service mode top screen BACKUP Service mode setting values only can be backed up and restored 4 Web Service 27 Including the key ring for MEAP 28 Clear only the default job settings of the personal settings of the user at login 29 Advanced Box cannot be backed up to a PC SMB server is not possible When accessing Synchronize Custom Settings Server for the first time the...

Page 1306: ... 8 Storage area of universal data Note For details see the following list 1 1 TMP_PSS 9 PDL spool related area 1 1 1 APL_ SEND 10 Address book Setting for Forwarding 1 1 UPDATE 11 Update related area 1 1 1 APL_ KEEP 12 MEAP stored data 2 2 SYSDEV 13 The system related area 2 2 SWAP 14 SWAP temporary file memory alter native area 3 3 15 Area that can be expanded 16 DBG_ LOG 17 Debug related area 1 ...

Page 1307: ...e top of the screen Wallpaper Setting for Main Menu Other settings for Main Menu Setting for Advance Box Registration information of Network Place Setting for Web Access Web Access Setting information Setting for Universal Data Unsent document which is set timer transmission or reservation transmission Job log information Key and server certificate which are registered in Management Settings Devic...

Page 1308: ...to 099 Number on the screen Counter item Number on the screen Counter item 071 Toner Bottle Black 081 Toner Bottle premature removal Black Toner Bottle replacement 072 Toner Bottle Yellow 082 Toner Bottle premature removal Yellow Toner Bottle replacement 073 Toner Bottle Magenta 083 Toner Bottle premature removal Magenta To ner Bottle replacement 074 Toner Bottle Cyan 084 Toner Bottle premature re...

Page 1309: ...e Yellow 138 Total A1 2 sided 183 Unidentified Toner Bottle Magenta 139 Total A2 2 sided 184 Unidentified Toner Bottle Cyan 200 to 299 Number on the screen Counter item Number on the screen Counter item 201 Copy Total 1 250 Copy A Black 2 202 Copy Total 2 251 Copy A Full Color Large 203 Copy Large 252 Copy A Full Color Small 204 Copy Small 253 Copy A Single Color Large 205 Copy A Total 1 254 Copy ...

Page 1310: ...ull Color 1 305 Print A Total 1 336 PDL print Full Color 2 306 Print A Total 2 337 PDL print Single Color 1 307 Print A Large 338 PDL print Single Color 2 308 Print A Small 339 PDL print Black 1 309 Print Full Color 1 340 PDL print Black 2 310 Print Full Color 2 341 PDL print Full Color Large 311 Print Single Color 1 342 PDL print Full Color Small 312 Print Single Color 2 343 PDL print Single Colo...

Page 1311: ...nter item 601 Mail Box print Total 1 622 Mail Box print Full Color Small 2 sided 602 Mail Box print Total 2 623 Mail Box print Single Color Large 2 sided 603 Mail Box print Large 624 Mail Box print Single Color Small 2 sided 604 Mail Box print Small 625 Mail Box print Black Large 2 dided 605 Mail Box print Full Color 1 626 Mail Box print Black Small 2 sided 606 Mail Box print Full Color 2 631 Memo...

Page 1312: ...ull Color 2 764 Mobile print Full Color 2 733 Advanced Box print Black 1 765 Mobile print Black 1 734 Advanced Box print Black 2 766 Mobile print Black 2 735 Advanced Box print Full Color Large 767 Mobile print Full Color Large 736 Advanced Box print Full Color Small 768 Mobile print Full Color Small 737 Advanced Box print Black Large 769 Mobile print Black Large 738 Advanced Box print Black Small...

Page 1313: ... 921 Transmission scan total 5 Color 946 Transmission scan E mail Black 922 Transmission scan total 5 Black 961 Application scan Total 1 929 Transmission scan total 6 Color 962 Application black scan Total 1 930 Transmission scan total 6 Black 963 Application color scan Total 1 937 Mail Box scan Color Software Counter Specifications 1299 ...

Page 1314: ... data Note that increasing the number of overwrite increases the time required for the deletion operation NOTE When you perform Initialize All Data Settings license and data of MEAP application are initialized to the state same as when the HDD is replaced If MEAP application may be used by other users after the machine is removed disable the MEAP application and uninstall it in advance Performing ...

Page 1315: ...after Initialize All Data Settings is completed Consider using this report to provide to user as a material to inform of work details when executing Initialize All Data Settings upon user s request Operation after Initialize All Data Settings The machine is started normally at restart after Initialize All Data Settings without displaying the message Turn OFF the main power supply on the right side...

Page 1316: ...fail a function to select ON OFF of report output is not provided There is no second output of report when the machine is turned ON without paper Only the output of this report remains in the job log Deletion of Service Mode Setting Values Service Mode Lev1 Function CLEAR MN CON NOTE When MN CON clear is executed the address book on the HDD is not deleted As for the user data initialize all the da...

Page 1317: ...OPIER Display VERSION Printer engine DC Controller PCB DC CON Reader ADF Reader Controller PCB R CON Inner Finisher Finisher Controller PCB SORTER Inner Puncher Puncher Controller PCB PUNCH Buffer Path Unit Buffer Path Controller PCB BF PASS Staple Booklet Finish er Finisher Controller PCB SORTER SORT SLV Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB SDL STCH Puncher Puncher Controller PCB PUNCH Target PCBs of A...

Page 1318: ...ST CCD SH TRGT Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD 100 RG Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD 100 GB Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR R Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR G Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR B Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M1 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M2 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M3 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M4 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M5 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M6 Re...

Page 1319: ...stored COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH G2 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH G10 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M10 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M11 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M12 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 S10 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 S11 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 S12 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF M10 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF M11 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF M12 Restored C...

Page 1320: ...red COPIER ADJUST COLOR PH OFS M Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR PH OFS C Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR PH OFS K Restored COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ MF A4R Restored COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ MF A4 Restored COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ MF MAX Restored COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ MF MIN Restored COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ MF A5R Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS SGNL Y Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS SGNL M Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS SGNL...

Page 1321: ...R ADJUST FEED ADJ EXRV SPD Restored COPIER ADJUST HV PRI DIS TGY Restored COPIER ADJUST HV PRI DIS TGM Restored COPIER ADJUST HV PRI DIS TGC Restored COPIER ADJUST HV PRI DIS TGK Restored COPIER ADJUST HV PRI DIS TGY2 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV PRI DIS TGM2 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV PRI DIS TGC2 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV PRI DIS TGK2 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV PRI OFSTAC Y Restored COPIER ADJUST HV ...

Page 1322: ...JUST IMG REG REG V K Restored COPIER ADJUST IMG REG REG H M Restored COPIER ADJUST IMG REG REG V M Restored COPIER ADJUST IMG REG REG HS M Restored COPIER ADJUST IMG REG MAG H Restored COPIER ADJUST IMG REG MAG V Restored COPIER ADJUST MISC SEG ADJ Restored COPIER ADJUST MISC K ADJ Restored COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS ADJ Restored COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS EN Restored COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS CNT Restored C...

Page 1323: ... Restored COPIER OPTION ACC PDL THR Restored COPIER OPTION ACC MEAP SRL Restored Restored COPIER OPTION ACC HCC P Restored Restored COPIER OPTION ACC CV CSZ Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION ACC IMG RTRY Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW MODEL SZ Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW SCANSLCT Restored COPIER OPTION IMG MCON PASCAL Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW DH SW Restored Restored COPIER OP...

Page 1324: ...red Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK NS LGN Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW T CRG SW Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK MEAP PN Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION IMG MCON TMIC BK Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW SVMD ENT Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION ENV SET ENVP INT Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW DRM CNTR Restored COPIER OPTION IMG DEV PCHINT...

Page 1325: ... Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXS TMP2 Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXS TMP3 Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXS TMP4 Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXS TMP5 Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXS TMP6 Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXST2 N2 Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXST2 UH Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FN ENTMP Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW SJOB CL Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION ...

Page 1326: ...PR Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS FIRM Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS MEAP Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS UGW Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW LOCLFIRM Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TBL9 Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TB10 Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXS TMP7 Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXS TMP8 R...

Page 1327: ...OPIER OPTION IMG FIX TRC LP Restored COPIER OPTION IMG MCON COMPRATE Restored Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK SIPAUDIO Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK SIPINOUT Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK SIPREGPR Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK PRCLTYPE Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW ASLPMAX Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK VLA...

Page 1328: ...Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXS T013 Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TB01 Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TB02 Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TB03 Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TB04 Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TB05 Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TB06 Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TB07 Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TB08 Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TB09 ...

Page 1329: ...ER OPTION USER DOC REM Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER DPT ID 7 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER RUI RJT Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER SND RATE Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER FREG SW Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER IFAX SZL Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER IFAX PGD Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER MEA...

Page 1330: ...P CRYP Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER SNDSTREN Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER FAXSTREN Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER SJ UNMSK Restored COPIER OPTION USER SJ CLMSK Restored COPIER OPTION USER PRTDP SW Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER PDFD MSW Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER SFT OUT Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER...

Page 1331: ...D Restored SORTER ADJUST SFT SPD Restored SORTER ADJUST STP SPD Restored SORTER ADJUST RBLT PS2 Restored SORTER OPTION MD SPRTN Restored SORTER OPTION BUFF SW Restored SORTER OPTION PUCH SW Restored Restored SORTER OPTION 1SHT SRT Restored Restored SORTER OPTION MSTP TMG Restored Restored Restored SORTER OPTION FR ST PO Restored Restored SORTER OPTION MSTP WT Restored Restored SORTER OPTION TRY PS...

Reviews:

No comments